svn merge ^/branches/released .

49 files changed, 0 insertions, 11388 deletions

diff --git a/libXaw/spec/AsciiSink b/libXaw/spec/AsciiSink
deleted file mode 100644
index 56dc20ea6..000000000
--- a/libXaw/spec/AsciiSink
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,77 +0,0 @@
-.\" $Xorg: AsciiSink,v 1.3 2000/08/17 19:42:25 cpqbld Exp $
-.LP
-.NH 2
-Ascii Sink Object and Multi Sink Object
-.LP
-.XS
-	AsciiSink Object
-.XE
-.IN "AsciiSink object" "" "@DEF@"
-.LP
-.Ds 0
-.TA 2.0i
-.ta 2.0i
-Application Header file	<X11/Xaw/AsciiSink.h>
-.IN "AsciiSink.h" ""
-Class Header file	<X11/Xaw/AsciiSinkP.h>
-.IN "AsciiSinkP.h" ""
-Class		asciiSinkObjectClass
-.IN "asciiSinkObjectClass" ""
-Class Name	AsciiSink
-.IN "AsciiSink object" "class name"
-Superclass	TextSink
-.De
-.LP
-The AsciiSink or MultiSink object is used by a text widget to render the text.
-Depending on its \fBinternational\fP resource, a
-AsciiText widget will create one or the other of these when the AsciiText
-itself is created.  Both types are nearly identical; the following discussion
-applies to both, with MultiSink differences noted only as they occur.
-The AsciiSink
-will display all printing characters in an 8 bit font, along with handling Tab
-and Carriage Return.  The name has been left as ``AsciiSink'' for compatibility.
-\fIThe MultiSink will display all printing characters in a font set, along with
-handling Tab and Carriage
-Return.\fP    The source object also reports the text window metrics to the
-text widgets.
-.NH 3
-Resources
-.LP
-When creating an AsciiSink object instance, the following resources are
-retrieved from the argument list or from the resource database:
-.LP
-.IN "AsciiSink object" "resources"
-.TS H
-lw(1i) lw(1i) lw(1i) lw(.5i) lw(2i).
-_
-.sp 3p
-.TB
-Name	Class	Type	Notes	Default Value
-.sp 3p
-_
-.TH
-.R
-.sp 3p
-background	Background	Pixel		XtDefaultBackground
-destroyCallback	Callback	XtCallbackList		NULL
-displayNonprinting	Output	Boolean		True
-echo	Output	Boolean		True
-font	Font	XFontStruct*		XtDefaultFont
-fontSet	FontSet	XFontSet		XtDefaultFontSet
-foreground	Foreground	Pixel		XtDefaultForeground
-.sp 3p
-_
-.TE
-.Bg Bold
-This resource is retrieved by the AsciiSink instead of being copied
-from the Text widget.
-.Dc
-.Sd Bold
-.Sh Bold
-.IP \fBfont\fP 1.5i
-The text font to use when displaying the \fBstring\fP.
-(This resource is present in the AsciiSink, but not the MultiSink.)
-.IP \fBfontSet\fP 1.5i
-The text font set to use when displaying the \fBstring\fP.
-(This resource is present in the MultiSink, but not the AsciiSink.)
-
diff --git a/libXaw/spec/AsciiSource b/libXaw/spec/AsciiSource
deleted file mode 100644
index 19b976562..000000000
--- a/libXaw/spec/AsciiSource
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,208 +0,0 @@
-.\" $Xorg: AsciiSource,v 1.3 2000/08/17 19:42:26 cpqbld Exp $
-.NH 2
-Ascii Source Object and Multi Source Object
-.LP
-.XS
-	AsciiSrc Object
-.XE
-.IN "AsciiSrc object" "" "@DEF@"
-.LP
-.Ds 0
-.TA 2.0i
-.ta 2.0i
-Application Header file	<X11/Xaw/AsciiSrc.h> or <X11/Xaw/MultiSrc.h>
-.IN "AsciiSrc.h" ""
-Class Header file	<X11/Xaw/AsciiSrcP.h> or  <X11/Xaw/MultiSrcP.h>
-.IN "AsciiSrcP.h" ""
-Class		asciiSrcObjectClass or multiSrcObjectClass
-.IN "asciiSrcObjectClass" ""
-Class Name	AsciiSrc or MultiSrc
-.IN "AsciiSrc object" "class name"
-Superclass	TextSource
-.De
-.LP
-The AsciiSrc or MultiSrc object is used by a text widget to read the text from a
-file or string in memory.  Depending on its \fBinternational\fP resource, an
-AsciiText widget will create one or the other of these when the AsciiText
-itself is created.  Both types are nearly identical; the following discussion
-applies to both, with MultiSrc differences noted only as they occur.
-.LP
-The AsciiSrc understands all Latin1 characters plus Tab
-and Carriage Return.  \fIThe MultiSrc understands any set of character sets that
-the underlying X implementation's internationalization handles.\fP
-.LP
-The AsciiSrc can be either of two types: \fBXawAsciiFile\fP
-or \fBXawAsciiString\fP.
-.LP
-AsciiSrc objects of type \fBXawAsciiFile\fP read the text from a file and
-store it
-into an internal buffer.  This buffer may then be modified, provided the
-text widget is in the correct edit mode, just as if it were a source of
-type \fBXawAsciiString\fP.  Unlike R3 and earlier versions of the AsciiSrc,
-it is now possible to specify an editable disk source.  The file is not
-updated, however, until a call to \fBXawAsciiSave\fP is made.  When the
-source is in this mode the \fBuseStringInPlace\fP resource is ignored.
-.LP
-AsciiSrc objects of type \fBXawAsciiString\fP have the text buffer
-implemented as a string.
-\fIMultiSrc objects of type \fBXawAsciiString\fP have the text buffer
-implemented as a wide character string.\fP
-The string owner is responsible for allocating and managing storage for the
-string.
-.LP
-In the default case for AsciiSrc objects of type \fBXawAsciiString\fP,
-the resource \fBuseStringInPlace\fP is false,
-and the widget owns the string.  The initial value of the
-string resource, and any update made by the application
-programmer to the string resource with \fBXtSetValues\fP, is copied
-into memory private to the widget, and managed internally by the widget.
-The application writer
-does not need to worry about running out of buffer space
-(subject to the total memory available to the application).
-The performance does not decay linearly as the buffer grows
-large, as is necessarily the case when the text buffer is used
-in place.   The application writer must use \fBXtGetValues\fP to
-determine the contents of the text buffer, which will return
-a copy of the widget's text buffer as
-it existed at the time of the \fBXtGetValues\fP call.   This copy
-is not affected by subsequent updates to the text buffer, i.e.,
-it is not updated as the user types input into the text buffer.
-This copy is freed upon the next call to XtGetValues to
-retrieve the string resource; however, to conserve memory,
-there is a convenience routine, \fBXawAsciiSourceFreeString\fP, allowing the
-application programmer to direct the widget to free the copy.
-.LP
-When the resource \fBuseStringInPlace\fP is true and the AsciiSrc object
-is of type \fBXawAsciiString\fP, the application
-is the string owner.  The widget will take the value
-of the string resource as its own text buffer, and the \fBlength\fP
-resource indicates the buffer size.   In this case
-the buffer contents change as the user types at the widget;
-it is not necessary to call \fBXtGetValues\fP on the string
-resource to determine the contents of the buffer\*-it will
-simply return the address of the application's implementation
-of the text buffer.
-.NH 3
-Resources
-.LP
-When creating an AsciiSrc object instance, the following resources are
-retrieved from the argument list or from the resource database:
-.LP
-.IN "AsciiSrc object" "resources"
-.TS H
-lw(1i) lw(1i) lw(1i) lw(.5i) lw(2i).
-_
-.sp 3p
-.TB
-Name	Class	Type	Notes	Default Value
-.sp 3p
-_
-.TH
-.R
-.sp 3p
-callback	Callback	XtCallbackList		NULL
-dataCompression	DataCompression	Boolean		True
-destroyCallback	Callback	Callback		NULL
-editType	EditType	EditMode		XawtextRead
-length	Length	Int	A	length of \fBstring\fP
-pieceSize	PieceSize	Int		BUFSIZ
-string	String	String		NULL
-type	Type	AsciiType		XawAsciiString
-useStringInPlace	UseStringInPlace	Boolean		False
-.sp 3p
-_
-.TE
-.Oc Bold
-.Dc
-.Od Bold
-.Oe
-.Ol Bold
-.Op Bold
-.Os Bold
-.Ot Bold
-.Ou Bold
-.NH 3
-Convenience Routines
-.LP
-The AsciiSrc has a few convenience routines that allow the
-application programmer quicker or easier access to some of the
-commonly used functionality of the AsciiSrc.
-.NH 4
-Conserving Memory
-.LP
-When the AsciiSrc widget is not in \fBuseStringInPlace\fP mode
-space must be allocated whenever the file is saved, or the string is
-requested with a call to \fBXtGetValues\fP.  This memory is allocated on the
-fly, and remains valid until the next time a string needs to be allocated.
-You may save memory by freeing this string as soon as you are done
-with it by calling \fBXawAsciiSourceFreeString\fP.
-.FD 0
-void XawAsciiSourceFreeString(\fIw\fP)
-.IN "XawAsciiSourceFreeString" "" @DEF@
-.br
-Widget \fIw\fP;
-.FN
-.IP \fIw\fP 1i
-Specifies the AsciiSrc object.
-.LP
-This function will free the memory that contains the string pointer returned
-by \fBXtGetValues\fP.  This will normally happen automatically when
-the next call to \fBXtGetValues\fP occurs, or when the widget is destroyed.
-.NH 4
-Saving Files
-.LP
-To save the changes made in the current text source into a file use
-\fBXawAsciiSave\fP.
-.FD 0
-Boolean XawAsciiSave(\fIw\fP)
-.IN "XawAsciiSave" "" @DEF@
-.br
-Widget \fIw\fP;
-.FN
-.IP \fIw\fP 1i
-Specifies the AsciiSrc object.
-.LP
-\fBXawAsciiSave\fP returns \fBTrue\fP if the save was successful.
-It will update the file named in the \fBstring\fP resource.
-If the buffer has not been changed, no action will be taken.  This function
-only works on an AsciiSrc of type \fBXawAsciiFile\fP.
-.LP
-.sp 1
-To save the contents of the current text buffer into a named file use
-\fBXawAsciiSaveAsFile\fP.
-.FD 0
-Boolean XawAsciiSaveAsFile(\fIw\fP, \fIname\fP)
-.IN "XawAsciiSaveAsFile" "" @DEF@
-.br
-Widget \fIw\fP;
-.br
-String \fIname\fP;
-.FN
-.IP \fIw\fP 1i
-Specifies the AsciiSrc object.
-.IP \fIname\fP 1i
-The name of the file to save the current buffer into.
-.LP
-This function returns \fBTrue\fP if the save was successful.
-\fBXawAsciiSaveAsFile\fP will work with a buffer of either type
-\fBXawAsciiString\fP or type \fBXawAsciiFile\fP.
-.NH 4
-Seeing if the Source has Changed
-.LP
-To find out if the text buffer in an AsciiSrc object has changed
-since the last time it was saved with \fBXawAsciiSave\fP or queried
-.IN "XawAsciiSave" ""
-use \fBXawAsciiSourceChanged\fP.
-.FD 0
-Boolean XawAsciiSourceChanged(\fIw\fP)
-.IN "XawAsciiSourceChanged" "" @DEF@
-.br
-Widget \fIw\fP;
-.FN
-.IP \fIw\fP 1i
-Specifies the AsciiSrc object.
-.LP
-This function will return \fBTrue\fP if the source has changed since
-the last time it was saved or queried.  The internal change flag is
-reset whenever the string is queried via \fBXtGetValues\fP or the
-buffer is saved via \fBXawAsciiSave\fP.
diff --git a/libXaw/spec/AsciiText b/libXaw/spec/AsciiText
deleted file mode 100644
index 815e0e162..000000000
--- a/libXaw/spec/AsciiText
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,166 +0,0 @@
-.\" $Xorg: AsciiText,v 1.3 2000/08/17 19:42:26 cpqbld Exp $
-.NH 2
-Ascii Text Widget
-.LP
-.XS
-	AsciiText Widget
-.XE
-.IN "AsciiText widget" "" "@DEF@"
-.LP
-.Ds 0
-.TA 2.0i
-.ta 2.0i
-Application Header file	<X11/Xaw/AsciiText.h>
-.IN "AsciiText.h" ""
-ClassHeader file	<X11/Xaw/AsciiTextP.h>
-.IN "AsciiTextP.h" ""
-Class		asciiTextWidgetClass
-.IN "asciiTextWidgetClass" ""
-Class Name	Text
-.IN "AsciiText widget" "class name"
-Superclass	Text
-Sink Name	textSink
-Source Name	textSource
-.De
-.sp 1
-.LP
-For the ease of internationalization, the AsciiText widget class name has not
-been changed, although it is actually able to support non-ASCII locales.
-The AsciiText widget is really a collection of smaller parts.  It
-includes the Text widget itself, a ``Source'' (which supports memory management),
-and a ``Sink'' (which handles the display).  There are currently two supported
-sources, the AsciiSrc and MultiSrc, and two supported sinks, the AsciiSink and
-.IN "AsciiSrc object" ""
-.IN "AsciiSink object" ""
-.IN "MultiSrc object" ""
-.IN "MultiSink object" ""
-MultiSink.  Some of
-the resources listed below are not actually resources of the
-AsciiText, but belong to the associated source or sink.  This is
-is noted in the explanation of each resource where it applies.  When
-specifying these resources in a resource file it is necessary to use
-\fI*AsciiText*resource_name\fP instead of
-\fI*AsciiText.resource_name\fP, since they actually belong to the
-children of the AsciiText widget, and not the AsciiText widget itself.
-However, these resources may be set directly on the AsciiText widget at
-widget creation time, or via \fBXtSetValues\fP.
-.NH 3
-Resources
-.LP
-When creating an AsciiText widget instance, the following resources are
-retrieved from the argument list or from the resource database:
-.LP
-.IN "AsciiText widget" "resources"
-.TS H
-expand;
-lw(1i) lw(1i) lw(1.1i) lw(.5i) lw(1.9i).
-_
-.sp 3p
-.TB
-Name	Class	Type	Notes	Default Value
-.sp 3p
-_
-.TH
-.R
-.sp 3p
-accelerators	Accelerators	AcceleratorTable		NULL
-ancestorSensitive	AncestorSensitive	Boolean	D	True
-autoFill	AutoFill	Boolean		False
-background	Background	Pixel		XtDefaultBackground
-backgroundPixmap	Pixmap	Pixmap		XtUnspecifiedPixmap
-borderColor	BorderColor	Pixel		XtDefaultForeground
-borderPixmap	Pixmap	Pixmap		XtUnspecifiedPixmap
-borderWidth	BorderWidth	Dimension		1
-bottomMargin	Margin	Position		2
-callback	Callback	XtCallbackList		NULL
-colormap	Colormap	Colormap		Parent's Colormap
-cursor	Cursor	Cursor		XC_xterm
-cursorName	Cursor	String		NULL
-dataCompression	DataCompression	Boolean		True
-depth	Depth	int	C	Parent's Depth
-destroyCallback	Callback	XtCallbackList		NULL
-displayCaret	Output	Boolean		True
-displayNonprinting	Output	Boolean		True
-displayPosition	TextPosition	XawTextPosition		0
-echo	Output	Boolean		True
-editType	EditType	XawTextEditType		XawtextRead
-font	Font	XFontStruct*		XtDefaultFont
-fontSet	FontSet	XFontSet		XtDefaultFontSet
-foreground	Foreground	Pixel		XtDefaultForeground
-height	Height	Dimension	A	Font height + margins
-insensitiveBorder	Insensitive	Pixmap		GreyPixmap
-insertPosition	TextPosition	int		0
-international	International	Boolean	C	False
-leftMargin	Margin	Dimension		2
-length	Length	int	A	length of \fBstring\fP
-mappedWhenManaged	MappedWhenManaged	Boolean		True
-pieceSize	PieceSize	XawTextPosition		BUFSIZ
-pointerColor	Foreground	Pixel		XtDefaultForeground
-pointerColorBackground	Background	Pixel		XtDefaultBackground
-resize	Resize	XawTextResizeMode		XawtextResizeNever
-rightMargin	Margin	Position		2
-screen	Screen	Screen	R	Parent's Screen
-scrollHorizontal	Scroll	XawTextScrollMode		XawtextScrollNever
-scrollVertical	Scroll	XawTextScrollMode		XawtextScrollNever
-selectTypes	SelectTypes	XawTextSelectType*		See above
-sensitive	Sensitive	Boolean		True
-string	String	String		NULL
-textSink	TextSink	Widget		An AsciiSink
-textSource	TextSource	Widget		An AsciiSrc
-topMargin	Margin	Position		2
-translations	Translations	TranslationTable		See above
-type	Type	XawAsciiType		XawAsciiString
-useStringInPlace	UseStringInPlace	Boolean		False
-width	Width	Dimension		100
-wrap	Wrap	WrapMode		XawtextWrapNever
-x	Position	Position		0
-y	Position	Position		0
-.sp 3p
-_
-.TE
-.Ac
-.As
-.Af
-.Bg
-.Gp
-.Bc
-.Bp
-.Bw
-.Tm
-.Oc AsciiText
-.Cm
-.Cu
-.Cn
-.Od AsciiText
-.Dp
-.Dc
-.Tc
-.Sd AsciiText
-.Td
-.Oe AsciiText
-.Sh AsciiText
-.Sf AsciiText
-.Sn AsciiText
-.Sg AsciiText
-.Hw
-.Ib
-.Ti
-.Ol AsciiText
-.Mm
-.Pf
-.Pb
-.Op AsciiText
-.Tz
-.Sc
-.Ts
-.St
-.Se
-.Os AsciiText
-.To
-.Tr
-.Ot AsciiText
-.Ou AsciiText
-.Tw
-.Xy
-
-
diff --git a/libXaw/spec/Box b/libXaw/spec/Box
deleted file mode 100644
index 22bfe39b1..000000000
--- a/libXaw/spec/Box
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,139 +0,0 @@
-.\" $Xorg: Box,v 1.3 2000/08/17 19:42:26 cpqbld Exp $
-.NH 2
-Box Widget
-.LP
-.XS
-	Box Widget
-.XE
-.IN "Box widget" "" "@DEF@"
-.Ds 0
-.TA 2.0i
-.ta 2.0i
-.sp
-Application Header file	<X11/Xaw/Box.h>
-.IN "Box.h" ""
-Class Header file	<X11/Xaw/BoxP.h>
-.IN "BoxP.h" ""
-Class		boxWidgetClass
-.IN "boxWidgetClass" ""
-Class Name	Box
-.IN "Box widget" "class name"
-Superclass	Composite
-.sp
-.De
-.LP
-The Box widget provides geometry management of arbitrary widgets in a
-box of a specified dimension.  The children are rearranged when
-resizing events occur either on the Box or its children, or when
-children are managed or unmanaged.  The Box widget always attempts to
-pack its children as tightly as possible within the geometry allowed by
-its parent.
-.LP
-Box widgets are commonly used to manage a related set of buttons and
-are often called ButtonBox widgets, but the children are not
-limited to buttons.  The Box's children are arranged on a background that
-has its own specified dimensions and color.
-.NH 3
-Resources
-.LP
-When creating a Box widget instance, the following resources are
-retrieved from the argument list or from the resource database:
-.LP
-.IN "Box widget" "resources"
-.TS H
-expand;
-lw(1i) lw(1i) lw(1i) lw(.5i) lw(2i).
-_
-.sp 3p
-.TB
-Name	Class	Type	Notes	Default Value
-.sp 3p
-_
-.TH
-.R
-.sp 3p
-accelerators	Accelerators	AcceleratorTable		NULL
-ancestorSensitive	AncestorSensitive	Boolean	D	True
-background	Background	Pixel		XtDefaultBackground
-backgroundPixmap	Pixmap	Pixmap		XtUnspecifiedPixmap
-borderColor	BorderColor	Pixel		XtDefaultForeground
-borderPixmap	Pixmap	Pixmap		XtUnspecifiedPixmap
-borderWidth	BorderWidth	Dimension		1
-children	ReadOnly	WidgetList	R	NULL
-colormap	Colormap	Colormap		Parent's Colormap
-depth	Depth	int	C	Parent's Depth
-destroyCallback	Callback	XtCallbackList		NULL
-height	Height	Dimension	A	see \fBLayout Semantics\fP
-hSpace	HSpace	Dimension		4
-mappedWhenManaged	MappedWhenManaged	Boolean		True
-numChildren	ReadOnly	Cardinal	R	0
-orientation	Orientation	Orientation		XtorientVertical
-screen	Screen	Screen	R	Parent's Screen
-sensitive	Sensitive	Boolean		True
-vSpace	VSpace	Dimension		4
-translations	Translations	TranslationTable		NULL
-width	Width	Dimension	A	see \fBLayout Semantics\fP
-x	Position	Position		0
-y	Position	Position		0
-.sp 3p
-_
-.TE
-.Ac
-.As
-.Bg
-.Gp
-.Bc
-.Bp
-.Bw
-.Ch
-.Cm
-.Dp
-.Dc
-.Hw
-.IP \fBhSpace\fP 1.5i
-.br
-.ns
-.IP \fBvSpace\fP 1.5i
-The amount of space, in pixels, to leave between the children.  This
-resource specifies the amount of space left between the outermost
-children and the edge of the box.
-.Mm
-.Nc
-.IP \fBorientation\fP 1.5i
-Specifies whether the preferred shape of the box (i.e. the result
-returned by the query_geometry class method) is tall and narrow
-\fBXtorientVertical\fP or short and wide \fPXtorientHorizontal\fP.
-.IN "XtorientVertical" ""
-.IN "XtorientHorizontal" ""
-.IN "conversions" "Orientation"
-When the Box is a child of a parent which enforces width constraints, it
-is usually better to specify \fBXtorientVertical\fP (the default).
-When the parent enforces height constraints, it is usually better to
-specify \fBXtorientHorizontal\fP.
-.Rs "horizontal \fPand\fB vertical"
-.Sc
-.Se
-.Tr
-.Xy
-.NH 3
-Layout Semantics
-.IN "Box widget" "layout semantics"
-.LP
-Each time a child is managed or unmanaged, the Box widget will attempt
-to reposition the remaining children to compact the box.  Children are
-positioned in order left to right, top to bottom.  The packing
-algorithm used depends on the \fBorientation\fP of the Box.
-.IP \fBXtorientVertical\fP 1.5i
-.IN "XtorientVertical" "" @DEF@
-When the next child does not fit on the current row, a new row is
-started.  If a child is wider than the width of the box, the box will
-request a larger width from its parent and will begin the layout
-process from the beginning if a new width is granted.
-.IP \fBXtorientHorizontal\fP 1.5i
-.IN "XtorientHorizontal" "" @DEF@
-When the next child does not fit on the current row, the Box widens if
-possible (so as to keep children on a single row); otherwise a new row is
-started.
-.LP
-After positioning all children, the Box widget attempts to shrink its
-own size to the minimum dimensions required for the layout.
diff --git a/libXaw/spec/CH1 b/libXaw/spec/CH1
deleted file mode 100644
index b392a7012..000000000
--- a/libXaw/spec/CH1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,411 +0,0 @@
-.\" $Xorg: CH1,v 1.3 2000/08/17 19:42:26 cpqbld Exp $
-.ps 11
-.nr PS 11
-.ds LH \fBAthena Widget Set\fP
-.ds CH
-.ds RH \fB\*(xV\fP
-.bp 1
-.af PN 1
-\&
-.sp 1
-.ce 3
-\s+1\fBChapter 1\fP\s-1
-
-\s+1\fBAthena Widgets and The Intrinsics\fP\s-1
-.sp 2
-.nr H1 1
-.if \n(GS .nr nh*hl 1
-.nr H2 0
-.nr H3 0
-.nr H4 0
-.nr H5 0
-.LP
-.XS
-Chapter 1 \- Athena Widgets and The \*(xI
-.XE
-The X Toolkit is made up of two distinct pieces, the Xt \*(xI and a
-widget set.  The Athena widget set is a sample implementation of a
-widget set built upon the \*(xI.  In the \*(tk, a widget is the
-combination of an X window or subwindow and its associated input and
-output semantics.
-.LP
-Because the \*(xI provide the same basic functionality to all widget
-sets it may be possible to use widgets from the Athena widget set with
-other widget sets based upon the \*(xI.  Since widget sets may also
-implement private protocols, all functionality may not be available when
-mixing and matching widget sets.  For information about the \*(xI, see
-the \fI\*(xT\fP.
-.LP
-The Athena widget set is a library package layered on top of the \*(xI
-and Xlib that provides a set of user interface tools sufficient to build
-a wide variety of applications.  This layer extends the basic
-abstractions provided by X and provides the next layer of functionality
-primarily by supplying a cohesive set of sample widgets.  Although the
-\*(xI are a Consortium standard, there is no standard widget set.
-.LP
-To the extent possible, the \*(xI are "policy-free".  The application
-environment and widget set, not the \*(xI, define, implement, and
-enforce:
-.IP \(bu 5
-Policy
-.IP \(bu 5
-Consistency
-.IP \(bu 5
-Style
-.LP
-Each individual widget implementation defines its own policy.  The \*(tk
-design allows for, but does not necessarily encourage, the free mixing
-of radically differing widget implementations.
-.NH 2
-Introduction to the \*(tk
-.LP
-.XS
-	Introduction to the \*(tk
-.XE
-.IN "introduction" "" "@DEF@"
-The \*(tk provides tools that simplify the design of
-application user interfaces in the X Window System programming environment.
-It assists application programmers by providing a set of common
-underlying user-interface functions.  It also lets widget programmers
-modify existing widgets, by subclassing, or add new widgets.  By using
-the \*(tk in their applications, programmers can present a similar
-user interface across applications to all workstation users.
-.LP
-The \*(tk consists of:
-.IP \(bu 5
-A set of \*(xI functions for building widgets
-.IP \(bu 5
-An architectural model for constructing widgets
-.IP \(bu 5
-A widget set for application programming
-.LP
-While the majority of the \*(xI functions are intended
-for the widget programmer,
-a subset of the \*(xI functions are to be used by application programmers
-(see  \fI\*(xT\fP).
-The architectural model lets the widget programmer design new widgets
-by using the \*(xI and by combining other widgets.
-The application interface layers built on top of the \*(tk include a
-coordinated set of widgets and composition policies.
-Some of these widgets and policies are specific to a single
-application domain, and others are common to a variety of
-applications.
-.LP
-The remainder of this chapter discusses the \*(tk and Athena widget set:
-.IP \(bu 5
-Terminology
-.IP \(bu 5
-Model
-.IP \(bu 5
-Conventions used in this manual
-.IP \(bu 5
-Format of the Widget Reference Chapters
-.NH 2
-Terminology
-.LP
-.XS
-	Terminology
-.XE
-.LP
-In addition to the terms already defined for X programming (see \fI\*(xL\fP),
-the following terms are specific to the \*(xI and Athena widget set
-and used throughout this document.
-.LP
-\fBApplication programmer\fP
-.IN "application programmer" "" "@DEF@"
-.IP
-A programmer who uses the \*(tk to produce an application user interface.
-.LP
-\fBChild\fP
-.IN "child" "" "@DEF"
-.IP
-A widget that is contained within another "parent" widget.
-.LP
-\fBClass\fP
-.IN "class" "" "@DEF@"
-.IP
-The general group to which a specific object belongs.
-.LP
-\fBClient\fP
-.IN "client" "" "@DEF@"
-.IP
-A function that uses a widget in an application or for composing
-other widgets.
-.LP
-\fBFullName\fP
-.IN "FullName" "" "@DEF"
-.IP
-The name of a widget instance appended to the full name of its parent.
-.LP
-\fBInstance\fP
-.IN "instance" "" "@DEF@"
-.IP
-A specific widget object as opposed to a general widget class.
-.LP
-\fBMethod\fP
-.IN "method" "" "@DEF@"
-.IP
-A function or procedure implemented by a widget class.
-.LP
-\fBName\fP
-.IN "name" "widget" "@DEF@"
-.IP
-The name that is specific to an instance of a widget for a given client.
-This name is specified at creation time and cannot be modified.
-.LP
-\fBObject\fP
-.IN "object" "" "@DEF@"
-.IP
-A data abstraction consisting of private data and private and public
-functions that operate on the private data.
-Users of the abstraction can interact with the object only through calls
-to the object's public functions.
-In the \*(tk,
-some of the object's public functions are called directly by the application,
-while others are called indirectly when the application calls the common
-\*(xI functions.
-In general, if a function is common to all widgets,
-an application uses a single \*(xI function to invoke the function for all
-types of widgets.
-If a function is unique to a single widget type,
-the widget exports the function.
-.LP
-\fBParent\fP
-.IN "parent" "" "@DEF@"
-.IP
-A widget that contains at least one other ("child") widget.
-A parent widget is also known as a composite widget.
-.LP
-\fBResource\fP
-.IN "resource" "" "@DEF@"
-.IP
-A named piece of data in a widget that can be set by a client,
-by an application, or by user defaults.
-.LP
-\fBSuperclass\fP
-.IN "superclass" "" "@DEF@"
-.IP
-A larger class of which a specific class is a member.
-All members of a class are also members of the superclass.
-.LP
-\fBUser\fP
-.IN "user" "" "@DEF@"
-.IP
-A person interacting with a workstation.
-.LP
-\fBWidget\fP
-.IN "widget" "" "@DEF@"
-.IP
-An object providing a user-interface abstraction (for example, a Scrollbar
-widget).
-.LP
-\fBWidget class\fP
-.IN "widget class" "" "@DEF@"
-.IP
-The general group to which a specific widget belongs,
-otherwise known as the type of the widget.
-.LP
-\fBWidget programmer\fP
-.IN "widget programmer" "" "@DEF@"
-.IP
-A programmer who adds new widgets to the \*(tk.
-.NH 2
-Underlying Model
-.LP
-.XS
-	Underlying Model
-.XE
-.IN "underlying model" "" "@DEF@"
-The underlying architectural model is based on the following premises:
-.KS
-.IP "Widgets are X windows"
-.IP
-Every user-interface widget is associated with an X window.
-The X window ID for a widget is readily available from the widget.
-Standard Xlib calls can be used by widgets for many of their input and
-output operations.
-.KE
-.KS
-.IP "Information hiding"
-.IP
-The data for every widget is private to the widget and its subclasses.
-That is, the data is neither directly accessible
-nor visible outside of the module implementing the widget.
-All program interaction with the widget is performed by a set of operations
-(methods) that are defined for the widget.
-.KE
-.KS
-.IP "Widget semantics and widget layout geometry"
-.IP
-Widget semantics are clearly separated from widget layout geometry.
-Widgets are concerned with implementing specific user-interface
-semantics.  They have little control over issues such as their size or
-placement relative to other widget peers.  Mechanisms are provided for
-associating geometric managers with widgets and for widgets to make
-suggestions about their own geometry.
-.KE
-.NH 2
-Conventions Used in this Manual
-.IP \(bu 5
-.IN "conventions" "used in manual" "@DEF@"
-All resources available to the widgets are listed with each widget.  Many
-of these are available to more than one widget class due to the object
-oriented nature of the \*(xI.  The new resources for each widget are
-listed in bold text, and the inherited resources are listed in plain text.
-.IP \(bu 5
-Global symbols are printed in \fBbold\fP and can be function names,
-symbols defined in include files, or structure names.  Arguments are
-printed in \fIitalics\fP.
-.IP \(bu 5
-Each function is introduced by a general discussion that distinguishes
-it from other functions.  The function declaration itself follows, and
-each argument is specifically explained.  General discussion of the
-function, if any is required, follows the arguments.  Where
-applicable, the last paragraph of the explanation lists the return values
-of the function.
-.IP \(bu 5
-To eliminate any ambiguity between those arguments that you pass and
-those that a function returns to you, the explanations for all
-arguments that you pass start with the word \fIspecifies\fP or, in the
-case of multiple arguments, the word \fIspecify\fP. The explanations
-for all arguments that are returned to you start with the word
-\fIreturns\fP or, in the case of multiple arguments, the word
-\fIreturn\fP.  The explanations for all arguments that you can pass
-and are returned start with the words \fIspecifies and returns\fP.
-.IP \(bu 5
-Any pointer to a structure that is used to return a value is
-designated as such by the \fI_return\fP suffix as part of its name.
-All other pointers passed to these functions are used for reading
-only.  A few arguments use pointers to structures that are used for
-both input and output and are indicated by using the \fI_in_out\fP
-suffix.
-.IN "_return" "" "@DEF@"
-.IN "_in_out" "" "@DEF@"
-.NH 2
-Format of the Widget Reference Chapters
-.LP
-.IN "conventions" "chapter format" "@DEF@"
-.IN "chapter format" "" "@DEF@"
-The majority of this document is a reference guide for the Athena
-widget set.  Chapters three through six give the programmer all
-information necessary to use the widgets.  The layout of the chapters
-follows a specific pattern to allow the programmer to easily find the
-desired information.
-.LP
-The first few pages of every chapter give an overview of the widgets
-in that section.  Widgets are grouped into chapters by functionality.
-.IP "Chapter 3" .75i
-Simple Widgets
-.IP "Chapter 4" .75i
-Menus
-.IP "Chapter 5" .75i
-Text Widgets
-.IP "Chapter 6" .75i
-Composite and Constraint Widget
-.LP
-Following the introduction will be a description of each widget in that
-chapter.  When no functional grouping is obvious the widgets are listed
-in alphabetical order, such as in chapters three and six.
-.LP
-The first section of each widget's description is a table that
-contains general information about this widget class.  Here is the
-table for the Box widget, and an explanation of all the entries.
-.Ds 0
-.TA 2.0i
-.ta 2.0i
-.sp
-Application Header file	<X11/Xaw/Box.h>
-Class Header file	<X11/Xaw/BoxP.h>
-Class		boxWidgetClass
-Class Name	Box
-Superclass	Composite
-.sp
-.De
-.IP "\fBApplication Header File\fP" 2.0i
-.IN "application header file" "" "@DEF@"
-This file must be included when an application uses this widget.
-It usually contains the class definition, and some resource macros.
-This is often called the ``public'' header file.
-.IN "class header file" "" "@DEF@"
-.IP "\fBClass Header File\fP" 2.0i
-This file will only be used by widget programmers.  It will need to be
-included by any widget that subclasses this widget.  This is often
-called the ``private'' header file.
-.IN "class" "" "@DEF@"
-.IP \fBClass\fP 2.0i
-This is the widget class of this widget.  This global symbol is passed to
-\fBXtCreateWidget\fP so that the \*(xI will know which type of widget
-to create.
-.IN "class name" "" "@DEF@"
-.IP "\fBClass Name\fP" 2.0i
-This is the resource name of this class.  This name can be used in
-a resource file to match any widget of this class.
-.IN "superclass" ""
-.IP \fBSuperclass\fP 2.0i
-This is the superclass that this widget class is descended from.  If
-you understand how the superclass works it will allow you to more quickly
-understand what this widget does, since much of its functionality may be
-inherited from its superclass.
-.sp
-.LP
-After this table follows a general description of the default behavior of
-this widget, as seen by the user.  In many cases this functionality
-may be overridden by the application programmer, or by the user.
-.LP
-The next section is a table showing the
-name, class, type and default value of each resource that is available
-to this widget.  There is also a column containing notes describing
-special restrictions placed upon individual resources.
-.IN "notes" "" "@DEF@"
-.IN "A, note" "" "@DEF@"
-.IN "D, note" "" "@DEF@"
-.IN "C, note" "" "@DEF@"
-.IN "R, note" "" "@DEF@"
-.IP A .5i
-This resource may be automatically adjusted when another
-resource is changed.
-.IP C .5i
-This resource is only settable at widget creation time, and may not
-be modified with \fBXtSetValues\fP.
-.IP D .5i
-Do not modify this resource.  While setting this resource will
-work, it can cause unexpected behavior.  When this symbol appears
-there is another, preferred, interface provided by the \*(tk.
-.IP R .5i
-This resource is READ-ONLY, and may not be modified.
-.LP
-After the resource table is a detailed description of every resource
-available to that widget.  Many of these are redundant, but printing
-them with each widget saves page flipping.  The names of the resources
-that are inherited are printed in plain text, while the names of the
-resources that are new to this class are printed in \fBbold\fP.
-If you have already read the description of the superclass you need
-only pay attention to the resources printed in bold.
-.LP
-For each composite widget there is a section on layout semantics that
-follows the resource description.  This section will describe the
-effect of constraint resources on the layout of the children, as well
-as a general description of where it prefers to place its children.
-.LP
-Descriptions of default translations and action routines come next, for
-widgets to which they apply.  The last item in each widget's
-documentation is the description of all convenience routines provided by
-the widget.
-.NH 2
-Input Focus
-.XS
-	Input Focus
-.XE
-.IN "input focus" "" "@DEF@"
-.IN "input" "" "@DEF@"
-.IN "XtNinput" "" "@DEF@"
-.LP
-The \*(xI define a resource on all Shell widgets that interact with
-the window manager called \fBinput\fP.  This resource requests the
-assistance of window manager in acquiring the input focus.  The
-resource defaults to \fBFalse\fP in the \*(xI, but is redefined to
-default to \fBTrue\fP when an application is using the Athena widget
-set.  An application programmer may override this default and set the
-resource back to \fBFalse\fP if the application does not need the window
-manager to give it the input focus.  See the \fI\*(xT\fP for details
-on the \fIinput\fP resource.
diff --git a/libXaw/spec/CH2 b/libXaw/spec/CH2
deleted file mode 100644
index 9e6c17a8a..000000000
--- a/libXaw/spec/CH2
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,1103 +0,0 @@
-.\" $Xorg: CH2,v 1.3 2000/08/17 19:42:26 cpqbld Exp $
-.bp
-\&
-.sp 1
-.ce 3
-\s+1\fBChapter 2\fP\s-1
-
-\s+1\fBUsing Widgets\fP\s-1
-.sp 2
-.nr H1 2
-.nr H2 0
-.nr H3 0
-.nr H4 0
-.nr H5 0
-.LP
-.XS
-Chapter 2 \- Using Widgets
-.XE
-.IN "using widgets" "" "@DEF@"
-Widgets serve as the primary tools for building a user interface or
-application environment.  The Athena widget set consists of primitive
-widgets that contain no children (for example, a command button) and
-composite widgets which may contain one or more widget children (for
-example, a Box widget).
-.LP
-The remaining chapters explain the widgets that are provided
-by the Athena widget set.
-These user-interface components serve as an interface for
-application programmers who do not want to implement their own widgets.
-In addition, they serve as a starting point
-for those widget programmers who, using the \*(xI mechanisms,
-want to implement alternative application programming interfaces.
-.LP
-This chapter is a brief introduction to widget programming.  The
-examples provided use the Athena widgets, though most of the concepts
-will apply to all widget sets.  Although there are several programming
-interfaces to the \*(tk, only one is described here.  A full
-description of the programming interface is provided in the document
-\fI\*(xT\fP.
-.NH 2
-Setting the Locale
-.LP
-.XS
-	Setting the Locale
-.XE
-If it is desirable that the application take advantage of
-internationalization (i18n), you must establish locale with
-.PN XtSetLanguageProc
-before \fBXtDisplayInitialize\fP or \fBXtAppInitialize\fP
-is called.  For full details, please refer to the document
-\fI\*(xT\fP, section 2.2. However, the following simplest-case
-call is sufficient in many or most applications.
-.LP
-.IN "internationalization" "" ""
-.IN "XtSetLanguageProc" "" "@DEF@"
-.IN "locale" "" ""
-.Ds
-.TA .5i 2i
-.ta .5i 2i
-	XtSetLanguageProc(NULL, NULL, NULL);
-.De
-.LP
-Most notably, this will affect the Standard C locale, determine which
-resource files will be loaded, and what fonts will be required of FontSet
-specifications.  In many cases, the addition of this line is the only source change
-required to internationalize Xaw programs, and will not disturb the function
-of programs in the default "C" locale.
-.NH 2
-Initializing the Toolkit
-.LP
-.XS
-	Initializing the Toolkit
-.XE
-You must call a toolkit initialization function before invoking any
-other toolkit routines (besides locale setting, above).
-.PN XtAppInitialize
-opens the X server connection, parses the command line,
-and creates an initial widget that will serve as the root of
-a tree of widgets created by this application.
-.IN "initialization" "" "@DEF@"
-.IN "toolkit initialization" "" "@DEF@"
-.IN "XtAppInitialize" "" "@DEF@"
-.IN "fallback resources" "" "@DEF@"
-.FD 0
-Widget XtAppInitialize(\fIapp_context_return\fP, \fIapplication_class\fP, \
-\fIoptions\fP, \fInum_options\fP,
-.ta 2i
-	\fIargc_in_out\fP, \fIargv_in_out\fP, \fIfallback_resources\fP, \
-\fIargs\fP, \fInum_args\fP)
-.br
-      XtAppContext *\fIapp_context_return\fP;
-.br
-      String \fIapplication_class\fP;
-.br
-      XrmOptionDescRec \fIoptions\fP[];
-.br
-      Cardinal \fInum_options\fP;
-.br
-      int *\fIargc_in_out\fP;
-.br
-      String *\fIargv_in_out\fP[];
-.br
-      String *\fIfallback_resources\fP;
-.br
-      ArgList \fIargs\fP;
-.br
-      Cardinal \fInum_args\fP;
-.FN
-.IP \fIapp_con_return\fP 1.5i
-Returns the application context of this application, if non-NULL.
-.IP \fIapplication_class\fP 1.5i
-Specifies the class name of this application,
-which is usually the generic name for all instances of this application.
-A useful convention is to form the class name by capitalizing the
-first letter of the application name. For example, the application named
-``xman'' has a class name of ``Xman''.
-.IP \fIoptions\fP 1.5i
-Specifies how to parse the command line for any application-specific
-resources.
-The options argument is passed as a parameter to
-.PN XrmParseCommand .
-For further information,
-see \fI\*(xL\fP.
-.IP \fInum_options\fP 1.5i
-Specifies the number of entries in the options list.
-.IP \fIargc_in_out\fP 1.5i
-Specifies a pointer to the number of command line parameters.
-.IP \fIargv_in_out\fP 1.5i
-Specifies the command line parameters.
-.IP \fIfallback_resources\fP 1.5i
-Specifies resource values to be used if the site-wide application class
-defaults file cannot be opened, or NULL.
-.IP \fIargs\fP 1.5i
-Specifies the argument list to use when creating the Application shell.
-.IP \fInum_args\fP 1.5i
-Specifies the number of arguments in \fIargs\fP.
-.LP
-This function will remove the command line arguments that the toolkit
-reads from \fIargc_in_out\fP, and \fIargv_in_out\fP.  It will then
-attempt to open the display.  If the display cannot be opened, an error
-message is issued and XtAppInitialize terminates the application.  Once
-the display is opened, all resources are read from the locations
-specified by the \*(xI.  This function returns an ApplicationShell
-widget to be used as the root of the application's widget tree.
-.NH 2
-Creating a Widget
-.LP
-.XS
-	Creating a Widget
-.XE
-.IN "widget creation" "" "@DEF@"
-.IN "creating widgets" "" "@DEF@"
-.IN "XtRealizeWidget" "" ""
-Creating a widget is a three-step process.  First, the widget instance
-is allocated, and various instance-specific attributes are set by
-using \fBXtCreateWidget\fP.  Second, the widget's parent is informed
-of the new child by using \fBXtManageChild\fP.  Finally, X windows are
-created for the parent and all its children by using \fBXtRealizeWidget\fP
-and specifying the top-most widget. The first two steps can be
-combined by using \fBXtCreateManagedWidget\fP.  In addition,
-\fBXtRealizeWidget\fP is automatically called when the child becomes
-managed if the parent is already realized.
-.LP
-To allocate, initialize, and manage a widget, use
-.PN XtCreateManagedWidget .
-.IN "XtCreateManagedWidget" "" "@DEF@"
-.FD 0
-Widget XtCreateManagedWidget(\fIname\fP, \fIwidget_class\fP, \fIparent\fP, \
-\fIargs\fP, \fInum_args\fP)
-.br
-      String \fIname\fP;
-.br
-      WidgetClass \fIwidget_class\fP;
-.br
-      Widget \fIparent\fP;
-.br
-      ArgList \fIargs\fP;
-.br
-      Cardinal \fInum_args\fP;
-.FN
-.IP \fIname\fP 1i
-Specifies the instance name for the created widget that is used for retrieving
-widget resources.
-.IP \fIwidget_class\fP 1i
-Specifies the widget class pointer for the created widget.
-.IP \fIparent\fP 1i
-Specifies the parent widget ID.
-.IP \fIargs\fP 1i
-Specifies the argument list.  The argument list is a variable-length
-list composed of name and value pairs that contain information
-pertaining to the specific widget instance being created.  For further
-information, see Section 2.7.2.
-.IP \fInum_args\fP 1i
-Specifies the number of arguments in the argument list.
-If the num_args is zero, the argument list is never referenced.
-.LP
-When a widget instance is successfully created, the widget identifier
-is returned to the application.  If an error is encountered, the
-.PN XtError
-routine is invoked to inform the user of the error.
-.IN "XtError" "" ""
-.LP
-For further information, see \fI\*(xT\fP.
-.NH 2
-Common Resources
-.XS
-	Common Resources
-.XE
-.IN "resource" ""
-.LP
-Although a widget can have unique arguments that it understands, all
-widgets have common arguments that provide some regularity of operation.
-The common arguments allow arbitrary widgets to be managed by
-higher-level components without regard for the individual widget type.
-Widgets will ignore any argument that they do not understand.
-.LP
-The following resources are retrieved from the argument list
-or from the resource database by all of the Athena widgets:
-.TS H
-lw(1.5i) lw(1i) lw(1i) lw(2i).
-_
-.sp 3p
-.TB
-Name	Class	Type	Default Value
-.sp 3p
-_
-.TH
-.R
-.sp 3p
-accelerators	Accelerators	AcceleratorTable	NULL
-ancestorSensitive	AncestorSensitive	Boolean	True
-background	Background	Pixel	XtDefaultBackground
-backgroundPixmap	Pixmap	Pixmap	XtUnspecifiedPixmap
-borderColor	BorderColor	Pixel	XtDefaultForeground
-borderPixmap	Pixmap	Pixmap	XtUnspecifiedPixmap
-borderWidth	BorderWidth	Dimension	1
-colormap	Colormap	Colormap	Parent's Colormap
-depth	Depth	int	Parent's Depth
-destroyCallback	Callback	XtCallbackList	NULL
-height	Height	Dimension	\fIwidget dependent\fP
-mappedWhenManaged	MappedWhenManaged	Boolean	True
-screen	Screen	Screen	Parent's Screen
-sensitive	Sensitive	Boolean	True
-translations	Translations	TranslationTable	\fIwidget dependent\fP
-width	Width	Dimension	\fIwidget dependent\fP
-x	Position	Position	0
-y	Position	Position	0
-.sp 3p
-_
-.TE
-.IN "XtDefaultForeground" "" ""
-.IN "XtDefaultBackground" "" ""
-.LP
-The following additional resources are retrieved from the argument list
-or from the resource database by many of the Athena widgets:
-.TS H
-lw(1.5i) lw(1i) lw(1i) lw(2i).
-_
-.sp 3p
-.TB
-Name	Class	Type	Default Value
-.sp 3p
-_
-.TH
-.R
-.sp 3p
-callback	Callback	XtCallbackList	NULL
-cursor	Cursor	Cursor	\fIwidget dependent\fP
-foreground	Foreground	Pixel	XtDefaultForeground
-insensitiveBorder	Insensitive	Pixmap	GreyPixmap
-.sp 3p
-_
-.TE
-.IN "XtDefaultForeground" "" ""
-.NH 2
-Resource Conversions
-.XS
-	Resource Conversions
-.XE
-.IN "conversions" "" "@DEF@"
-.IN "string conversions" "" "@DEF@"
-.IN "type conversions" "" "@DEF@"
-.LP
-Most resources in the Athena widget set have a converter registered that
-will translate the string in a resource file to the correct internal
-representation.  While some are obvious (string to integer, for example),
-others need specific mention of the allowable values.  Three general
-converters are described here:
-.IP \(bu 5
-Cursor
-.IP \(bu 5
-Pixel
-.IP \(bu 5
-Bitmap
-.LP
-Many widgets have defined special converters that apply only to that
-widget.  When these occur, the documentation section for that widget
-will describe the converter.
-.NH 3
-Cursor Conversion
-.IN "conversions" "ColorCursor" "@DEF@"
-.IN "conversions" "Cursor" "@DEF@"
-.IN "cursor" "" ""
-.LP
-The value for the \fBcursorName\fP resource is specified in the resource
-database as a string, and is of the following forms:
-.IP \(bu 5
-A standard X cursor name from \fB< X11/cursorfont.h >\fP.
-The names in \fBcursorfont.h\fP each describe a specific cursor.  The
-resource names for these cursors are exactly like the names in this file
-except the \fBXC_\fP is not used.  The cursor definition \fBXC_gumby\fP
-has a resource name of \fBgumby\fP.
-.IP \(bu 5
-Glyphs, as in \fIFONT font-name glyph-index [[ font-name ] glyph-index ]\fP.
-The first font and glyph specify the cursor source pixmap.
-The second font and glyph specify the cursor mask pixmap.
-The mask font defaults to the source font,
-and the mask glyph index defaults to the source glyph index.
-.IP \(bu 5
-A relative or absolute file name.
-If a relative or absolute file name is specified, that file is used to
-create the source pixmap.  Then the string "Mask" is appended to
-locate the cursor mask pixmap.  If the "Mask" file does not exist, the
-suffix "msk" is tried.  If "msk" fails, no cursor mask will be used.
-If the filename does not start with '/' or './' the the bitmap
-file path is used (see section 2.4.3).
-.NH 3
-Pixel Conversion
-.LP
-.IN "conversions" "Pixel" "@DEF@"
-.IN "pixel" "" ""
-.IN "rgb.txt" "" ""
-.IN "XtDefaultForeground" "" ""
-.IN "XtDefaultBackground" "" ""
-The string-to-pixel converter takes any name that is acceptable to
-XParseColor (see \fI\*(xL\fP).  In addition this routine understands
-the special toolkit symbols `XtDefaultForeground' and
-`XtDefaultBackground', described in \fI\*(xT\fP.  In short the acceptable
-pixel names are:
-.IP \(bu 5
-Any color name for the rgb.txt file (typically in the directory
-/usr/lib/X11 on POSIX systems).
-.IP \(bu 5
-A numeric specification of the form #<red><green><blue> where these
-numeric values are hexadecimal digits (both upper and lower case).
-.IP \(bu 5
-The special strings `XtDefaultForeground' and `XtDefaultBackground'
-.NH 3
-Bitmap Conversion
-.IN "bitmap conversions" "" "@DEF@"
-.IN "conversions" "Bitmap" "@DEF@"
-.IN "bitmapFilePath" "" "@DEF@"
-.IN "BitmapFilePath" "" "@DEF@"
-.IN "/usr/include/X11/bitmaps" "" ""
-.LP
-The string-to-bitmap converter attempts to locate a file containing
-bitmap data whose name is specified by the input string.  If the file
-name is relative (i.e. does not begin with / or ./), the directories to
-be searched are specified in the \fBbitmapFilePath\fP resource--class
-\fBBitmapFilePath\fP.  This resource specifies a colon (:) separated
-list of directories that will be searched for the named bitmap or
-cursor glyph (see section 2.4.1).  The \fBbitmapFilePath\fP resource is
-global to the application, and may \fBnot\fP be specified differently
-for each widget that wishes to convert a cursor to bitmap.  In addition
-to the directories specified in the \fBbitmapFilePath\fP resource a
-default directory is searched.  When using POSIX the default
-directory is
-.PN /usr/include/X11/bitmaps .
-.NH 2
-Realizing a Widget
-.LP
-.XS
-	Realizing a Widget
-.XE
-.IN "realizing widgets" "" "@DEF@"
-The
-.PN XtRealizeWidget
-function performs two tasks:
-.IP \(bu 5
-Calculates the geometry constraints of all managed descendants
-of this widget.  The actual calculation is put off until realize time
-for performance reasons.
-.IP \(bu 5
-Creates an X window for the widget and, if it is a composite widget,
-realizes each of its managed children.
-.IN "XtRealizeWidget" "" "@DEF@"
-.FD 0
-void XtRealizeWidget(\fIw\fP)
-.br
-      Widget \fIw\fP;
-.FN
-.IP \fIw\fP 1i
-Specifies the widget.
-.LP
-For further information about this function,
-see the \fI\*(xT\fP.
-.NH 2
-Processing Events
-.LP
-.XS
-	Processing Events
-.XE
-.IN "events" "" ""
-.IN "XtAppInitialize" "" ""
-Now that the application has created, managed and realized its
-widgets, it is ready to process the events that will be delivered by the
-X Server to this client.  A function call that will process the
-events is \fBXtAppMainLoop\fP.
-.IN "XtAppMainLoop" "" "@DEF@"
-.FD 0
-void XtAppMainLoop(\fIapp_context\fP)
-.br
-      XtAppContext \fIapp_context\fP;
-.FN
-.IP \fIapp_context\fP 1i
-Specifies the application context of this application.  The value is
-normally returned by \fBXtAppInitialize\fP.
-.LP
-This function never returns: it is an infinite loop that processes the
-X events.  User input can be handled through callback procedures and
-application defined action routines.  More details are provided in
-\fI\*(xT\fP.
-.NH 2
-Standard Widget Manipulation Functions
-.XS
-	Standard Widget Manipulation Functions
-.XE
-.LP
-After a widget has been created, a client can interact with that
-widget by calling one of the standard widget manipulation routines
-provided by the \*(xI, or a widget class-specific manipulation routine.
-.LP
-The \*(xI provide generic routines to give the application programmer
-access to a set of standard widget functions.  The common widget
-routines let an application or composite widget perform the following
-operations on widgets without requiring explicit knowledge of the widget
-type.
-.IP \(bu 5
-Control the mapping of widget windows
-.IP \(bu 5
-Destroy a widget instance
-.IP \(bu 5
-Obtain an argument value
-.IP \(bu 5
-Set an argument value
-.NH 3
-Mapping Widgets
-.LP
-By default,
-widget windows are mapped (made viewable) automatically by
-\fBXtRealizeWidget\fP.  This behavior can be disabled by using
-\fBXtSetMappedWhenManaged\fP, making the client responsible for calling
-\fBXtMapWidget\fP to make the widget viewable.
-.IN "XtSetMappedWhenManaged" "" "@DEF@"
-.IN "XtMapWidget" "" ""
-.IN "XtRealizeWidget" "" ""
-.FD 0
-void XtSetMappedWhenManaged(\fIw\fP, \fImap_when_managed\fP)
-.br
-      Widget \fIw\fP;
-.br
-      Boolean \fImap_when_managed\fP;
-.FN
-.IP \fIw\fP 1i
-Specifies the widget.
-.IP \fImap_when_managed\fP 1i
-Specifies the new value.
-If map_when_managed is \fBTrue\fP, the widget is mapped automatically
-when it is realized.  If map_when_managed is \fBFalse\fP, the client
-must call
-.PN XtMapWidget
-or make a second call to
-.PN XtSetMappedWhenManaged
-to cause the child window to be mapped.
-.LP
-.sp
-The definition for
-.PN XtMapWidget
-is:
-.IN "XtMapWidget" "" "@DEF@"
-.FD 0
-void XtMapWidget(\fIw\fP)
-.br
-     Widget \fIw\fP;
-.FN
-.IP \fIw\fP 1i
-Specifies the widget.
-.LP
-When you are creating several children in sequence for a previously
-realized common parent it is generally more efficient to construct a
-list of children as they are created (using \fBXtCreateWidget\fP) and
-then use \fBXtManageChildren\fP to request that their parent managed
-them all at once.  By managing a list of children at one time, the
-parent can avoid wasteful duplication of geometry processing and the
-associated ``screen flash''.
-.IN "XtManageChildren" "" "@DEF@"
-.IN "XtCreateWidget" "" ""
-.FD 0
-void XtManageChildren(\fIchildren\fP, \fInum_children\fP)
-.br
-      WidgetList \fIchildren\fP;
-.br
-      Cardinal \fInum_children\fP;
-.FN
-.IP \fIchildren\fP 1i
-Specifies a list of children to add.
-.IP \fInum_children\fP 1i
-Specifies the number of children to add.
-.LP
-If the parent is already visible on the screen, it is especially
-important to batch updates so that the minimum amount of visible window
-reconfiguration is performed.
-.LP
-For further information about these functions,
-see the \fI\*(xT\fP.
-.NH 3
-Destroying Widgets
-.LP
-To destroy a widget instance of any type, use
-.PN XtDestroyWidget .
-.IN "XtDestroyWidget" "" "@DEF@"
-.FD 0
-void XtDestroyWidget(\fIw\fP)
-.br
-      Widget \fIw\fP;
-.FN
-.IP \fIw\fP 1i
-Specifies the widget.
-.LP
-.PN XtDestroyWidget
-destroys the widget and recursively destroys any children that it may have,
-including the windows created by its children.
-After calling
-.PN XtDestroyWidget ,
-no further references should be made to the widget or any children
-that the destroyed widget may have had.
-.NH 3
-Retrieving Widget Resource Values
-.LP
-To retrieve the current value of a resource attribute associated
-with a widget instance, use
-.PN XtGetValues .
-.IN "XtGetValues" "" "@DEF@"
-.FD 0
-void XtGetValues(\fIw\fP, \fIargs\fP, \fInum_args\fP)
-.br
-      Widget \fIw\fP;
-.br
-      ArgList \fIargs\fP;
-.br
-      Cardinal \fInum_args\fP;
-.FN
-.IP \fIw\fP 1i
-Specifies the widget.
-.IP \fIargs\fP 1i
-Specifies a variable-length argument list of name and \fBaddress\fP
-pairs that contain the resource name and the address into which the
-resource value is stored.
-.IP \fInum_args\fP 1i
-Specifies the number of arguments in the argument list.
-.LP
-The arguments and values passed in the argument list are dependent on
-the widget. Note that the caller is responsible for providing space
-into which the returned resource value is copied; the \fBArgList\fP
-contains a pointer to this storage (e.g. x and y must be
-allocated as Position).  For further information, see the \fI\*(xT\fP.
-.NH 3
-Modifying Widget Resource Values
-.LP
-To modify the current value of a resource attribute associated with a
-widget instance, use
-.PN XtSetValues .
-.IN "XtSetValues" "" "@DEF@"
-.FD 0
-void XtSetValues(\fIw\fP, \fIargs\fP, \fInum_args\fP)
-.br
-      Widget \fIw\fP;
-.br
-      ArgList \fIargs\fP;
-.br
-      Cardinal \fInum_args\fP;
-.FN
-.IP \fIw\fP 1i
-Specifies the widget.
-.IP \fIargs\fP 1i
-Specifies an array of name and \fBvalue\fP pairs that contain the
-arguments to be modified and their new values.
-.IP \fInum_args\fP 1i
-Specifies the number of arguments in the argument list.
-.LP
-The arguments and values that are passed will depend on the widget
-being modified.  Some widgets may not allow certain resources to be
-modified after the widget instance has been created or realized.
-No notification is given if any part of a \fBXtSetValues\fP request is
-ignored.
-.LP
-For further information about these functions, see the \fI\*(xT\fP.
-.IN "XtGetValues" "" ""
-.IN "XtSetValues" "" ""
-.NT
-The argument list entry for
-.PN XtGetValues
-specifies the address to which the caller wants the value copied.  The
-argument list entry for
-.PN XtSetValues ,
-however, contains the new value itself, if the size of value is less than
-sizeof(XtArgVal) (architecture dependent, but at least sizeof(long));
-otherwise, it is a pointer to the value.  String resources are always
-passed as pointers, regardless of the length of the string.
-.NE
-.NH 2
-Using the Client Callback Interface
-.LP
-.XS
-	Using the Client Callback Interface
-.XE
-.IN "callbacks" "" ""
-Widgets can communicate changes in their state to their clients
-by means of a callback facility.
-The format for a client's callback handler is:
-.IN "CallbackProc" "" "@DEF@"
-.FD 0
-void \fICallbackProc\fP(\fIw\fP, \fIclient_data\fP, \fIcall_data\fP)
-.br
-      Widget \fIw\fP;
-.br
-      XtPointer \fIclient_data\fP;
-.br
-      XtPointer \fIcall_data\fP;
-.FN
-.IP \fIw\fP 1i
-Specifies widget for which the callback is registered.
-.IP \fIclient_data\fP 1i
-Specifies arbitrary client-supplied data that the widget should pass
-back to the client when the widget executes the client's callback
-procedure.  This is a way for the client registering the callback to
-also register client-specific data: a pointer to additional information
-about the widget, a reason for invoking the callback, and so on. If no
-additional information is necessary, NULL may be passed as this argument.
-This field is also frequently known as the \fIclosure\fP.
-.IP \fIcall_data\fP 1i
-Specifies any callback-specific data the widget wants to pass to the client.
-For example, when Scrollbar executes its \fBjumpProc\fP callback list,
-it passes the current position of the thumb in \fIcall_data\fP.
-.LP
-Callbacks can be registered either by creating an argument containing
-the callback list described below or by using the special convenience
-routines \fBXtAddCallback\fP and \fBXtAddCallbacks\fP.  When the widget
-is created, a pointer to a list of callback procedure and data pairs can
-be passed in the argument list to
-.PN XtCreateWidget .
-The list is of type
-.PN XtCallbackList :
-.IN "XtCallbackProc"
-.IN "XtAddCallbacks"
-.IN "XtAddCallback"
-.IN "XtCallbackList" "" "@DEF@"
-.IN "XtCallbackRec" "" "@DEF@"
-.LP
-.Ds 0
-.TA .5i 3i
-.ta .5i 3i
-typedef struct {
-	XtCallbackProc callback;
-	XtPointer closure;
-} XtCallbackRec, *XtCallbackList;
-.De
-.LP
-The callback list must be allocated and initialized before calling
-.PN XtCreateWidget .
-.IN "XtCreateWidget"
-The end of the list is identified by an entry containing NULL in
-callback and closure.  Once the widget is created, the client can change
-or de-allocate this list; the widget itself makes no further reference
-to it.  The closure field contains the client_data passed to the
-callback when the callback list is executed.
-.LP
-The second method for registering callbacks is to use
-.PN XtAddCallback
-after the widget has been created.
-.IN "XtAddCallback" "" "@DEF@"
-.FD 0
-void XtAddCallback(\fIw\fP, \fIcallback_name, \fP\fIcallback\fP, \
-\fIclient_data\fP)
-.br
-      Widget \fIw\fP;
-.br
-      String \fIcallback_name\fP;
-.br
-      XtCallbackProc \fIcallback\fP;
-.br
-      XtPointer \fIclient_data\fP;
-.FN
-.IP \fIw\fP 1i
-Specifies the widget to add the callback to.
-.IP \fIcallback_name\fP 1i
-Specifies the callback list within the widget to append to.
-.IP \fIcallback\fP 1i
-Specifies the callback procedure to add.
-.IP \fIclient_data\fP 1i
-Specifies the data to be passed to the callback when it is invoked.
-.LP
-.PN XtAddCallback
-adds the specified callback to the list for the named widget.
-.LP
-All widgets provide a callback list named
-.PN destroyCallback
-.IN "destroyCallback" "" "@DEF@"
-where clients can register procedures that are to be executed when the
-widget is destroyed.  The destroy callbacks are executed when the widget
-or an ancestor is destroyed.  The \fIcall_data\fP argument is unused for
-destroy callbacks.
-.NH 2
-Programming Considerations
-.LP
-.XS
-	Programming Considerations
-.XE
-This section provides some guidelines on how to set up an application
-program that uses the \*(tk.
-.NH 3
-Writing Applications
-.LP
-.IN "writing applications"
-.IN "StringDefs.h"
-.IN "Intrinsic.h"
-When writing an application that uses the X Toolkit,
-you should make sure that your application performs the following:
-.IP 1. 5
-Include
-.Pn < X11/Intrinsic.h >
-in your application programs.
-This header file automatically includes
-.Pn < X11/Xlib.h >,
-so all Xlib functions also are defined.
-It may also be necessary to include \fB< X11/StringDefs.h >\fP when setting
-up argument lists, as many of the XtN\fIsomething\fP definitions are
-only defined in this file.
-.IP 2. 5
-Include the widget-specific header files for each widget type
-that you need to use.
-For example,
-.Pn < X11/Xaw/Label.h >
-and
-.Pn < X11/Xaw/Command.h >.
-.IP 3. 5
-Call the
-.PN XtAppInitialize
-.IN "XtAppInitialize"
-function before invoking any other toolkit or Xlib functions.
-For further information,
-see Section 2.1 and the \fI\*(xT\fP.
-.IP 4. 5
-To pass attributes to the widget creation routines that will override
-any site or user customizations, set up argument lists.  In this
-document, a list of valid argument names is provided in the discussion
-of each widget.  The names each have a global symbol defined that begins
-with \fBXtN\fP to help catch spelling errors.  For example,
-\fBXtNlabel\fP is defined for the \fBlabel\fP resource of many widgets.
-.IN "XtN" "" "@DEF@"
-.IP
-For further information, see Section 2.9.2.2.
-.IP 5. 5
-When the argument list is set up, create the widget with the
-\fBXtCreateManagedWidget\fP function.  For further information, see
-Section 2.2 and the \fI\*(xT\fP.
-.IN "XtCreateManagedWidget"
-.IP 6. 5
-If the widget has any callback routines, set by the
-.PN XtNcallback
-argument or the
-.PN XtAddCallback
-function, declare these routines within the application.
-.IN "XtAddCallback"
-.IP 7. 5
-After creating the initial widget hierarchy, windows must be created
-for each widget by calling
-.PN XtRealizeWidget
-on the top level widget.
-.IN "XtRealizeWidget"
-.IP 8. 5
-Most applications now sit in a loop processing events using
-.PN XtAppMainLoop ,
-for example:
-.IN "XtAppMainLoop"
-.IP
-.Ds 0
-XtCreateManagedWidget(\fIname\fP, \fIclass\fP, \fIparent\fP, \fIargs\fP, \fInum_args\fP);
-XtRealizeWidget(\fIshell\fP);
-XtAppMainLoop(\fIapp_context\fP);
-.De
-.IP
-For information about this function, see the \fI\*(xT\fP.
-.IP 9. 5
-Link your application with
-.PN libXaw
-(the Athena widgets),
-.PN libXmu
-(miscellaneous utilities),
-.PN libXt
-(the \*(tk \*(xI),
-.PN libSM
-(Session Management),
-.PN libICE
-(Inter-Client Exchange),
-.PN libXext
-(the extension library needed for the shape extension code which allows
-rounded Command buttons), and
-.PN libX11
-(the core X library).
-The following provides a sample command line:
-.IN "libXaw"
-.IN "libXmu"
-.IN "libXt"
-.IN "libSM"
-.IN "libICE"
-.IN "libXext"
-.IN "libX11"
-.IN "linking applications"
-.IN "compiling applications"
-.IP
-.Ds 0
-cc -o \fIapplication\fP \fIapplication\fP.c \-lXaw \-lXmu \-lXt \
-\-lSM \-lICE \-lXext \-lX11
-.De
-.NH 3
-Changing Resource Values
-.IN "resource" ""
-.LP
-The \*(xI support two methods of changing the default resource
-values; the resource manager, and an argument list passed into
-XtCreateWidget.  While resources values will get updated no matter
-which method you use, the two methods provide slightly different
-functionality.
-.IP "Resource Manager" 1.5i
-This method picks up resource definitions described in \fI\*(xL\fP from
-many different locations at run time.  The locations most important to
-the application programmer are the \fIfallback resources\fP and the
-\fIapp-defaults\fP file, (see \fI\*(xT\fP for the complete list).
-Since these resource are loaded at run time, they can be overridden by
-the user, allowing an application to be customized to fit the
-particular needs of each individual user.  These values can also be
-modified without the need to rebuild the application, allowing rapid
-prototyping of user interfaces.  Application programmers should use
-resources in preference to hard-coded values whenever possible.
-.IP "Argument Lists" 1.5i
-The values passed into the widget at creation time via an argument list
-cannot be modified by the user, and allow no opportunity for
-customization.  It is used to set resources that cannot be specified as
-strings (e.g. callback lists) or resources that should not be
-overridden (e.g. window depth) by the user.
-.NH 4
-Specifying Resources
-.LP
-It is important for all X Toolkit application programmers to
-understand how to use the X Resource Manager to specify resources for
-widgets in an X application.  This section will describe the most common
-methods used to specify these resources, and how to use the X Resource
-manager.
-.IN "xrdb"
-.IP \fBXrdb\fP 1.5i
-The \fBxrdb\fP utility may be used to load a file containing
-resources into the X server.   Once the resources are loaded, the
-resources will affect any new applications started on the display that
-they were loaded onto.
-.IN "application defaults"
-.IN "app-defaults"
-.IN "/usr/lib/X11/app-defaults"
-.IP "\fBApplication Defaults\fP" 1.5i
-The application defaults (app-defaults) file (normally in
-/usr/lib/X11/app-defaults/\fIclassname\fP) for an application is loaded
-whenever the application is started.
-.LP
-The resource specification has two colon-separated parts, a name, and
-a value.  The \fIvalue\fP is a string whose format is dependent on the
-resource specified by \fIname\fP.  \fIName\fP is constructed by
-appending a resource name to a full widget name.
-.LP
-The full widget name is a list of the name of every ancestor of the
-desired widget separated by periods (.).  Each widget also has a class
-associated with it.  A class is a type of widget (e.g. Label or
-Scrollbar or Box).  Notice that class names, by convention, begin with
-capital letters and instance names begin with lower case letters.  The
-class of any widget may be used in place of its name in a resource
-specification.  Here are a few examples:
-.IP xman.form.button1 1.5i
-This is a fully specified resource name, and will affect only widgets
-called button1 that are children of widgets called form that are
-children of
-applications named xman.  (Note that while typically two widgets that
-are siblings will have different names, it is not prohibited.)
-
-.IP Xman.Form.Command 1.5i
-This will match any Command widget that is a child of a Form widget
-that is itself a child of an application of class \fIXman\fP.
-.IP Xman.Form.button1 1.5i
-This is a mixed resource name with both widget names and classes specified.
-.LP
-This syntax allows an application programmer to specify any widget
-in the widget tree.  To match more than one widget (for example a user
-may want to make all Command buttons blue), use an asterisk (*)
-instead of a period.  When an asterisk is used, any number of widgets
-(including zero) may exist between the two widget names. For example:
-.IP Xman*Command 1.5i
-This matches all Command widgets in the Xman application.
-.IP Foo*button1 1.5i
-This matches any widget in the Foo application that is named \fIbutton1\fP.
-.LP
-The root of all application widget trees is the widget returned by
-\fBXtAppInitialize\fP.  Even though this is actually an
-ApplicationShell widget, the toolkit replaces its widget class with the
-class name of the application.  The name of this widget is either
-the name used to invoke the application (\fBargv[0]\fP) or the name of
-the application specified using the standard \fI-name\fP command line
-option supported by the \*(xI.
-.LP
-The last step in constructing the resource name is to append the name of
-the resource with either a period or asterisk to the full or partial
-widget name already constructed.
-.IP *foreground:Blue 2.25i
-Specifies that all widgets in all applications will have a foreground
-color of blue.
-.IP Xman*borderWidth:10 2.25i
-Specifies that all widgets in an application whose class is Xman will
-have a border width of 10 (pixels).
-.IP xman.form.button1.label:Testing 2.25i
-Specifies that a particular widget in the xman application will have a
-label named \fITesting\fP.
-.LP
-An exclamation point (!) in the first column of a line indicates
-that the rest of the line should be treated as a comment.
-.LP
-\fBFinal Words\fP
-.LP
-The Resource manager is a powerful tool that can be used very
-effectively to customize \*(tk applications at run time by either the
-application programmer or the user.  Some final points to note:
-.IP \(bu 5
-An application programmer may add new resources to their
-application.  These resources are associated with the global
-application, and not any particular widget.  The \*(tk function used for
-adding the application resources is \fBXtGetApplicationResources\fP.
-.IN "XtGetApplicationResources"
-.IP \(bu 5
-Be careful when creating resource files.  Since widgets will
-ignore resources that they do not understand, any spelling
-errors will cause a resource to have no effect.
-.IP \(bu 5
-Only one resource line will match any given resource.  There is a set
-of precedence rules, which take the following general stance.
-.ta 10n
-.IP "" 5
-\(bu	More specific overrides less specific, thus period always overrides asterisk.
-.IP "" 5
-\(bu	Names on the left are more specific and override names on the right.
-.IP "" 5
-\(bu	When resource specifications are exactly the same, user defaults
-.br
-	will override program defaults.
-.LP
-For a complete explanation of the rules of precedence, and
-other specific topics see \fI\*(xT\fP and \fI\*(xL\fP.
-.NH 4
-Creating Argument Lists
-.IN "argument lists" "" "@DEF@"
-.LP
-To set up an argument list for the inline specification of widget attributes,
-you may use any of the four approaches discussed in this section.
-Each resource name has a global symbol associated with it.  This
-global symbol has the form XtN\fIresource name\fP.  For example, the
-symbol for ``foreground'' is \fBXtNforeground\fP. For further information,
-see the \fI\*(xT\fP.
-.LP
-Argument are specified by using the following structure:
-.IN "ArgList" "" "@DEF@"
-.IN "Arg" "" "@DEF@"
-.LP
-.Ds 0
-.TA .5i 1.5i
-.ta .5i 1.5i
-typedef struct {
-	String name;
-	XtArgVal value;
-} Arg, *ArgList;
-.De
-.LP
-The first approach is to statically initialize the argument list.
-For example:
-.LP
-.Ds 0
-.TA .5i
-.ta .5i
-static Arg arglist[] = {
-	{XtNwidth, (XtArgVal) 400},
-	{XtNheight, (XtArgVal) 300},
-};
-.De
-.LP
-This approach is convenient for lists that do not need to be computed
-at runtime and makes adding or deleting new elements easy.
-The
-.IN "XtNumber"
-.PN XtNumber
-macro is used to compute the number of elements in the argument list,
-preventing simple programming errors:
-.LP
-.Ds
-XtCreateWidget(\fIname\fP, \fIclass\fP, \fIparent\fP, \fIarglist\fP, XtNumber(\fIarglist\fP));
-.De
-.IN "XtSetArg" "" "@DEF@"
-.LP
-The second approach is to use the
-.PN XtSetArg
-macro.
-For example:
-.LP
-.Ds 0
-.TA .5i
-.ta .5i
-Arg arglist[10];
-XtSetArg(arglist[1], XtNwidth, 400);
-XtSetArg(arglist[2], XtNheight, 300);
-.De
-.LP
-To make it easier to insert and delete entries,
-you also can use a variable index:
-.LP
-.Ds 0
-.TA .5i
-.ta .5i
-Arg arglist[10];
-Cardinal i=0;
-XtSetArg(arglist[i], XtNwidth,  400);       i++;
-XtSetArg(arglist[i], XtNheight, 300);       i++;
-.De
-.LP
-The i variable can then be used as the argument list count in the widget
-create function.
-In this example,
-.IN "XtNumber"
-.PN XtNumber
-would return 10, not 2, and therefore is not useful.
-.NT
-You should not use auto-increment or auto-decrement
-within the first argument to
-.PN XtSetArg .
-As it is currently implemented,
-.PN XtSetArg
-is a macro that dereferences the first argument twice.
-.NE
-.LP
-The third approach is to individually set the elements of the
-argument list array:
-.LP
-.Ds 0
-.TA .5i
-.ta .5i
-Arg arglist[10];
-arglist[0].name  = XtNwidth;
-arglist[0].value = (XtArgVal) 400;
-arglist[1].name  = XtNheight;
-arglist[1].value = (XtArgVal) 300;
-.De
-.LP
-Note that in this example, as in the previous example,
-.IN "XtNumber"
-.PN XtNumber
-would return 10, not 2, and therefore would not be useful.
-.LP
-The fourth approach is to use a mixture of the first and third approaches:
-you can statically define the argument list but modify some entries at runtime.
-For example:
-.LP
-.Ds 0
-.TA .5i
-.ta .5i
-static Arg arglist[] = {
-	{XtNwidth, (XtArgVal) 400},
-	{XtNheight, (XtArgVal) NULL},
-};
-arglist[1].value = (XtArgVal) 300;
-.De
-.LP
-In this example,
-.IN "XtNumber"
-.PN XtNumber
-can be used, as in the first approach, for easier code maintenance.
-.NH 2
-Example Programs
-.XS
-	Example Programs
-.XE
-.IN "examples"
-.LP
-The best way to understand how to use any programming library is by
-trying some simple examples.  A collection of example programs that
-introduces each of the widgets in that Athena widget set, as well as many
-important toolkit programming concepts, is available in the X11R6
-release as distributed by the X Consortium.  It can be found in the
-distribution directory \fBcontrib/examples/mit/Xaw\fP, but see your
-site administrator for the exact location of these files on your system.
-See the README file from that directory for a guide to the examples.
-
diff --git a/libXaw/spec/CH3.intro b/libXaw/spec/CH3.intro
deleted file mode 100644
index 9040e02d5..000000000
--- a/libXaw/spec/CH3.intro
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,67 +0,0 @@
-.bp
-.if e .bp  \" make sure we break on an odd page.
-\&
-.sp 1
-.ce 3
-\s+1\fBChapter 3\fP\s-1
-
-\s+1\fBSimple Widgets\fP\s-1
-.IN "simple widgets" ""
-.sp 2
-.nr H1 3
-.nr H2 0
-.nr H3 0
-.nr H4 0
-.nr H5 0
-.na
-.LP
-.XS
-Chapter 3 - Simple Widgets
-.XE
-.LP
-Each of these widgets performs a specific user interface function.  They
-are \fIsimple\fP because they cannot have widget children\(emthey may only
-be used as leaves of the widget tree.  These widgets display information or
-take user input.
-.sp
-.IP \fBCommand\fP 1i
-.IN "Command widget" ""
-A push button that, when selected, may cause a specific action
-to take place.  This widget can display a multi-line string or a bitmap or pixmap image.
-.IP \fBGrip\fP 1i
-.IN "Grip widget" ""
-A rectangle that, when selected, will cause an action to take place.
-.IP \fBLabel\fP 1i
-.IN "Label widget" ""
-A rectangle that can display a multi-line string or a bitmap or pixmap image.
-.IP \fBList\fP 1i
-.IN "List widget" ""
-A list of text strings presented in row column format that may be
-individually selected.  When an element is selected an action may take
-place.
-.IP \fBPanner\fP 1i
-.IN "Panner widget" ""
-A rectangular area containing a \fIslider\fP that may be moved in two
-dimensions.  Notification of movement may be continuous or discrete.
-.IP \fBRepeater\fP 1i
-.IN "Repeater widget" ""
-A push button that triggers an action at an increasing rate when selected.
-This widget can display a multi-line string or a bitmap or pixmap image.
-.IP \fBScrollbar\fP
-.IN "Scrollbar widget" ""
-A rectangular area containing a \fIthumb\fP that when slid along one
-dimension may cause a specific action to take place.  The Scrollbar may
-be oriented horizontally or vertically.
-.IP \fBSimple\fP 1i
-.IN "Simple widget" ""
-The base class for most of the simple widgets.  Provides a rectangular
-area with a settable mouse cursor and special border.
-.IP \fBStripChart\fP 1i
-.IN "StripChart widget" ""
-A real time data graph that will automatically update and scroll.
-.IP \fBToggle\fP 1i
-.IN "Toggle widget" ""
-A push button that contains state information.  Toggles
-may also be used as ``radio buttons'' to implement a ``one of many'' or
-``zero or one of many'' group
-of buttons.  This widget can display a multi-line string or a bitmap or pixmap image.
diff --git a/libXaw/spec/CH4.intro b/libXaw/spec/CH4.intro
deleted file mode 100644
index c11e42547..000000000
--- a/libXaw/spec/CH4.intro
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,87 +0,0 @@
-.bp
-\&
-.sp 1
-.ce 3
-\s+1\fBChapter 4\fP\s-1
-
-\s+1\fBMenus\fP\s-1
-.sp 2
-.nr H1 4
-.nr H2 0
-.nr H3 0
-.nr H4 0
-.nr H5 0
-.na
-.LP
-.XS
-Chapter 4 - Menus
-.XE
-.IN "Menus" ""
-.LP
-The Athena widget set provides support for single paned non-hierarchical
-popup and pulldown menus.  Since menus are such a common user interface
-tool, support for them must be provided in even the most basic widget
-sets.  In menuing as in other areas, the Athena Widget Set provides only
-basic functionality.
-.LP
-Menus in the Athena widget set are implemented as a menu container (the
-SimpleMenu widget) and a collection of objects that comprise the
-menu entries.  The SimpleMenu widget is itself a direct subclass of the
-OverrideShell widget class, so no other shell is necessary when
-creating a menu.  The managed children of a SimpleMenu must be
-subclasses of the Sme (Simple Menu Entry) object.
-.LP
-The Athena widget set provides three classes of Sme objects that may be
-used to build menus.
-.sp
-.IP \fBSme\fP 1i
-.IN "Sme object" ""
-The base class of all menu entries.  It may be used as a menu entry
-itself to provide blank space in a menu.  ``Sme'' means ``Simple Menu
-Entry.''
-.IP \fBSmeBSB\fP 1i
-.IN "SmeBSB object" ""
-This menu entry provides a selectable entry containing a text string.
-A bitmap may also be placed in the left and right margins.  ``BSB'' means
-``Bitmap String Bitmap.''
-.IP \fBSmeLine\fP 1i
-.IN "SmeLine object" ""
-This menu entry provides an unselectable entry containing a separator line.
-.sp
-.LP
-The SimpleMenu widget informs the window manager that it should ignore
-its window by setting the \fBOverride Redirect\fP flag.  This is the
-correct behavior for the press-drag-release style of menu operation.  If
-click-move-click or ``pinable''' menus are desired it is the
-responsibility of the application programmer, using the SimpleMenu
-resources, to inform the window manager of the menu.
-.LP
-To allow easy creation of pulldown menus, a MenuButton widget is
-also provided as part of the Athena widget set.
-.NH 2
-Using the Menus
-.XS
-	Using the Menus
-.XE
-.IN "Menus" "using"
-.LP
-The default configuration for the menus is press-drag-release.
-The menus will typically be
-activated by clicking a pointer button while the pointer is over a
-MenuButton, causing the menu to appear in a fixed location relative to
-that button; this is a \fBpulldown\fP menu.  Menus may also be activated
-.IN "Menus" "pulldown"
-when a specific pointer and/or key sequence is used anywhere in the
-application; this is a \fBpopup\fP menu (e.g. clicking Ctrl-<pointer
-.IN "Menus" "popup"
-button 1> in the common application \fBxterm\fP).  In this
-case the menu should be positioned under
-the cursor. Typically menus will be placed so the pointer cursor is on
-the first menu entry, or the last entry selected by the user.
-.LP
-The menu remains on the screen as long as the pointer button is held
-down.  Moving the pointer will highlight different menu items.
-If the pointer leaves the menu, or moves over an entry that cannot
-be selected then no menu entry will highlighted.  When the desired menu
-entry has been highlighted, releasing the pointer button removes the menu,
-and causes any mechanism associated with this entry to be invoked.
diff --git a/libXaw/spec/CH5.intro b/libXaw/spec/CH5.intro
deleted file mode 100644
index 69230c0ad..000000000
--- a/libXaw/spec/CH5.intro
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,292 +0,0 @@
-.\" $Xorg: CH5.intro,v 1.3 2000/08/17 19:42:26 cpqbld Exp $
-.LP
-.bp
-\&
-.sp 1
-.ce 3
-\s+1\fBChapter 5\fP\s-1
-
-\s+1\fBText Widgets\fP\s-1
-.sp 2
-.nr H1 5
-.nr H2 0
-.nr H3 0
-.nr H4 0
-.nr H5 0
-.na
-.LP
-.XS
-Chapter 5 - Text Widgets.
-.XE
-.LP
-The Text widget provides a window that will allow an application
-to display and edit one or more lines of text.  Options are provided to
-allow the user to add Scrollbars to its window, search for a specific
-string, and modify the text in the buffer.
-.LP
-The Text widget is made up of a number of pieces; it was modularized to
-ease customization.  The AsciiText widget class (actually not limited to
-ASCII but so named for compatibility) is be general enough to most
-needs.  If more flexibility, special features, or extra functionality is
-needed, they can be added by implementing a new TextSource or TextSink, or
-by subclassing the Text Widget (See Section 5.8 for customization
-details.)
-.LP
-The words \fIinsertion point\fP are used in this chapter to refer to the text
-caret.  This is the symbol that is displayed between two characters in
-the file.  The insertion point marks the location where any new characters
-will be added to the file.  To avoid confusion the pointer cursor will
-always be referred to as the \fIpointer\fP.
-.LP
-The text widget supports three edit modes, controlling the types of
-modifications a user is allowed to make:
-.IN "Text widget" "edit modes"
-.IP \(bu 5
-Append-only
-.IP \(bu 5
-Editable
-.IP \(bu 5
-Read-only
-.LP
-Read-only mode does not allow the user or the programmer to modify the text
-in the widget.  While the entire string may be reset in
-read-only mode with \fBXtSetValues\fP, it cannot be modified via
-with \fBXawTextReplace\fP.  Append-only and editable modes allow
-.IN "XawTextReplace" ""
-the text at the insertion point to be modified.  The only difference is
-that text may only be added to or removed from the end of a buffer in
-append-only mode.
-.LP
-.NH 2
-Text Widget for Users
-.IN "Text widget" "User's Guide to the Text widget"
-.XS
-	Text Widget for Users
-.XE
-.LP
-The Text widget provides many of the common keyboard editing commands.
-These commands allow users to move around and edit the buffer.  If an
-illegal operation is attempted, (such as deleting characters in a
-read-only text widget), the X server will beep.
-.NH 3
-Default Key Bindings
-.IN "Text widget" "default key bindings"
-.LP
-The default key bindings are patterned after those in the EMACS text editor:
-.sp
-.Ds 0
-.TA 1.0i 3.0i 4.5i
-.ta 1.0i 3.0i 4.5i
-Ctrl-a	Beginning Of Line	Meta-b	Backward Word
-Ctrl-b	Backward Character	Meta-f	Forward Word
-Ctrl-d	Delete Next Character	Meta-i	Insert File
-Ctrl-e	End Of Line	Meta-k	Kill To End Of Paragraph
-Ctrl-f	Forward Character	Meta-q	Form Paragraph
-Ctrl-g	Multiply Reset	Meta-v	Previous Page
-Ctrl-h	Delete Previous Character	Meta-y	Insert Current Selection
-Ctrl-j	Newline And Indent	Meta-z	Scroll One Line Down
-Ctrl-k	Kill To End Of Line	Meta-d	Delete Next Word
-Ctrl-l	Redraw Display	Meta-D	Kill Word
-Ctrl-m	Newline	Meta-h	Delete Previous Word
-Ctrl-n	Next Line	Meta-H	Backward Kill Word
-Ctrl-o	Newline And Backup	Meta-<	Beginning Of File
-Ctrl-p	Previous Line	Meta->	End Of File
-Ctrl-r	Search/Replace Backward	Meta-]	Forward Paragraph
-Ctrl-s	Search/Replace Forward	Meta-[	Backward Paragraph
-Ctrl-t	Transpose Characters
-Ctrl-u	Multiply by 4	Meta-Delete	Delete Previous Word
-Ctrl-v	Next Page	Meta-Shift Delete	Kill Previous Word
-Ctrl-w	Kill Selection	Meta-Backspace	Delete Previous Word
-Ctrl-y	Unkill	Meta-Shift Backspace	Kill Previous Word
-Ctrl-z	Scroll One Line Up
-Ctrl-\\	Reconnect to input method
-Kanji	Reconnect to input method
-.De
-.sp
-.LP
-In addition, the pointer may be used to cut and paste text:
-.LP
-.Ds
-.TA .5i 2.0i
-.ta .5i 2.0i
-	Button 1 Down	Start Selection
-	Button 1 Motion	Adjust Selection
-	Button 1 Up	End Selection (cut)
-
-	Button 2 Down	Insert Current Selection (paste)
-
-	Button 3 Down	Extend Current Selection
-	Button 3 Motion	Adjust Selection
-	Button 3 Up	End Selection (cut)
-
-.De
-.LP
-Since all of these key and pointer bindings are set through the
-translations and resource manager, the user and the application
-programmer can modify them by changing the Text widget's
-\fBtranslations\fP resource.
-.\"
-.NH 3
-Search and Replace
-.IN "Text widget" "search"
-.IN "Text widget" "query replace"
-.LP
-The Text widget provides a search popup that can be used to search for a
-string within the current Text widget.  The popup can be activated by
-typing either \fIControl-r\fP or \fIControl-s\fP.  If \fIControl-s\fP is
-used the search will be forward in the file from the current location of the
-insertion point; if \fIControl-r\fP is used the search will be backward.  The
-activated popup is placed under the pointer.  It has a number of buttons
-that allow both text searches and text replacements to be performed.
-.LP
-At the top of the search popup are two toggle buttons labeled
-\fIbackward\fP and \fIforward\fP.  One of these buttons will always be
-highlighted; this is the direction in which the search will be
-performed.  The user can change the direction at any time by clicking on
-the appropriate button.
-.LP
-Directly under the buttons there are two text areas, one labeled
-\fISearch for:\fP and the other labeled \fIReplace with:\fP.  If this is
-a read-only Text widget the \fIReplace with:\fP field will be insensitive
-and no replacements will be allowed.  After each of these labels will be
-a text field.  This field will allow the user to enter a string to
-search for and the string to replace it with.  Only one of these text
-fields will have a window border around it; this is the active text
-field.  Any key presses that occur when the focus in in the search popup
-will be directed to the active text field.  There are also a few special
-key sequences:
-.DS
-.TA 1.75i
-.ta 1.75i
-\fBCarriage Return\fP:	Execute the action, and pop down the search widget.
-\fBTab\fP:	Execute the action, then move to the next field.
-\fBShift Carriage Return\fP:	Execute the action, then move to the next field.
-\fBControl-q Tab\fP:	Enter a Tab into a text field.
-\fBControl-c\fP:	Pop down the search popup.
-.DE
-.LP
-Using these special key sequences should allow simple
-searches without ever removing one's hands from the keyboard.
-.LP
-Near the bottom of the search popup is a row of buttons.  These buttons
-allow the same actions to to be performed as the key sequences, but the
-buttons will leave the popup active.  This can be quite useful if many
-searches are being performed, as the popup will be left on the display.
-Since the search popup is a transient window, it may be picked
-up with the window manager and pulled off to the side for use
-at a later time.
-.IP \fBSearch\fP 15
-Search for the specified string.
-.IP \fBReplace\fP 15
-Replace the currently highlighted string with the string in the
-\fIReplace with\fP text field, and move onto the next occurrence of the
-\fISearch for\fP text field.  The functionality is commonly referred to as
-query-replace.
-.IP \fBReplace-All\fP 15
-Replace all occurrences of the search string with the replace string from
-the current insertion point position to the end (or beginning) of the
-file.  There is no key sequence to perform this action.
-.IP \fBCancel\fP 15
-Remove the search popup from the screen.
-.LP
-Finally, when \fBinternational\fP resource is \fBtrue\fP, there may be a
-pre-edit buffer below the button row, for composing input.  Its presence
-is determined by the X locale in use and the VendorShell's \fBpreeditType\fP
-resource.
-.LP
-The widget hierarchy for the search popup is show below, all widgets
-are listed by class and instance name.
-.sp
-.nf
-.ta .5i 1.0i 1.5i 2.0i 2.5i
-Text  <name of Text widget>
-	TransientShell  search
-		Form  form
-			Label label1
-			Label  label2
-			Toggle  backwards
-			Toggle  forwards
-			Label  searchLabel
-			Text  searchText
-			Label  replaceLabel
-			Text  replaceText
-			Command  search
-			Command  replaceOne
-			Command  replaceAll
-			Command  cancel
-.fi
-.NH 3
-File Insertion
-.LP
-.IN "Text widget" "file insertion"
-To insert a file into a text widget, type the key sequence \fIMeta-i\fP,
-which will activate the file insert popup.  This popup will appear under
-the pointer, and any text typed while the focus is in this popup will be
-redirected to the text field used for the filename.  When the desired
-filename has been entered, click on \fIInsert File\fP, or type
-\fICarriage Return\fP.  The named file will then be inserted in the text
-widget beginning at the insertion point position.  If an error occurs when
-opening the file, an error message will be printed, prompting the user
-to enter the filename again.  The file insert may be aborted by clicking
-on \fICancel\fP.  If \fIMeta-i\fP is typed at a text widget that is
-read-only, it will beep, as no file insertion is allowed.
-.LP
-The widget hierarchy for the file insert popup is show below; all widgets
-are listed by class and instance name.
-.sp
-.nf
-.ta .5i 1.0i 1.5i 2.0i 2.5i
-Text  <name of Text widget>
-	TransientShell  insertFile
-		Form  form
-			Label  label
-			Text  text
-			Command  insert
-			Command  cancel
-.fi
-.NH 3
-Text Selections for Users
-.LP
-.IN "Text widget" "Text Selections for Users"
-The text widgets have a text selection mechanism that allows
-the user to copy pieces of the text into the \fBPRIMARY\fP selection,
-and paste
-into the text widget some text that another application (or text
-widget) has put in the \fBPRIMARY\fP selection.
-.LP
-One method of selecting text is to press pointer button 1
-on the beginning of the text to be selected, drag the pointer until all
-of the desired text is highlighted, and then release the button to
-activate the selection.  Another method is to click pointer button 1 at
-one end of the text to be selected, then click pointer button 3 at the
-other end.
-.LP
-To modify a currently active selection, press pointer button 3 near
-either the end of the selection that you want to
-adjust.  This end of the selection may be moved while holding down pointer
-button 3.  When the proper area has been highlighted release the pointer
-button to activate the selection.
-.LP
-The selected text may now be pasted into another application, and
-will remain active until some other client makes a selection.
-To paste text that some other application has
-put into the \fBPRIMARY\fP selection use pointer button 2.
-First place the insertion point where you would like the text to be inserted,
-then click and release pointer button 2.
-.LP
-Rapidly clicking pointer button 1 the following number of times will adjust
-the selection as described.
-.IP \fBTwo\fP 1.0i
-Select the word under the pointer.  A word boundary is defined by the
-Text widget to be a Space, Tab, or Carriage Return.
-.IP \fBThree\fP 1.0i
-Select the line under the pointer.
-.IP \fBFour\fP 1.0i
-Select the paragraph under the pointer.  A paragraph boundary is
-defined by the text widget as two Carriage Returns in a row with only
-Spaces or Tabs between them.
-.IP \fBFive\fP 1.0i
-Select the entire text buffer.
-.LP
-To unset the text selection, click pointer button 1
-without moving it.
diff --git a/libXaw/spec/CH6.intro b/libXaw/spec/CH6.intro
deleted file mode 100644
index 530f2f7f9..000000000
--- a/libXaw/spec/CH6.intro
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,84 +0,0 @@
-.LP
-.bp
-.if e .bp  \" make sure we break on an odd page.
-\&
-.sp 1
-.ce 3
-\s+1\fBChapter 6\fP\s-1
-
-\s+1\fBComposite and Constraint Widgets\fP\s-1
-.sp 2
-.nr H1 6
-.nr H2 0
-.nr H3 0
-.nr H4 0
-.nr H5 0
-.na
-.LP
-.XS
-Chapter 6 - Composite and Constraint Widgets
-.XE
-.LP
-These widgets may contain arbitrary widget children.  They implement a
-policy for the size and location of their children.
-.IP \fBBox\fP 1i
-.IN "Box widget" ""
-This widget will pack its children as tightly as possible in
-non-overlapping rows.
-.IP \fBDialog\fP 1i
-.IN "Dialog widget" ""
-An implementation of a commonly used interaction semantic to prompt for
-auxiliary input from the user, such as a filename.
-.IP \fBForm\fP 1i
-.IN "Form widget" ""
-A more sophisticated layout widget that allows the children to specify
-their positions relative to the other children, or to the edges of the Form.
-.IP \fBPaned\fP 1i
-.IN "Paned widget" ""
-Allows children to be tiled vertically or horizontally.  Controls are
-also provided to allow the user to dynamically resize the individual panes.
-.IP \fBPorthole\fP 1i
-.IN "Porthole widget" ""
-Allows viewing of a managed child which is as large as, or larger than its
-parent, typically under control of a Panner widget.
-.IP \fBTree\fP 1i
-.IN "Tree widget" ""
-Provides geometry management of widgets arranged in a directed, acyclic graph.
-.IP \fBViewport\fP 1i
-.IN "Viewport widget" ""
-Consists of a frame, one or two scrollbars, and an inner window.  The
-inner window can contain all the data that is to be displayed.  This inner
-window will be clipped by the frame with the scrollbars controlling
-which section of the inner window is currently visible.
-.LP
-.NH 3
-A Brief Note on Geometry Management
-.IN "geometry management" ""
-.LP
-The geometry management semantics provided by the X Toolkit give full
-control of the size and position of a widget to the parent of that
-widget.  While the children are allowed to request a certain size or
-location, it is the parent who makes the final decision.  Many of the
-composite widgets here will deny any geometry request from their
-children by default.  If a child widget is not getting the expected size
-or location, it is most likely the parent disallowing a request, or
-implementing semantics slightly different than those expected by the
-application programmer.
-.LP
-If the application wishes to change the size or location of
-any widget it should make a call to \fBXtSetValues\fP.  This will
-.IN "XtSetValues" ""
-allow the widget to ask its parent for the new size or location.
-As noted above the parent is allowed to refuse this request,
-and the child must live with the result.  If the
-application is unable to achieve the desired semantics, then perhaps it
-should use a different composite widget.  Under no circumstances
-should an application programmer resort to \fBXtMoveWidget\fP or
-.IN "XtMoveWidget" ""
-\fBXtResizeWidget\fP; these functions are exclusively for the use of
-.IN "XtResizeWidget" ""
-Composite widget implementors.
-.LP
-For more information on geometry management consult the \fI\*(xT\fP.
-
-
diff --git a/libXaw/spec/CH7.intro b/libXaw/spec/CH7.intro
deleted file mode 100644
index 7aaa1896b..000000000
--- a/libXaw/spec/CH7.intro
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,99 +0,0 @@
-.LP
-.bp
-.if e .bp  \" make sure we break on an odd page.
-\&
-.sp 1
-.ce 5
-\s+1\fBChapter 7\fP\s-1
-
-\s+1\fBCreating New Widgets (Subclassing)\fP\s-1
-
-\s+1Written By: Ralph Swick\s-1
-.sp 2
-.nr H1 7
-.nr H2 0
-.nr H3 0
-.nr H4 0
-.nr H5 0
-.na
-.LP
-.XS
-Chapter 7 - Creating New Widgets (Subclassing)
-.XE
-.IN "subclassing" "" "@DEF@"
-.IN "creating new widgets" "" "@DEF@"
-.LP
-Although the task of creating a new widget may at first appear a little
-daunting, there is a basic simple pattern that all widgets follow.  The
-Athena Widget library contains a special widget called the
-\fITemplate\fP widget that is intended to assist the novice widget
-programmer in writing a custom widget.
-.LP
-Reasons for wishing to write a custom widget include:
-.IP \(bu 3
-Providing a graphical interface not currently supported by any existing
-widget set.
-.IP \(bu 3
-Convenient access to resource management procedures to obtain fonts,
-colors, etc., even if user customization is not desired.
-.IP \(bu 3
-Convenient access to user input dispatch and translation management procedures.
-.IP \(bu 3
-Access to callback mechanism for building higher-level application libraries.
-.IP \(bu 3
-Customizing the interface or behavior of an existing widget to suit a
-special application need.
-.IP \(bu 3
-Desire to allow user customization of resources such as fonts, colors,
-etc., or to allow convenient re-binding of keys and buttons to internal
-functions.
-.IP \(bu 3
-Converting a non-Toolkit application to use the Toolkit.
-.LP
-In each of these cases, the operation needed to create a new widget is
-to "subclass" an existing one.  If the desired semantics of the new
-widget are similar to an existing one, then the implementation of the
-existing widget should be examined to see how much work would be
-required to create a subclass that will then be
-able to share the existing class methods.  Much time will be saved in
-writing the new widget if an existing widget class Expose, Resize and/or
-GeometryManager method can be used by the subclass.
-.LP
-Note that some trivial uses of a ``bare-bones'' widget may be achieved by
-simply creating an instance of the Core
-widget.  The class variable to use when creating a Core widget is
-.PN widgetClass .
-The geometry of the Core widget is determined entirely by the parent
-widget.
-.LP
-It is very often the case than an application will have a special need
-for a certain set of functions and that many copies of these functions
-will be needed.  For example, when converting an older application to use
-the Toolkit, it may be desirable to have a "Window Widget" class that
-might have the following semantics:
-.IN "Window widget"
-.IN "Core widget"
-.IN "widgetClass"
-.IP \(bu 3
-Allocate 2 drawing colors in addition to a background color.
-.IP \(bu 3
-Allocate a text font.
-.IP \(bu 3
-Execute an application-supplied function to handle exposure events.
-.IP \(bu 3
-Execute an application-supplied function to handle user input events.
-.LP
-It is obvious that a completely general-purpose WindowWidgetClass could
-be constructed that would export all class methods as callbacks lists,
-but such a widget would be very large and would have to choose some
-arbitrary number of resources such as colors to allocate.  An application
-that used many instances of the general-purpose widget would therefore
-un-necessarily waste many resources.
-.LP
-.sp
-In this section, an outline will be given of the procedure to follow to
-construct a special-purpose widget to address the items listed above.
-The reader should refer to the appropriate sections of the \fI\*(xT\fP
-for complete details of the material outlined here.  Section 1.4 of
-the \fI\*(xI\fP should be read in conjunction with this section.
-.LP
diff --git a/libXaw/spec/Command b/libXaw/spec/Command
deleted file mode 100644
index 13dac468b..000000000
--- a/libXaw/spec/Command
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,205 +0,0 @@
-.\" $Xorg: Command,v 1.3 2000/08/17 19:42:26 cpqbld Exp $
-.NH 2
-Command Widget
-.XS
-	Command Widget
-.XE
-.IN "Command widget" "" "@DEF@"
-.Ds 0
-.TA 2.0i
-.ta 2.0i
-.sp
-Application header file	<X11/Xaw/Command.h>
-.IN "Command.h" ""
-Class header file	<X11/Xaw/CommandP.h>
-.IN "CommandP.h" ""
-Class	commandWidgetClass
-.IN "commandWidgetClass" ""
-Class Name	Command
-.IN "Command widget" "class name"
-Superclass	Label
-.sp
-.De
-.LP
-The Command widget is an area, often rectangular, that contains text
-or a graphical image. Command widgets are often referred to as
-``push buttons.''  When the pointer is over a Command widget, the
-widget becomes highlighted by drawing a rectangle around its perimeter.
-This highlighting indicates that the widget is ready for selection.
-When mouse button 1 is pressed, the Command widget indicates that
-it has been selected by reversing its foreground and background colors.
-When the mouse button is released, the Command widget's \fBnotify\fP
-action is invoked, calling all functions on its callback list.  If
-the pointer is moved off of the widget before the pointer button is
-released, the widget reverts to its normal foreground and background
-colors, and releasing the pointer button has no effect.  This behavior
-allows the user to cancel an action.
-.NH 3
-Resources
-.LP
-When creating a Command widget instance, the following resources are
-retrieved from the argument list or from the resource database:
-.LP
-.IN "Command widget" "resources"
-.TS H
-expand;
-lw(1i) lw(1i) lw(1i) lw(.5i) lw(2i).
-_
-.sp 3p
-.TB
-Name	Class	Type	Notes	Default Value
-.sp 3p
-_
-.TH
-.R
-.sp 3p
-accelerators	Accelerators	AcceleratorTable		NULL
-ancestorSensitive	AncestorSensitive	Boolean	D	True
-background	Background	Pixel		XtDefaultBackground
-backgroundPixmap	Pixmap	Pixmap		XtUnspecifiedPixmap
-bitmap	Bitmap	Pixmap		None
-borderColor	BorderColor	Pixel		XtDefaultForeground
-borderPixmap	Pixmap	Pixmap		XtUnspecifiedPixmap
-borderWidth	BorderWidth	Dimension		1
-callback	Callback	XtCallbackList		NULL
-colormap	Colormap	Colormap		Parent's Colormap
-cornerRoundPercent	CornerRoundPercent	Dimension		25
-cursor	Cursor	Cursor		None
-cursorName	Cursor	String		NULL
-depth	Depth	int	C	Parent's Depth
-destroyCallback	Callback	XtCallbackList		NULL
-encoding	Encoding	UnsignedChar		XawTextEncoding8bit
-font	Font	XFontStruct		XtDefaultFont
-foreground	Foreground	Pixel		XtDefaultForeground
-height	Height	Dimension	A	graphic height + 2 * \fBinternalHeight\fP
-highlightThickness	Thickness	Dimension	A	2 (0 if Shaped)
-insensitiveBorder	Insensitive	Pixmap		GreyPixmap
-internalHeight	Height	Dimension		2
-internalWidth	Width	Dimension		4
-international	International	Boolean	C	False
-justify	Justify	Justify		XtJustifyCenter (center)
-label	Label	String		name of widget
-leftBitmap	LeftBitmap	Bitmap		None
-mappedWhenManaged	MappedWhenManaged	Boolean		True
-pointerColor	Foreground	Pixel		XtDefaultForeground
-pointerColorBackground	Background	Pixel		XtDefaultBackground
-resize	Resize	Boolean		True
-screen	Screen	Screen	R	Parent's Screen
-sensitive	Sensitive	Boolean		True
-shapeStyle	ShapeStyle	ShapeStyle		Rectangle
-translations	Translations	TranslationTable		See below
-width	Width	Dimension	A	graphic width + 2 * \fBinternalWidth\fP
-x	Position	Position		0
-y	Position	Position		0
-.sp 3p
-_
-.TE
-\" Resource Descriptions
-.Ac
-.As
-.Bg
-.Gp
-.Bm
-.Bc
-.Bp
-.Bw
-.Cb Bold
-.Cm
-.Cr Bold
-.Cu
-.Cn
-.Dp
-.Dc
-.Le
-.Lf
-.Ls
-.Lg
-.Hw
-.Ht Bold
-.Ib
-.Ih
-.In
-.Ju
-.La
-.Ll
-.Mm
-.Pf
-.Pb
-.Re
-.Sc
-.Se
-.Ss Bold
-.Tr
-.Xy
-.NH 3
-Command Actions
-.IN "Command widget" "actions"
-.LP
-The Command widget supports the following actions:
-.IP \(bu 5
-Switching the button's interior between the foreground and background
-colors with \fBset\fP, \fBunset\fP, and \fBreset\fP.
-.IP \(bu 5
-Processing application callbacks with \fBnotify\fP
-.IP \(bu 5
-Switching the internal border between highlighted
-and unhighlighted states with \fBhighlight\fP and \fBunhighlight\fP
-.LP
-.IN "Command widget" "translation bindings"
-The following are the default translation bindings used by the
-Command widget:
-.LP
-.Ds 0
-.TA .5i 2.25i
-.ta .5i 2.25i
-	<EnterWindow>:	highlight(\|)
-	<LeaveWindow>:	reset(\|)
-	<Btn1Down>:	set(\|)
-	<Btn1Up>:	notify(\|) unset(\|)
-.De
-.LP
-The full list of actions supported by Command is:
-.IP \fBhighlight\fP(\fIcondition\fP) 1.5i
-Displays the internal highlight border in the color (\fBforeground\fP
-or \fBbackground\fP ) that contrasts with the interior color of the
-Command widget.  The conditions \fBWhenUnset\fP and \fBAlways\fP are
-understood by this action procedure.  If no argument is passed,
-\fBWhenUnset\fP is assumed.
-.IP \fBunhighlight\fP(\|) 1.5i
-Displays the internal highlight border in the color (\fBforeground\fP
-or \fBbackground\fP ) that matches the interior color of the
-Command widget.
-.IP \fBset\fP(\|) 1.5i
-Enters the \fIset\fP state, in which \fBnotify\fP is possible.  This
-action causes the button to display its interior in the
-\fBforeground\fP color.  The label or bitmap is displayed in the
-\fBbackground\fP color.
-.IP \fBunset\fP(\|) 1.5i
-Cancels the \fIset\fP state and displays the interior of the button in the
-\fBbackground\fP color.  The label or bitmap is displayed in the
-\fBforeground\fP color.
-.IP \fBreset\fP(\|) 1.5i
-Cancels any \fIset\fP or \fIhighlight\fP and displays the interior of the
-button in the \fBbackground\fP color, with the label or bitmap displayed
-in the \fBforeground\fP color.
-.IP \fBnotify\fP(\|) 1.5i
-When the button is in the \fBset\fP state this action calls all functions in
-the callback list named by the \fBcallback\fP resource.  The value of
-the \fIcall_data\fP argument passed to these functions is undefined.
-.LP
-A very common alternative to registering callbacks is to augment a
-Command's translations with an action performing the desired
-function.  This often takes the form of:
-.LP
-.Ds 0
-.TA .5i 2.25i
-.ta .5i 2.25i
-*Myapp*save.translations: #augment <Btn1Down>,<Btn1Up>: Save()
-.De
-.LP
-.NT
-When a bitmap of depth greater that one (1) is specified the
-\fIset\fP(), \fIunset\fP(), and \fIreset\fP() actions have no effect,
-since there are no foreground and background colors used in a
-multi-plane pixmap.
-.NE
diff --git a/libXaw/spec/Dialog b/libXaw/spec/Dialog
deleted file mode 100644
index d14bca0b4..000000000
--- a/libXaw/spec/Dialog
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,280 +0,0 @@
-.\" $Xorg: Dialog,v 1.3 2000/08/17 19:42:26 cpqbld Exp $
-.NH 2
-Dialog Widget
-.LP
-.XS
-	Dialog Widget
-.XE
-.IN "Dialog widget" "" "@DEF@"
-.Ds 0
-.TA 2.0i
-.ta 2.0i
-.sp
-Application Header file	<X11/Xaw/Dialog.h>
-.IN "Dialog.h" ""
-Class Header file	<X11/Xaw/DialogP.h>
-.IN "DialogP.h" ""
-Class		dialogWidgetClass
-.IN "dialogWidgetClass" ""
-Class Name	Dialog
-.IN "Dialog widget" "class name"
-Superclass	Form
-.sp
-.De
-.LP
-The Dialog widget implements a commonly used interaction semantic to
-prompt for auxiliary input from a user.  For example, you can use a
-Dialog widget when an application requires a small piece of information,
-such as a filename, from the user.  A Dialog widget, which is simply a
-special case of the Form widget, provides a convenient way to create a
-preconfigured form.
-.LP
-The typical Dialog widget contains three areas.  The first line
-contains a description of the function of the Dialog widget, for
-example, the string \fIFilename:\fP.  The second line contains an area
-into which the user types input.  The third line can contain buttons
-that let the user confirm or cancel the Dialog input.  Any of these
-areas may be omitted by the application.
-.NH 3
-Resources
-.LP
-When creating a Dialog widget instance, the following resources are
-retrieved from the argument list or the resource database:
-.IN "Dialog widget" "resources"
-.TS H
-expand;
-lw(1i) lw(1i) lw(1i) lw(.5i) lw(2i).
-_
-.sp 3p
-.TB
-Name	Class	Type	Notes	Default Value
-.sp 3p
-_
-.TH
-.R
-.sp 3p
-accelerators	Accelerators	AcceleratorTable		NULL
-ancestorSensitive	AncestorSensitive	Boolean	D	True
-background	Background	Pixel		XtDefaultBackground
-backgroundPixmap	Pixmap	Pixmap		XtUnspecifiedPixmap
-borderColor	BorderColor	Pixel		XtDefaultForeground
-borderPixmap	Pixmap	Pixmap		XtUnspecifiedPixmap
-borderWidth	BorderWidth	Dimension		1
-children	ReadOnly	WidgetList	R	NULL
-colormap	Colormap	Colormap		Parent's Colormap
-defaultDistance	Thickness	int		4
-depth	Depth	int	C	Parent's Depth
-destroyCallback	Callback	XtCallbackList		NULL
-height	Height	Dimension	A	Enough space to contain all children
-icon	Icon	Bitmap		None
-label	Label	String		"label"
-mappedWhenManaged	MappedWhenManaged	Boolean		True
-numChildren	ReadOnly	Cardinal	R	0
-screen	Screen	Screen	R	Parent's Screen
-sensitive	Sensitive	Boolean		True
-translations	Translations	TranslationTable		NULL
-value	Value	String		no value widget
-width	Width	Dimension	A	Enough space to contain all children
-x	Position	Position		0
-y	Position	Position		0
-.sp 3p
-_
-.TE
-.Ac
-.As
-.Bg
-.Gp
-.Bc
-.Bp
-.Bw
-.Ch
-.Cm
-.Dd
-.Dp
-.Dc
-.Hw
-.IP \fBicon\fP 1.5i
-A pixmap image to be displayed immediately to the left of the
-Dialog widget's label.
-.IP \fBlabel\fP 1.5i
-A string to be displayed at the top of the Dialog widget.
-.Mm
-.Nc
-.Sc
-.Se
-.Tr
-.IP \fBvalue\fP 1.5i
-An initial value for the string field that the user will enter text
-into.  By default, no text entry field is available to the user.
-Specifying an initial value for \fBvalue\fP activates the text entry
-field.  If string input is desired, but no initial value is to be
-specified then set this resource to "" (empty string).
-.Xy
-.NH 3
-Constraint Resources
-.LP
-.IN "Dialog widget" "constraint resources"
-Each child of the Dialog widget may request special layout resources
-be applied to it.  These \fIconstraint\fP resources allow the Dialog
-widget's children to specify individual layout requirements.
-.LP
-.TS H
-lw(1i) lw(1i) lw(1i) lw(.5i) lw(2i).
-_
-.sp 3p
-.TB
-Name	Class	Type	Notes	Default Value
-.sp 3p
-_
-.TH
-.R
-.sp 3p
-bottom	Edge	XawEdgeType		XawRubber
-fromHoriz	Widget	Widget		NULL (left edge of Dialog)
-fromVert	Widget	Widget 		NULL (top edge of Dialog)
-horizDistance	Thickness	int		\fBdefaultDistance\fP resource
-left	Edge	XawEdgeType		XawRubber
-.IN "XawEdgeType" ""
-resizable	Boolean	Boolean		FALSE
-right	Edge	XawEdgeType		XawRubber
-.IN "XawRubber" ""
-top	Edge	XawEdgeType		XawRubber
-vertDistance	Thickness	int		\fBdefaultDistance\fP resource
-.sp 3p
-_
-.TE
-.Bt
-.Fh
-.Hd
-.Rl
-.NH 3
-Layout Semantics
-.IN "Dialog widget" "layout semantics"
-.LP
-.Lt Dialog
-.LP
-.TS H
-lw(1.5i) lw(1i) lw(3i).
-_
-.sp 3p
-.TB
-Edge Type	Resource Name	Description
-.sp 3p
-_
-.TH
-.R
-.sp 3p
-XawChainBottom	ChainBottom	Edge remains a fixed distance from bottom of Dialog
-.IN "XawChainBottom" ""
-XawChainLeft	ChainLeft	Edge remains a fixed distance from left of Dialog
-.IN "XawChainLeft" ""
-XawChainRight	ChainRight	Edge remains a fixed distance from right of Dialog
-.IN "XawChainRight" ""
-XawChainTop	ChainTop	Edge remains a fixed distance from top of Dialog
-.IN "XawChainTop" ""
-XawRubber	Rubber	Edges will move a proportional distance
-.IN "XawRubber" ""
-.sp 3p
-_
-.TE
-.NH 4
-Example
-.LP
-If you wish to force the Dialog to never resize one or more of its children
-then set \fBleft\fP and \fBright\fP to \fBXawChainLeft\fP and
-\fBtop\fP and \fBbottom\fP to \fBXawChainTop\fP.  This will cause
-the child to remain a fixed distance from the top and left
-edges of the Dialog, and to never resize.
-.NH 4
-Special Considerations
-.IN "Dialog widget" "special considerations"
-.LP
-The Dialog widget automatically sets the \fBtop\fP and \fBbottom\fP
-resources for all Children that are subclasses of the Command widget,
-as well as the widget children that are used to contain the \fBlabel\fP,
-\fBvalue\fP, and \fBicon\fP.  This policy allows the buttons at the
-bottom of the Dialog to interact correctly with the predefined children,
-and makes it possible for a client to simply create and manage a new
-Command button without having to specify its constraints.
-.LP
-The Dialog will also set \fBfromLeft\fP to the last button in the
-.IN "fromLeft" ""
-Dialog for each new button added to the Dialog widget.
-.LP
-The automatically added constraints cannot be overridden, as they are
-policy decisions of the Dialog widget.  If a more flexible Dialog is
-desired, the application is free to use the Form widget to create its
-own Dialog policy.
-.NH 3
-Automatically Created Children.
-.IN "Dialog widget" "automatically created children"
-.LP
-The Dialog uses Label widgets to contain the \fBlabel\fP and \fBicon\fP.
-These widgets are named \fIlabel\fP and \fIicon\fP respectively.  The
-Dialog \fBvalue\fP is contained in an AsciiText widget whose name is
-\fIvalue\fP.  Using \fBXtNameToWidget\fP the application can change
-.IN "XtNameToWidget" ""
-those resources associated with each of these widgets that are not
-available through the Dialog widget itself.
-.LP
-.NH 3
-Convenience Routines
-.LP
-To return the character string in the text field, use
-.PN XawDialogGetValueString .
-.IN "XawDialogGetValueString" "" "@DEF@"
-.FD 0
-String XawDialogGetValueString(\fIw\fP)
-.br
-	Widget \fIw\fP;
-.FN
-.IP \fIw\fP 1i
-Specifies the Dialog widget.
-.LP
-This function returns a copy of the value string of the Dialog
-widget.  This string is allocated by the AsciiText widget and will
-remain valid and unchanged until another call to
-\fBXawDialogGetValueString\fP or an \fBXtGetValues\fP call on the
-\fBvalue\fP widget, when the string will be automatically freed, and
-a new string is returned.  This string may be freed earlier by calling
-the function \fBXawAsciiSourceFreeString\fP.
-.IN "XawAsciiSourceFreeString" ""
-.LP
-.sp
-To add a new button to the Dialog widget use
-\fBXawDialogAddButton\fP.
-.IN "XawDialogAddButton" "" "@DEF@"
-.FD 0
-void XawDialogAddButton(\fIw\fP, \fIname\fP, \fIfunc\fP, \fIclient_data\fP)
-.br
-	Widget \fIw\fP;
-.br
-	String \fIname\fP;
-.br
-	XtCallbackProc \fIfunc\fP;
-.br
-	XtPointer \fIclient_data\fP;
-.FN
-.IP \fIw\fP 1i
-Specifies the Dialog widget.
-.IP \fIname\fP 1i
-Specifies the name of the new Command button to be added to the Dialog.
-.IP \fIfunc\fP 1i
-Specifies a callback function to be called when this button is activated.  If
-NULL is specified then no callback is added.
-.IP \fIclient_data\fP 1i
-Specifies the client_data to be passed to the \fIfunc\fP.
-.LP
-This function is merely a shorthand for the code sequence:
-.sp
-.Ds 0
-.SM
-.TA 1i 2i
-.ta 1i 2i
-{
-	Widget button = XtCreateManagedWidget(name, commandWidgetClass, w, NULL, ZERO);
-	XtAddCallback(button, XtNcallback, func, client_data);
-}
-.NL
-.De
-.sp
diff --git a/libXaw/spec/Form b/libXaw/spec/Form
deleted file mode 100644
index 9ada171dd..000000000
--- a/libXaw/spec/Form
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,200 +0,0 @@
-.\" $Xorg: Form,v 1.3 2000/08/17 19:42:26 cpqbld Exp $
-.NH 2
-Form Widget
-.LP
-.XS
-	Form Widget
-.XE
-.IN "Form widget" "" "@DEF@"
-.Ds 0
-.TA 2.0i
-.ta 2.0i
-.sp
-Application Header file	<X11/Xaw/Form.h>
-.IN "Form.h" ""
-Class Header file	<X11/Xaw/FormP.h>
-.IN "FormP.h" ""
-Class		formWidgetClass
-.IN "formWidgetClass" ""
-Class Name	Form
-.IN "Form widget" "class name"
-Superclass	Constraint
-.sp
-.De
-.LP
-The Form widget can contain an arbitrary number of children or
-subwidgets.  The Form provides geometry management for its children,
-which allows individual control of the position of each child.  Any
-combination of children can be added to a Form.  The initial positions
-of the children may be computed relative to the positions of previously
-created children.  When the Form is resized, it computes new positions and
-sizes for its children.  This computation is based upon information
-provided when a child is added to the Form.
-.LP
-The default width of the Form is the minimum width needed to
-enclose the children after computing their initial layout, with a
-margin of \fBdefaultDistance\fP
-at the right and bottom edges.  If a width and height is assigned
-to the Form that is too small for the layout, the children will
-be clipped by the right and bottom edges of the Form.
-.NH 3
-Resources
-.LP
-When creating a Form widget instance, the following resources are
-retrieved from the argument list or from the resource database:
-.LP
-.IN "Form widget" "resources"
-.TS H
-expand;
-lw(1i) lw(1i) lw(1i) lw(.5i) lw(2i).
-_
-.sp 3p
-.TB
-Name	Class	Type	Notes	Default Value
-.sp 3p
-_
-.TH
-.R
-.sp 3p
-accelerators	Accelerators	AcceleratorTable		NULL
-ancestorSensitive	AncestorSensitive	Boolean	D	True
-background	Background	Pixel		XtDefaultBackground
-backgroundPixmap	Pixmap	Pixmap		XtUnspecifiedPixmap
-borderColor	BorderColor	Pixel		XtDefaultForeground
-borderPixmap	Pixmap	Pixmap		XtUnspecifiedPixmap
-borderWidth	BorderWidth	Dimension		1
-children	ReadOnly	WidgetList	R	NULL
-colormap	Colormap	Colormap		Parent's Colormap
-defaultDistance	Thickness	int		4
-depth	Depth	int	C	Parent's Depth
-destroyCallback	Callback	XtCallbackList		NULL
-height	Height	Dimension	A	Enough space to contain all children
-mappedWhenManaged	MappedWhenManaged	Boolean		True
-numChildren	ReadOnly	Cardinal	R	0
-screen	Screen	Screen	R	Parent's Screen
-sensitive	Sensitive	Boolean		True
-translations	Translations	TranslationTable		NULL
-width	Width	Dimension	A	Enough space to contain all children
-x	Position	Position		0
-y	Position	Position		0
-.sp 3p
-_
-.TE
-.Ac
-.As
-.Bg
-.Gp
-.Bc
-.Bp
-.Bw
-.Ch
-.Cm
-.Dd Bold
-.Dp
-.Dc
-.Hw
-.Mm
-.Nc
-.Sc
-.Se
-.Tr
-.Xy
-.NH 3
-Constraint Resources
-.LP
-.IN "Form widget" "constraint resources"
-Each child of the Form widget may request special layout resources
-be applied to it.  These \fIconstraint\fP resources allow the Form
-widget's children to specify individual layout requirements.
-.LP
-.LP
-.TS H
-lw(1i) lw(1i) lw(1i) lw(.5i) lw(2i).
-_
-.sp 3p
-.TB
-Name	Class	Type	Notes	Default Value
-.sp 3p
-_
-.TH
-.R
-.sp 3p
-bottom	Edge	XawEdgeType		XawRubber
-fromHoriz	Widget	Widget		NULL (left edge of Form)
-fromVert	Widget	Widget 		NULL (top edge of Form)
-horizDistance	Thickness	int		\fBdefaultDistance\fP resource
-left	Edge	XawEdgeType		XawRubber
-.IN "XawEdgeType" ""
-resizable	Boolean	Boolean		FALSE
-right	Edge	XawEdgeType		XawRubber
-.IN "XawRubber" ""
-top	Edge	XawEdgeType		XawRubber
-vertDistance	Thickness	int		\fBdefaultDistance\fP resource
-.sp 3p
-_
-.TE
-.Bt Bold
-.Fh Bold
-.Hd Bold
-.Rl Bold
-.NH 3
-Layout Semantics
-.LP
-.Lt Form
-.LP
-.TS H
-lw(1.5i) lw(1i) lw(3i).
-_
-.sp 3p
-.TB
-Edge Type	Resource Name	Description
-.sp 3p
-_
-.TH
-.R
-.sp 3p
-XawChainBottom	ChainBottom	Edge remains a fixed distance from bottom of Form
-.IN "XawChainBottom" ""
-XawChainLeft	ChainLeft	Edge remains a fixed distance from left of Form
-.IN "XawChainLeft" ""
-XawChainRight	ChainRight	Edge remains a fixed distance from right of Form
-.IN "XawChainRight" ""
-XawChainTop	ChainTop	Edge remains a fixed distance from top of Form
-.IN "XawChainTop" ""
-XawRubber	Rubber	Edges will move a proportional distance
-.IN "XawRubber" ""
-.sp 3p
-_
-.TE
-.NH 4
-Example
-.LP
-If you wish to force the Form to never resize one or more of its
-children, then set \fBleft\fP and \fBright\fP to \fBXawChainLeft\fP and
-\fBtop\fP and \fBbottom\fP to \fBXawChainTop\fP.  This will cause the
-child to remain a fixed distance from the top and left edges of the
-Form, and never to resize.
-.NH 3
-Convenience Routines
-.LP
-To force or defer a re-layout of the Form, use
-.PN XawFormDoLayout .
-.IN "Form widget" "re-layout"
-.IN "XawFormDoLayout" "" "@DEF@"
-.FD 0
-void XawFormDoLayout(\fIw\fP, \fIdo_layout\fP)
-.br
-     Widget \fIw\fP;
-.br
-     Boolean \fIdo_layout\fP;
-.FN
-.IP \fIw\fP 1i
-Specifies the Form widget.
-.IP \fIdo_layout\fP 1i
-Specifies whether the layout of the Form widget is enabled (\fBTrue\fP)
-or disabled (\fBFalse\fP).
-.LP
-When making several changes to the children of a Form widget
-after the Form has been realized, it is a good idea to disable
-relayout until after all changes have been made.
-
diff --git a/libXaw/spec/Grip b/libXaw/spec/Grip
deleted file mode 100644
index cdbcb0ee6..000000000
--- a/libXaw/spec/Grip
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,157 +0,0 @@
-.\" $Xorg: Grip,v 1.3 2000/08/17 19:42:26 cpqbld Exp $
-.NH 2
-Grip Widget
-.XS
-	Grip Widget
-.XE
-.IN "Grip widget" "" "@DEF@"
-.Ds 0
-.TA 2.0i
-.ta 2.0i
-.sp
-Application header file	<X11/Xaw/Grip.h>
-.IN "Grip.h" ""
-Class header file	<X11/Xaw/GripP.h>
-.IN "GripP.h" ""
-Class	gripWidgetClass
-.IN "gripWidgetClass" ""
-Class Name	Grip
-.IN "Grip widget" "class name"
-Superclass	Simple
-.sp
-.De
-.LP
-The Grip widget provides a small rectangular region in which user input
-events (such as ButtonPress or ButtonRelease) may be handled.  The most
-common use for the Grip widget is as an attachment point for visually
-repositioning an object, such as the pane border in a Paned widget.
-.NH 3
-Resources
-.LP
-When creating a Grip widget instance, the following resources are
-retrieved from the argument list or from the resource database:
-.LP
-.IN "Grip widget" "resources"
-.TS H
-expand;
-lw(1i) lw(1i) lw(1i) lw(.5i) lw(2i).
-_
-.sp 3p
-.TB
-Name	Class	Type	Notes	Default Value
-.sp 3p
-_
-.TH
-.R
-.sp 3p
-accelerators	Accelerators	AcceleratorTable		NULL
-ancestorSensitive	AncestorSensitive	Boolean	D	True
-background	Background	Pixel		XtDefaultBackground
-backgroundPixmap	Pixmap	Pixmap		XtUnspecifiedPixmap
-borderColor	BorderColor	Pixel		XtDefaultForeground
-borderPixmap	Pixmap	Pixmap		XtUnspecifiedPixmap
-borderWidth	BorderWidth	Dimension		0
-callback	Callback	Callback		NULL
-colormap	Colormap	Colormap		Parent's Colormap
-cursor	Cursor	Cursor		None
-cursorName	Cursor	String		NULL
-depth	Depth	int	C	Parent's Depth
-destroyCallback	Callback	XtCallbackList		NULL
-foreground	Foreground	Pixel		XtDefaultForeground
-height	Height	Dimension		8
-insensitiveBorder	Insensitive	Pixmap		GreyPixmap
-international	International	Boolean	C	False
-mappedWhenManaged	MappedWhenManaged	Boolean		True
-pointerColor	Foreground	Pixel		XtDefaultForeground
-pointerColorBackground	Background	Pixel		XtDefaultBackground
-screen	Screen	Screen	R	Parent's Screen
-sensitive	Sensitive	Boolean		True
-translations	Translations	TranslationTable		NULL
-width	Width	Dimension		8
-x	Position	Position		0
-y	Position	Position		0
-.sp 3p
-_
-.TE
-.Ac
-.As
-.Bg
-.Gp
-.Bc
-.Bp
-.Bw
-.IP \fBcallback\fP 1.5i
-All routines on this list are called whenever the \fBGripAction\fP
-action routine is invoked.  The \fIcall_data\fP contains all
-information passed to the action routine.  A detailed description
-is given below in the \fBGrip Actions\fP section.
-.Cm
-.Cu
-.Cn
-.Dp
-.Dc
-.IP \fBforeground\fP 1.5i
-A pixel value which indexes the widget's colormap to derive the color
-used to flood fill the entire Grip widget.
-.Hw
-.Ib
-.Ix
-.Mm
-.Pf
-.Pb
-.Sc
-.Se
-.Tr
-.Xy
-.NH 3
-Grip Actions
-.IN "Grip widget" "actions"
-.LP
-The Grip widget does not declare any default event translation bindings,
-but it does declare a single action routine named \fBGripAction\fP.  The
-.IN "Grip widget" "GripAction routine"
-client specifies an arbitrary event translation table, optionally giving
-parameters to the \fBGripAction\fP routine.
-.LP
-The \fBGripAction\fP routine executes the callbacks on the
-\fBcallback\fP list, passing as \fIcall_data\fP a pointer to a
-\fBXawGripCallData\fP structure, defined in the Grip widget's application
-header file.
-.LP
-.Ds 0
-.TA .5i 2.25i
-.ta .5i 2.25i
-.IN "XawGripCallData" "" "@DEF@"
-.IN "XawGripCallDataRec" "" "@DEF@"
-.sp
-typedef struct _XawGripCallData {
-	XEvent *event;
-	String *params;
-	Cardinal num_params;
-} XawGripCallDataRec, *XawGripCallData,
-  GripCallDataRec, *GripCallData; /* supported for R4 compatibility */
-.IN "XawGripCallDataRec" ""
-.IN "XawGripCallData" ""
-.IN "GripCallData" ""
-.sp
-.De
-.LP
-In this structure, the \fIevent\fP is a pointer to the input event that
-triggered the action.  \fIparams\fP and \fInum_params\fP give the string
-parameters specified in the translation table for the particular event
-binding.
-.IN "Grip widget" "GripAction table"
-.LP
-The following is an example of a translation table that uses the GripAction:
-.LP
-.Ds 0
-.TA .5i 2.5i
-.ta .5i 2.5i
-.sp
-	<Btn1Down>:	GripAction(press)
-	<Btn1Motion>:	GripAction(move)
-	<Btn1Up>:	GripAction(release)
-.sp
-.De
-For a complete description of the format of translation tables, see the
-\fI\*(xT\fP.
diff --git a/libXaw/spec/Label b/libXaw/spec/Label
deleted file mode 100644
index bbf4ce44a..000000000
--- a/libXaw/spec/Label
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,122 +0,0 @@
-.\" $Xorg: Label,v 1.3 2000/08/17 19:42:27 cpqbld Exp $
-.NH 2
-Label Widget
-.XS
-	Label Widget
-.XE
-.IN "Label widget" "" "@DEF@"
-.Ds 0
-.TA 2.0i
-.ta 2.0i
-.sp
-Application header file	<X11/Xaw/Label.h>
-.IN "Label.h" ""
-Class header file	<X11/Xaw/LabelP.h>
-.IN "LabelP.h" ""
-Class	labelWidgetClass
-.IN "labelWidgetClass" ""
-Class Name	Label
-.IN "Label widget" "class name"
-Superclass	Simple
-.sp
-.De
-.LP
-A Label widget holds a graphic displayed within a
-rectangular region of the screen.  The graphic may be a
-text string containing multiple lines of characters in an
-8 bit or 16 bit character set (to be displayed with a
-\fIfont\fP), or in a multi-byte encoding (for use with a
-\fIfontset\fP).  The graphic may also be a bitmap or
-pixmap.  The Label widget will allow its graphic to be
-left, right, or center justified.  Normally, this widget
-can be neither selected nor directly edited by the user.
-It is intended for use as an output device only.
-.NH 3
-Resources
-.LP
-When creating a Label widget instance, the following resources are
-retrieved from the argument list or from the resource database:
-.LP
-.IN "Label widget" "resources"
-.TS H
-expand;
-lw(1i) lw(1i) lw(1i) lw(.5i) lw(2i).
-_
-.sp 3p
-.TB
-Name	Class	Type	Notes	Default Value
-.sp 3p
-_
-.TH
-.R
-.sp 3p
-accelerators	Accelerators	AcceleratorTable		NULL
-ancestorSensitive	AncestorSensitive	Boolean	D	True
-background	Background	Pixel		XtDefaultBackground
-backgroundPixmap	Pixmap	Pixmap		XtUnspecifiedPixmap
-bitmap	Bitmap	Pixmap		None
-borderColor	BorderColor	Pixel		XtDefaultForeground
-borderPixmap	Pixmap	Pixmap		XtUnspecifiedPixmap
-borderWidth	BorderWidth	Dimension		1
-colormap	Colormap	Colormap		Parent's Colormap
-cursor	Cursor	Cursor		None
-cursorName	Cursor	String		NULL
-depth	Depth	int	C	Parent's Depth
-destroyCallback	Callback	XtCallbackList		NULL
-encoding	Encoding	UnsignedChar		XawTextEncoding8bit
-font	Font	XFontStruct		XtDefaultFont
-fontSet	FontSet	XFontSet		XtDefaultFontSet
-foreground	Foreground	Pixel		XtDefaultForeground
-height	Height	Dimension	A	graphic height + 2 * \fBinternalHeight\fP
-insensitiveBorder	Insensitive	Pixmap		GreyPixmap
-internalHeight	Height	Dimension		2
-internalWidth	Width	Dimension		4
-international	International	Boolean	C	False
-justify	Justify	Justify		XtJustifyCenter (center)
-label	Label	String		name of widget
-leftBitmap	LeftBitmap	Bitmap		None
-mappedWhenManaged	MappedWhenManaged	Boolean		True
-pointerColor	Foreground	Pixel		XtDefaultForeground
-pointerColorBackground	Background	Pixel		XtDefaultBackground
-resize	Resize	Boolean		True
-screen	Screen	Screen	R	Parent's Screen
-sensitive	Sensitive	Boolean		True
-translations	Translations	TranslationTable		See above
-width	Width	Dimension	A	graphic width + 2 * \fBinternalWidth\fP
-x	Position	Position		0
-y	Position	Position		0
-.sp 3p
-_
-.TE
-.Ac
-.As
-.Bg
-.Gp
-.Bm Bold
-.Bc
-.Bp
-.Bw
-.Cm
-.Cu
-.Cn
-.Dp
-.Dc
-.Le Bold
-.Lf Bold
-.Ls Bold
-.Lg Bold
-.Hw
-.Ib
-.Ih Bold
-.In
-.Ju Bold
-.La Bold
-.Ll Bold
-.Mm
-.Pf
-.Pb
-.Re Bold
-.Sc
-.Se
-.Tr
-.Xy
diff --git a/libXaw/spec/List b/libXaw/spec/List
deleted file mode 100644
index 1b64aaaf5..000000000
--- a/libXaw/spec/List
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,341 +0,0 @@
-.\" $Xorg: List,v 1.3 2000/08/17 19:42:27 cpqbld Exp $
-.NH 2
-List Widget
-.LP
-.XS
-	List Widget
-.XE
-.IN "List widget" "" "@DEF@"
-.Ds 0
-.TA 2.0i
-.ta 2.0i
-.sp
-Application header file	<X11/Xaw/List.h>
-.IN "List.h" ""
-Class header file	<X11/Xaw/ListP.h>
-.IN "ListP.h" ""
-Class	listWidgetClass
-.IN "listWidgetClass" ""
-Class Name	List
-.IN "List widget" "class name"
-Superclass	Simple
-.sp
-.De
-.LP
-
-The List widget contains a list of strings formatted into rows and
-columns. When one of the strings is selected, it is highlighted, and the
-List widget's \fBNotify\fP action is invoked, calling all routines on
-its callback list.  Only one string may be selected at a time.
-.NH 3
-Resources
-.LP
-When creating a List widget instance, the following resources are
-retrieved from the argument list or from the resource database:
-.LP
-.IN "List widget" "resources"
-.TS H
-expand;
-lw(1i) lw(1i) lw(1i) lw(.5i) lw(2i).
-_
-.sp 3p
-.TB
-Name	Class	Type	Notes	Default Value
-.sp 3p
-_
-.TH
-.R
-.sp 3p
-accelerators	Accelerators	AcceleratorTable		NULL
-ancestorSensitive	AncestorSensitive	Boolean	D	True
-background	Background	Pixel		XtDefaultBackground
-backgroundPixmap	Pixmap	Pixmap		XtUnspecifiedPixmap
-borderColor	BorderColor	Pixel		XtDefaultForeground
-borderPixmap	Pixmap	Pixmap		XtUnspecifiedPixmap
-borderWidth	BorderWidth	Dimension		1
-callback	Callback	Callback		NULL
-colormap	Colormap	Colormap		Parent's Colormap
-columnSpacing	Spacing	Dimension		6
-cursor	Cursor	Cursor		XC_left_ptr
-cursorName	Cursor	String		NULL
-defaultColumns	Columns	int		2
-depth	Depth	int	C	Parent's Depth
-destroyCallback	Callback	XtCallbackList		NULL
-font	Font	FontStruct		XtDefaultFont
-fontSet	FontSet	XFontSet		XtDefaultFontSet
-forceColumns	Columns	Boolean		False
-foreground	Foreground	Pixel		XtDefaultForeground
-height	Height	Dimension	A	Enough space to contain the list
-insensitiveBorder	Insensitive	Pixmap		GreyPixmap
-internalHeight	Height	Dimension		2
-internalWidth	Width	Dimension		4
-international	International	Boolean	C	False
-list	List	Pointer		name of widget
-longest	Longest	int	A	0
-mappedWhenManaged	MappedWhenManaged	Boolean		True
-numberStrings	NumberStrings	int	A	computed for NULL terminated list
-pasteBuffer	Boolean	Boolean		False
-pointerColor	Foreground	Pixel		XtDefaultForeground
-pointerColorBackground	Background	Pixel		XtDefaultBackground
-rowSpacing	Spacing	Dimension		2
-screen	Screen	Screen	R	Parent's Screen
-sensitive	Sensitive	Boolean		True
-translations	Translations	TranslationTable		See below
-verticalList	Boolean	Boolean		False
-width	Width	Dimension	A	Enough space to contain the list
-x	Position	Position		0
-y	Position	Position		0
-.sp 3p
-_
-.TE
-.Ac
-.As
-.Bg
-.Gp
-.Bc
-.Bp
-.Bw
-.IP \fBcallback\fP 1.5i
-All functions on this list are called whenever the \fBnotify\fP action is
-invoked.  The \fIcall_data\fP argument contains information about the element
-selected and is described in detail in the \fBList Callbacks\fP section.
-.Cm
-.IP \fBcolumnSpacing\fP 1.5i
-.br
-.ns
-.IP \fBrowSpacing\fP 1.5i
-The amount of space, in pixels, between each of the rows and columns
-in the list.
-.Cu
-.Cn
-.IP \fBdefaultColumns\fP 1.5i
-The default number of columns.  This value is used when neither the
-width nor the height of the List widget is specified or when
-\fBforceColumns\fP is \fBTrue\fP.
-.Dp
-.Dc
-.IP \fBfont\fP
-The text font to use when displaying the \fBlist\fP, when the
-\fBinternational\fP resource is \fBfalse\fP.
-.IP \fBfontSet\fP
-The text font set to use when displaying the \fBlist\fP, when the
-\fBinternational\fP resource is \fBtrue\fP.
-.IP \fBforceColumns\fP
-Forces the default number of columns to be used regardless of the
-List widget's current size.
-.IP \fBforeground\fP 1.5i
-A pixel value which indexes the widget's colormap to derive the color
-used to paint the text of the list elements.
-.Hw
-.Ib
-.IP \fPinternalHeight\fP 1.5i
-.br
-.ns
-.IP \fPinternalWidth\fP 1.5i
-The margin, in pixels, between the edges of the list and the
-corresponding edge of the List widget's window.
-.IP \fBlist\fP 1.5i
-An array of text strings displayed in the List widget.  If
-\fBnumberStrings\fP is zero (the default) then the \fBlist\fP must be
-NULL terminated.  If a value is not specified for the \fBlist\fP, then
-\fBnumberStrings\fP is set to 1, and the name of the widget is used as
-the \fBlist\fP, and \fBlongest\fP is set to the length of the name of the
-widget.  The \fBlist\fP is used in place, and must be available
-to the List widget for the lifetime of this widget, or until it is
-changed with \fBXtSetValues\fP or \fBXawListChange\fP.
-.In
-.IP \fBlongest\fP
-Specifies the width, in pixels, of the longest string in the current
-list.  The List widget will compute this value if zero (the default)
-is specified.  If this resource is set by hand, entries longer than this
-will be clipped to fit.
-.Mm
-.IP \fBnumberStrings\fP 1.5i
-The number of strings in the current list.  If a value of zero (the
-default) is specified, the List widget will compute it.  When computing
-the number of strings the List widget assumes that the \fBlist\fP is NULL
-terminated.
-.IP \fBpasteBuffer\fP 1.5i
-If this resource is set to \fBTrue\fP then the name of the currently
-selected list element will be put into \fBCUT_BUFFER_0\fP.
-.Pf
-.Pb
-.Sc
-.Se
-.Tr
-.IP \fBverticalList\fP 1.5i
-If this resource is set to \fBTrue\fP then the list elements will be
-presented in column major order.
-.Xy
-.NH 3
-List Actions
-.IN "List widget" "actions"
-.LP
-The List widget supports the following actions:
-.IP \(bu 5
-Highlighting and unhighlighting the list element under the
-pointer with \fBSet\fP and \fBUnset\fP
-.IP \(bu 5
-Processing application callbacks with \fBNotify\fP
-.LP
-The following is the default translation table used by the List Widget:
-.IN "List widget" "default translation table"
-.LP
-.Ds
-.TA .5i 2.25i
-.ta .5i 2.25i
-<Btn1Down>,<Btn1Up>:	Set(\|) Notify(\|)
-.sp
-.De
-.LP
-The full list of actions supported by List widget is:
-.IP \fBSet\fP(\|) 1.5i
-\fISets\fP the list element that is currently under the pointer.  To
-inform the user that this element is currently set, it is drawn with
-foreground and background colors reversed.  If this action is called when
-there is no list element under the cursor, the currently \fIset\fP
-element will be \fIunset\fP.
-.IP \fBUnset\fP(\|) 1.5i
-Cancels the \fIset\fP state of the element under the pointer,
-and redraws it with normal foreground and background colors.
-.IP \fBNotify\fP(\|) 1.5i
-Calls all callbacks on the List widget's callback list.  Information
-about the currently selected list element is passed in the
-\fIcall_data\fP argument (see \fBList Callbacks\fP below).
-.NH 3
-List Callbacks
-.IN "List widget" "callbacks"
-.LP
-All procedures on the List widget's callback list will have a
-\fBXawListReturnStruct\fP passed to them as \fIcall_data\fP.  The
-structure is defined in the List widget's application header file.
-.LP
-.Ds 0
-.TA .5i 2.25i
-.ta .5i 2.25i
-.IN "XawListReturnStruct" "" "@DEF@"
-typedef struct _XawListReturnStruct {
-	String string;	/* string shown in the list. */
-	int list_index;	/* index of the item selected. */
-} XawListReturnStruct;
-.IN "XawListReturnStruct" ""
-.NT
-The \fIlist_index\fP item used to be called simply \fIindex\fP.
-Unfortunately, this name collided with a global name defined on some
-operating systems, and had to be changed.
-.NE
-.De
-.NH 3
-Changing the List
-.LP
-To change the list that is displayed, use
-.PN XawListChange .
-.IN "XawListChange" "" "@DEF@"
-.FD 0
-void XawListChange(\fIw\fP, \fIlist\fP, \fInitems\fP, \fIlongest\fP, \fIresize\fP)
-.br
-     Widget \fIw\fP;
-.br
-     String * \fIlist\fP;
-.br
-     int \fInitems\fP, \fIlongest\fP;
-.br
-     Boolean \fIresize\fP;
-.FN
-.IP \fIw\fP 1i
-Specifies the List widget.
-.IP \fIlist\fP 1i
-Specifies the new list for the List widget to display.
-.IP \fInitems\fP 1i
-Specifies the number of items in the \fIlist\fP.  If a value less than 1
-is specified, \fIlist\fP must be NULL terminated, and the number of
-items will be calculated by the List widget.
-.IP \fIlongest\fP 1i
-Specifies the length of the longest item in the \fIlist\fP in pixels.
-If a value less than 1 is specified, the List widget will calculate the
-value.
-.IP \fIresize\fP 1i
-Specifies a Boolean value that if \fBTrue\fP indicates that the
-List widget should try to resize itself after making the change.
-The constraints of the List widget's parent are always enforced,
-regardless of the value specified here.
-.LP
-.PN XawListChange
-will \fIunset\fP all list elements that are currently \fBset\fP before
-the list is actually changed.  The \fIlist\fP is used in place, and must
-remain usable for the lifetime of the List widget, or until \fIlist\fP
-has been changed again with this function or with \fBXtSetValues\fP.
-.NH 3
-Highlighting an Item
-.LP
-To highlight an item in the list, use
-.PN XawListHighlight .
-.IN "XawListHighlight" "" "@DEF@"
-.FD 0
-void XawListHighlight(\fIw\fP, \fIitem\fP)
-.br
-     Widget \fIw\fP;
-.br
-     int \fIitem\fP;
-.FN
-.IP \fIw\fP 1i
-Specifies the List widget.
-.IP \fIitem\fP 1i
-Specifies an index into the current list that indicates the item to be
-highlighted.
-.LP
-Only one item can be highlighted at a time.
-If an item is already highlighted when
-.PN XawListHighlight
-is called,
-the highlighted item is unhighlighted before the new item is highlighted.
-.NH 3
-Unhighlighting an Item
-.LP
-To unhighlight the currently highlighted item in the list, use
-.PN XawListUnhighlight .
-.IN "XawListUnhighlight" "" "@DEF@"
-.FD 0
-void XawListUnhighlight(\fIw\fP)
-.br
-     Widget \fIw\fP;
-.FN
-.IP \fIw\fP 1i
-Specifies the List widget.
-.NH 3
-Retrieving the Currently Selected Item
-.LP
-To retrieve the list element that is currently \fIset\fP, use
-.PN XawListShowCurrent .
-.IN "XawListShowCurrent" "" "@DEF@"
-.FD 0
-XawListReturnStruct *XawListShowCurrent(\fIw\fP)
-.br
-     Widget \fIw\fP;
-.FN
-.IP \fIw\fP 1i
-Specifies the List widget.
-.LP
-.PN XawListShowCurrent
-returns a pointer to an
-.PN XawListReturnStruct
-structure,
-containing the currently highlighted item.
-If the value of the index member is XAW_LIST_NONE,
-.IN "XAW_LIST_NONE"
-the string member is undefined, and no item is currently selected.
-.NH 3
-Restrictions
-.LP
-Many programmers create a ``scrolled list'' by putting a List
-widget with many entries as a child of a Viewport widget.  The
-List continues to create a window as big as its contents, but
-that big window is only visible where it intersects the parent
-Viewport's window.  (I.e., it is ``clipped.'')
-.LP
-While this is a useful technique, there is a serious drawback.
-X does not support windows above 32,767 pixels in width or
-height, but this height limit will be exceeded by a List's
-window when the List has many entries (i.e., with a 12 point
-font, about 3000 entries would be too many.)
-.LP
diff --git a/libXaw/spec/Makefile.am b/libXaw/spec/Makefile.am
deleted file mode 100644
index 9e16f9797..000000000
--- a/libXaw/spec/Makefile.am
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,96 +0,0 @@
-#
-# Copyright 2009 Sun Microsystems, Inc.  All rights reserved.
-#
-# Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its
-# documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that
-# the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
-# copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
-# documentation.
-#
-# The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included
-# in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
-#
-# THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS
-# OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
-# MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT.
-# IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OPEN GROUP BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR
-# OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE,
-# ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR
-# OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
-#
-# Except as contained in this notice, the name of the copyright holders shall
-# not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or
-# other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization
-# from the copyright holders.
-#
-
-# Based on xc/doc/specs/Xaw/Makefile from X11R6.9
-
-XDOCMACROS = macros.t
-XIDXMACROS = indexmacros.t
-EVERYWHERE = $(XDOCMACROS) strings.mit strings.xaw
-CHAPTER1 = CH1
-CHAPTER2 = CH2
-CHAPTER3 = CH3.intro Command Grip Label List Panner Repeater \
-           Scrollbar Simple StripChart Toggle
-CHAPTER4 = CH4.intro SimpleMenu SmeBSB SmeLine Sme MenuButton
-CHAPTER5 = CH5.intro TextActions TextFuncs AsciiText AsciiSource AsciiSink \
-           TextCustom Text TextSource TextSink
-CHAPTER6 = CH6.intro Box Dialog Form Paned Porthole Tree Viewport
-CHAPTER7 = CH7.intro Template
-
-spec_sources = \
-        $(EVERYWHERE) TPage_Credits \
-        $(CHAPTER1) $(CHAPTER2) $(CHAPTER3) $(CHAPTER4) \
-        $(CHAPTER5) $(CHAPTER6) $(CHAPTER7)
-
-spec_input = $(spec_sources:%=$(srcdir)/%)
-
-EXTRA_DIST = $(spec_sources) $(XIDXMACROS) block.awk fixindex.awk widg.idxmac.t
-
-if BUILD_DOCS
-doc_DATA = widgets.ps widgets.index.ps widgets.txt widgets.html
-
-CLEANFILES = $(doc_DATA)
-MOSTLYCLEANFILES = index.*
-
-GROFF_DEFS = -dxV="$(PACKAGE_STRING)"
-GROFF_FLAGS = -t -ms $(GROFF_DEFS)
-
-widgets.ps: $(spec_input)
-	-$(AM_V_GEN) $(GROFF) -Tps $(GROFF_FLAGS) $(spec_input) \
-	 2> index.raw > $@
-	@if grep '^[^1-9.]' index.raw | grep -v warning; then exit 1; \
-	 else test $$? -le 1; fi
-
-widgets.txt: $(spec_input)
-	$(AM_V_GEN) $(GROFF) -Tascii $(GROFF_FLAGS) $(spec_input) \
-	 2> index.txt.raw > $@
-
-widgets.html: $(spec_input)
-	$(AM_V_GEN) $(GROFF) -Thtml $(GROFF_FLAGS) $(spec_input) \
-	 2> index.html.raw > $@
-
-index.raw: widgets.ps
-
-index.pageno: index.raw
-	$(AM_V_GEN)$(SED) -n '$$p' index.raw > $@
-
-index.troff: index.raw
-	$(AM_V_GEN)$(GREP) '^[1-9]' index.raw | \
-	 (sort -f '-t:' -k2,2 -k1,1n 2>/dev/null || \
-	  sort -f '-t:' +1 -3 +0n -1n) | \
-	 $(AWK) -f $(srcdir)/fixindex.awk | \
-	 $(AWK) -f $(srcdir)/block.awk > $@
-
-widgets.index.ps: widg.idxmac.t index.troff index.pageno
-	$(AM_V_GEN)$(GROFF) -me $(GROFF_DEFS) \
-	 $(srcdir)/widg.idxmac.t $(srcdir)/$(XIDXMACROS) index.troff > $@
-
-
-# Useful for running off part of the manual by hand,
-# e.g., make part PART=Label
-part: $(srcdir)/$(PART)
-	$(GROFF) -Tps $(GROFF_FLAGS) $(EVERYWHERE) $(srcdir)/$(PART) > $(PART).ps
-
-endif BUILD_DOCS
diff --git a/libXaw/spec/Makefile.in b/libXaw/spec/Makefile.in
deleted file mode 100644
index a57ed02c2..000000000
--- a/libXaw/spec/Makefile.in
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,513 +0,0 @@
-# Makefile.in generated by automake 1.11 from Makefile.am.
-# @configure_input@
-
-# Copyright (C) 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002,
-# 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009  Free Software Foundation,
-# Inc.
-# This Makefile.in is free software; the Free Software Foundation
-# gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it,
-# with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved.
-
-# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
-# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY, to the extent permitted by law; without
-# even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A
-# PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
-
-@SET_MAKE@
-
-#
-# Copyright 2009 Sun Microsystems, Inc.  All rights reserved.
-#
-# Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its
-# documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that
-# the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
-# copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
-# documentation.
-#
-# The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included
-# in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
-#
-# THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS
-# OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
-# MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT.
-# IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OPEN GROUP BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR
-# OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE,
-# ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR
-# OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
-#
-# Except as contained in this notice, the name of the copyright holders shall
-# not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or
-# other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization
-# from the copyright holders.
-#
-
-# Based on xc/doc/specs/Xaw/Makefile from X11R6.9
-
-VPATH = @srcdir@
-pkgdatadir = $(datadir)/@PACKAGE@
-pkgincludedir = $(includedir)/@PACKAGE@
-pkglibdir = $(libdir)/@PACKAGE@
-pkglibexecdir = $(libexecdir)/@PACKAGE@
-am__cd = CDPATH="$${ZSH_VERSION+.}$(PATH_SEPARATOR)" && cd
-install_sh_DATA = $(install_sh) -c -m 644
-install_sh_PROGRAM = $(install_sh) -c
-install_sh_SCRIPT = $(install_sh) -c
-INSTALL_HEADER = $(INSTALL_DATA)
-transform = $(program_transform_name)
-NORMAL_INSTALL = :
-PRE_INSTALL = :
-POST_INSTALL = :
-NORMAL_UNINSTALL = :
-PRE_UNINSTALL = :
-POST_UNINSTALL = :
-build_triplet = @build@
-host_triplet = @host@
-subdir = spec
-DIST_COMMON = $(srcdir)/Makefile.am $(srcdir)/Makefile.in
-ACLOCAL_M4 = $(top_srcdir)/aclocal.m4
-am__aclocal_m4_deps = $(top_srcdir)/configure.ac
-am__configure_deps = $(am__aclocal_m4_deps) $(CONFIGURE_DEPENDENCIES) \
-	$(ACLOCAL_M4)
-mkinstalldirs = $(install_sh) -d
-CONFIG_HEADER = $(top_builddir)/config.h
-CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES =
-CONFIG_CLEAN_VPATH_FILES =
-AM_V_GEN = $(am__v_GEN_$(V))
-am__v_GEN_ = $(am__v_GEN_$(AM_DEFAULT_VERBOSITY))
-am__v_GEN_0 = @echo "  GEN   " $@;
-AM_V_at = $(am__v_at_$(V))
-am__v_at_ = $(am__v_at_$(AM_DEFAULT_VERBOSITY))
-am__v_at_0 = @
-SOURCES =
-DIST_SOURCES =
-am__vpath_adj_setup = srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's|.|.|g'`;
-am__vpath_adj = case $$p in \
-    $(srcdir)/*) f=`echo "$$p" | sed "s|^$$srcdirstrip/||"`;; \
-    *) f=$$p;; \
-  esac;
-am__strip_dir = f=`echo $$p | sed -e 's|^.*/||'`;
-am__install_max = 40
-am__nobase_strip_setup = \
-  srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's/[].[^$$\\*|]/\\\\&/g'`
-am__nobase_strip = \
-  for p in $$list; do echo "$$p"; done | sed -e "s|$$srcdirstrip/||"
-am__nobase_list = $(am__nobase_strip_setup); \
-  for p in $$list; do echo "$$p $$p"; done | \
-  sed "s| $$srcdirstrip/| |;"' / .*\//!s/ .*/ ./; s,\( .*\)/[^/]*$$,\1,' | \
-  $(AWK) 'BEGIN { files["."] = "" } { files[$$2] = files[$$2] " " $$1; \
-    if (++n[$$2] == $(am__install_max)) \
-      { print $$2, files[$$2]; n[$$2] = 0; files[$$2] = "" } } \
-    END { for (dir in files) print dir, files[dir] }'
-am__base_list = \
-  sed '$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;s/\n/ /g' | \
-  sed '$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;s/\n/ /g'
-am__installdirs = "$(DESTDIR)$(docdir)"
-DATA = $(doc_DATA)
-DISTFILES = $(DIST_COMMON) $(DIST_SOURCES) $(TEXINFOS) $(EXTRA_DIST)
-ACLOCAL = @ACLOCAL@
-ADMIN_MAN_DIR = @ADMIN_MAN_DIR@
-ADMIN_MAN_SUFFIX = @ADMIN_MAN_SUFFIX@
-AMTAR = @AMTAR@
-AM_DEFAULT_VERBOSITY = @AM_DEFAULT_VERBOSITY@
-APP_MAN_DIR = @APP_MAN_DIR@
-APP_MAN_SUFFIX = @APP_MAN_SUFFIX@
-AR = @AR@
-AUTOCONF = @AUTOCONF@
-AUTOHEADER = @AUTOHEADER@
-AUTOMAKE = @AUTOMAKE@
-AWK = @AWK@
-CC = @CC@
-CCDEPMODE = @CCDEPMODE@
-CFLAGS = @CFLAGS@
-CHANGELOG_CMD = @CHANGELOG_CMD@
-CPP = @CPP@
-CPPFLAGS = @CPPFLAGS@
-CWARNFLAGS = @CWARNFLAGS@
-CXX = @CXX@
-CXXCPP = @CXXCPP@
-CXXDEPMODE = @CXXDEPMODE@
-CXXFLAGS = @CXXFLAGS@
-CYGPATH_W = @CYGPATH_W@
-DEFS = @DEFS@
-DEPDIR = @DEPDIR@
-DRIVER_MAN_DIR = @DRIVER_MAN_DIR@
-DRIVER_MAN_SUFFIX = @DRIVER_MAN_SUFFIX@
-DSYMUTIL = @DSYMUTIL@
-ECHO = @ECHO@
-ECHO_C = @ECHO_C@
-ECHO_N = @ECHO_N@
-ECHO_T = @ECHO_T@
-EGREP = @EGREP@
-EXEEXT = @EXEEXT@
-F77 = @F77@
-FFLAGS = @FFLAGS@
-FILE_MAN_DIR = @FILE_MAN_DIR@
-FILE_MAN_SUFFIX = @FILE_MAN_SUFFIX@
-GREP = @GREP@
-GROFF = @GROFF@
-INSTALL = @INSTALL@
-INSTALL_DATA = @INSTALL_DATA@
-INSTALL_PROGRAM = @INSTALL_PROGRAM@
-INSTALL_SCRIPT = @INSTALL_SCRIPT@
-INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM = @INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM@
-LDFLAGS = @LDFLAGS@
-LIBEXT = @LIBEXT@
-LIBOBJS = @LIBOBJS@
-LIBS = @LIBS@
-LIBTOOL = @LIBTOOL@
-LIB_MAN_DIR = @LIB_MAN_DIR@
-LIB_MAN_SUFFIX = @LIB_MAN_SUFFIX@
-LN_S = @LN_S@
-LTLIBOBJS = @LTLIBOBJS@
-MAKEINFO = @MAKEINFO@
-MISC_MAN_DIR = @MISC_MAN_DIR@
-MISC_MAN_SUFFIX = @MISC_MAN_SUFFIX@
-MKDIR_P = @MKDIR_P@
-NMEDIT = @NMEDIT@
-OBJEXT = @OBJEXT@
-PACKAGE = @PACKAGE@
-PACKAGE_BUGREPORT = @PACKAGE_BUGREPORT@
-PACKAGE_NAME = @PACKAGE_NAME@
-PACKAGE_STRING = @PACKAGE_STRING@
-PACKAGE_TARNAME = @PACKAGE_TARNAME@
-PACKAGE_VERSION = @PACKAGE_VERSION@
-PATH_SEPARATOR = @PATH_SEPARATOR@
-PKG_CONFIG = @PKG_CONFIG@
-RANLIB = @RANLIB@
-SED = @SED@
-SET_MAKE = @SET_MAKE@
-SHELL = @SHELL@
-STRIP = @STRIP@
-VERSION = @VERSION@
-XAW6_CFLAGS = @XAW6_CFLAGS@
-XAW6_LIBS = @XAW6_LIBS@
-XAW7_CFLAGS = @XAW7_CFLAGS@
-XAW7_LIBS = @XAW7_LIBS@
-abs_builddir = @abs_builddir@
-abs_srcdir = @abs_srcdir@
-abs_top_builddir = @abs_top_builddir@
-abs_top_srcdir = @abs_top_srcdir@
-ac_ct_CC = @ac_ct_CC@
-ac_ct_CXX = @ac_ct_CXX@
-ac_ct_F77 = @ac_ct_F77@
-am__include = @am__include@
-am__leading_dot = @am__leading_dot@
-am__quote = @am__quote@
-am__tar = @am__tar@
-am__untar = @am__untar@
-bindir = @bindir@
-build = @build@
-build_alias = @build_alias@
-build_cpu = @build_cpu@
-build_os = @build_os@
-build_vendor = @build_vendor@
-builddir = @builddir@
-datadir = @datadir@
-datarootdir = @datarootdir@
-distcleancheck_listfiles = @distcleancheck_listfiles@
-docdir = @docdir@
-dvidir = @dvidir@
-exec_prefix = @exec_prefix@
-host = @host@
-host_alias = @host_alias@
-host_cpu = @host_cpu@
-host_os = @host_os@
-host_vendor = @host_vendor@
-htmldir = @htmldir@
-includedir = @includedir@
-infodir = @infodir@
-install_sh = @install_sh@
-libdir = @libdir@
-libexecdir = @libexecdir@
-localedir = @localedir@
-localstatedir = @localstatedir@
-mandir = @mandir@
-mkdir_p = @mkdir_p@
-oldincludedir = @oldincludedir@
-pdfdir = @pdfdir@
-prefix = @prefix@
-program_transform_name = @program_transform_name@
-psdir = @psdir@
-sbindir = @sbindir@
-sharedstatedir = @sharedstatedir@
-srcdir = @srcdir@
-sysconfdir = @sysconfdir@
-target_alias = @target_alias@
-top_build_prefix = @top_build_prefix@
-top_builddir = @top_builddir@
-top_srcdir = @top_srcdir@
-XDOCMACROS = macros.t
-XIDXMACROS = indexmacros.t
-EVERYWHERE = $(XDOCMACROS) strings.mit strings.xaw
-CHAPTER1 = CH1
-CHAPTER2 = CH2
-CHAPTER3 = CH3.intro Command Grip Label List Panner Repeater \
-           Scrollbar Simple StripChart Toggle
-
-CHAPTER4 = CH4.intro SimpleMenu SmeBSB SmeLine Sme MenuButton
-CHAPTER5 = CH5.intro TextActions TextFuncs AsciiText AsciiSource AsciiSink \
-           TextCustom Text TextSource TextSink
-
-CHAPTER6 = CH6.intro Box Dialog Form Paned Porthole Tree Viewport
-CHAPTER7 = CH7.intro Template
-spec_sources = \
-        $(EVERYWHERE) TPage_Credits \
-        $(CHAPTER1) $(CHAPTER2) $(CHAPTER3) $(CHAPTER4) \
-        $(CHAPTER5) $(CHAPTER6) $(CHAPTER7)
-
-spec_input = $(spec_sources:%=$(srcdir)/%)
-EXTRA_DIST = $(spec_sources) $(XIDXMACROS) block.awk fixindex.awk widg.idxmac.t
-@BUILD_DOCS_TRUE@doc_DATA = widgets.ps widgets.index.ps widgets.txt widgets.html
-@BUILD_DOCS_TRUE@CLEANFILES = $(doc_DATA)
-@BUILD_DOCS_TRUE@MOSTLYCLEANFILES = index.*
-@BUILD_DOCS_TRUE@GROFF_DEFS = -dxV="$(PACKAGE_STRING)"
-@BUILD_DOCS_TRUE@GROFF_FLAGS = -t -ms $(GROFF_DEFS)
-all: all-am
-
-.SUFFIXES:
-$(srcdir)/Makefile.in:  $(srcdir)/Makefile.am  $(am__configure_deps)
-	@for dep in $?; do \
-	  case '$(am__configure_deps)' in \
-	    *$$dep*) \
-	      ( cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh ) \
-	        && { if test -f $@; then exit 0; else break; fi; }; \
-	      exit 1;; \
-	  esac; \
-	done; \
-	echo ' cd $(top_srcdir) && $(AUTOMAKE) --gnu spec/Makefile'; \
-	$(am__cd) $(top_srcdir) && \
-	  $(AUTOMAKE) --gnu spec/Makefile
-.PRECIOUS: Makefile
-Makefile: $(srcdir)/Makefile.in $(top_builddir)/config.status
-	@case '$?' in \
-	  *config.status*) \
-	    cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh;; \
-	  *) \
-	    echo ' cd $(top_builddir) && $(SHELL) ./config.status $(subdir)/$@ $(am__depfiles_maybe)'; \
-	    cd $(top_builddir) && $(SHELL) ./config.status $(subdir)/$@ $(am__depfiles_maybe);; \
-	esac;
-
-$(top_builddir)/config.status: $(top_srcdir)/configure $(CONFIG_STATUS_DEPENDENCIES)
-	cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh
-
-$(top_srcdir)/configure:  $(am__configure_deps)
-	cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh
-$(ACLOCAL_M4):  $(am__aclocal_m4_deps)
-	cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh
-$(am__aclocal_m4_deps):
-
-mostlyclean-libtool:
-	-rm -f *.lo
-
-clean-libtool:
-	-rm -rf .libs _libs
-install-docDATA: $(doc_DATA)
-	@$(NORMAL_INSTALL)
-	test -z "$(docdir)" || $(MKDIR_P) "$(DESTDIR)$(docdir)"
-	@list='$(doc_DATA)'; test -n "$(docdir)" || list=; \
-	for p in $$list; do \
-	  if test -f "$$p"; then d=; else d="$(srcdir)/"; fi; \
-	  echo "$$d$$p"; \
-	done | $(am__base_list) | \
-	while read files; do \
-	  echo " $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files '$(DESTDIR)$(docdir)'"; \
-	  $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files "$(DESTDIR)$(docdir)" || exit $$?; \
-	done
-
-uninstall-docDATA:
-	@$(NORMAL_UNINSTALL)
-	@list='$(doc_DATA)'; test -n "$(docdir)" || list=; \
-	files=`for p in $$list; do echo $$p; done | sed -e 's|^.*/||'`; \
-	test -n "$$files" || exit 0; \
-	echo " ( cd '$(DESTDIR)$(docdir)' && rm -f" $$files ")"; \
-	cd "$(DESTDIR)$(docdir)" && rm -f $$files
-tags: TAGS
-TAGS:
-
-ctags: CTAGS
-CTAGS:
-
-
-distdir: $(DISTFILES)
-	@srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's/[].[^$$\\*]/\\\\&/g'`; \
-	topsrcdirstrip=`echo "$(top_srcdir)" | sed 's/[].[^$$\\*]/\\\\&/g'`; \
-	list='$(DISTFILES)'; \
-	  dist_files=`for file in $$list; do echo $$file; done | \
-	  sed -e "s|^$$srcdirstrip/||;t" \
-	      -e "s|^$$topsrcdirstrip/|$(top_builddir)/|;t"`; \
-	case $$dist_files in \
-	  */*) $(MKDIR_P) `echo "$$dist_files" | \
-			   sed '/\//!d;s|^|$(distdir)/|;s,/[^/]*$$,,' | \
-			   sort -u` ;; \
-	esac; \
-	for file in $$dist_files; do \
-	  if test -f $$file || test -d $$file; then d=.; else d=$(srcdir); fi; \
-	  if test -d $$d/$$file; then \
-	    dir=`echo "/$$file" | sed -e 's,/[^/]*$$,,'`; \
-	    if test -d "$(distdir)/$$file"; then \
-	      find "$(distdir)/$$file" -type d ! -perm -700 -exec chmod u+rwx {} \;; \
-	    fi; \
-	    if test -d $(srcdir)/$$file && test $$d != $(srcdir); then \
-	      cp -fpR $(srcdir)/$$file "$(distdir)$$dir" || exit 1; \
-	      find "$(distdir)/$$file" -type d ! -perm -700 -exec chmod u+rwx {} \;; \
-	    fi; \
-	    cp -fpR $$d/$$file "$(distdir)$$dir" || exit 1; \
-	  else \
-	    test -f "$(distdir)/$$file" \
-	    || cp -p $$d/$$file "$(distdir)/$$file" \
-	    || exit 1; \
-	  fi; \
-	done
-check-am: all-am
-check: check-am
-all-am: Makefile $(DATA)
-installdirs:
-	for dir in "$(DESTDIR)$(docdir)"; do \
-	  test -z "$$dir" || $(MKDIR_P) "$$dir"; \
-	done
-install: install-am
-install-exec: install-exec-am
-install-data: install-data-am
-uninstall: uninstall-am
-
-install-am: all-am
-	@$(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) install-exec-am install-data-am
-
-installcheck: installcheck-am
-install-strip:
-	$(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) INSTALL_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" \
-	  install_sh_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" INSTALL_STRIP_FLAG=-s \
-	  `test -z '$(STRIP)' || \
-	    echo "INSTALL_PROGRAM_ENV=STRIPPROG='$(STRIP)'"` install
-mostlyclean-generic:
-	-test -z "$(MOSTLYCLEANFILES)" || rm -f $(MOSTLYCLEANFILES)
-
-clean-generic:
-	-test -z "$(CLEANFILES)" || rm -f $(CLEANFILES)
-
-distclean-generic:
-	-test -z "$(CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES)" || rm -f $(CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES)
-	-test . = "$(srcdir)" || test -z "$(CONFIG_CLEAN_VPATH_FILES)" || rm -f $(CONFIG_CLEAN_VPATH_FILES)
-
-maintainer-clean-generic:
-	@echo "This command is intended for maintainers to use"
-	@echo "it deletes files that may require special tools to rebuild."
-clean: clean-am
-
-clean-am: clean-generic clean-libtool mostlyclean-am
-
-distclean: distclean-am
-	-rm -f Makefile
-distclean-am: clean-am distclean-generic
-
-dvi: dvi-am
-
-dvi-am:
-
-html: html-am
-
-html-am:
-
-info: info-am
-
-info-am:
-
-install-data-am: install-docDATA
-
-install-dvi: install-dvi-am
-
-install-dvi-am:
-
-install-exec-am:
-
-install-html: install-html-am
-
-install-html-am:
-
-install-info: install-info-am
-
-install-info-am:
-
-install-man:
-
-install-pdf: install-pdf-am
-
-install-pdf-am:
-
-install-ps: install-ps-am
-
-install-ps-am:
-
-installcheck-am:
-
-maintainer-clean: maintainer-clean-am
-	-rm -f Makefile
-maintainer-clean-am: distclean-am maintainer-clean-generic
-
-mostlyclean: mostlyclean-am
-
-mostlyclean-am: mostlyclean-generic mostlyclean-libtool
-
-pdf: pdf-am
-
-pdf-am:
-
-ps: ps-am
-
-ps-am:
-
-uninstall-am: uninstall-docDATA
-
-.MAKE: install-am install-strip
-
-.PHONY: all all-am check check-am clean clean-generic clean-libtool \
-	distclean distclean-generic distclean-libtool distdir dvi \
-	dvi-am html html-am info info-am install install-am \
-	install-data install-data-am install-docDATA install-dvi \
-	install-dvi-am install-exec install-exec-am install-html \
-	install-html-am install-info install-info-am install-man \
-	install-pdf install-pdf-am install-ps install-ps-am \
-	install-strip installcheck installcheck-am installdirs \
-	maintainer-clean maintainer-clean-generic mostlyclean \
-	mostlyclean-generic mostlyclean-libtool pdf pdf-am ps ps-am \
-	uninstall uninstall-am uninstall-docDATA
-
-
-@BUILD_DOCS_TRUE@widgets.ps: $(spec_input)
-@BUILD_DOCS_TRUE@	-$(AM_V_GEN) $(GROFF) -Tps $(GROFF_FLAGS) $(spec_input) \
-@BUILD_DOCS_TRUE@	 2> index.raw > $@
-@BUILD_DOCS_TRUE@	@if grep '^[^1-9.]' index.raw | grep -v warning; then exit 1; \
-@BUILD_DOCS_TRUE@	 else test $$? -le 1; fi
-
-@BUILD_DOCS_TRUE@widgets.txt: $(spec_input)
-@BUILD_DOCS_TRUE@	$(AM_V_GEN) $(GROFF) -Tascii $(GROFF_FLAGS) $(spec_input) \
-@BUILD_DOCS_TRUE@	 2> index.txt.raw > $@
-
-@BUILD_DOCS_TRUE@widgets.html: $(spec_input)
-@BUILD_DOCS_TRUE@	$(AM_V_GEN) $(GROFF) -Thtml $(GROFF_FLAGS) $(spec_input) \
-@BUILD_DOCS_TRUE@	 2> index.html.raw > $@
-
-@BUILD_DOCS_TRUE@index.raw: widgets.ps
-
-@BUILD_DOCS_TRUE@index.pageno: index.raw
-@BUILD_DOCS_TRUE@	$(AM_V_GEN)$(SED) -n '$$p' index.raw > $@
-
-@BUILD_DOCS_TRUE@index.troff: index.raw
-@BUILD_DOCS_TRUE@	$(AM_V_GEN)$(GREP) '^[1-9]' index.raw | \
-@BUILD_DOCS_TRUE@	 (sort -f '-t:' -k2,2 -k1,1n 2>/dev/null || \
-@BUILD_DOCS_TRUE@	  sort -f '-t:' +1 -3 +0n -1n) | \
-@BUILD_DOCS_TRUE@	 $(AWK) -f $(srcdir)/fixindex.awk | \
-@BUILD_DOCS_TRUE@	 $(AWK) -f $(srcdir)/block.awk > $@
-
-@BUILD_DOCS_TRUE@widgets.index.ps: widg.idxmac.t index.troff index.pageno
-@BUILD_DOCS_TRUE@	$(AM_V_GEN)$(GROFF) -me $(GROFF_DEFS) \
-@BUILD_DOCS_TRUE@	 $(srcdir)/widg.idxmac.t $(srcdir)/$(XIDXMACROS) index.troff > $@
-
-# Useful for running off part of the manual by hand,
-# e.g., make part PART=Label
-@BUILD_DOCS_TRUE@part: $(srcdir)/$(PART)
-@BUILD_DOCS_TRUE@	$(GROFF) -Tps $(GROFF_FLAGS) $(EVERYWHERE) $(srcdir)/$(PART) > $(PART).ps
-
-# Tell versions [3.59,3.63) of GNU make to not export all variables.
-# Otherwise a system limit (for SysV at least) may be exceeded.
-.NOEXPORT:
diff --git a/libXaw/spec/MenuButton b/libXaw/spec/MenuButton
deleted file mode 100644
index 8a4084b1c..000000000
--- a/libXaw/spec/MenuButton
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,215 +0,0 @@
-.\" $Xorg: MenuButton,v 1.3 2000/08/17 19:42:27 cpqbld Exp $
-.NH 2
-MenuButton Widget
-.XS
-	MenuButton Widget
-.XE
-.IN "MenuButton widget" "" "@DEF@"
-.sp
-.Ds 0
-.TA 2.0i
-.ta 2.0i
-Application Header file	<X11/Xaw/MenuButton.h>
-.IN "MenuButton.h" ""
-Class Header file	<X11/Xaw/MenuButtonP.h>
-.IN "MenuButtonP.h" ""
-Class		menuButtonWidgetClass
-.IN "menuButtonWidgetClass" ""
-Class Name	MenuButton
-.IN "MenuButton widget" "class name"
-Superclass	Command
-.De
-.LP
-.sp
-The MenuButton widget is an area, often rectangular,
-that displays a graphic.  The graphic may be a text
-string containing multiple lines of characters in an 8
-bit or 16 bit character set (to be displayed with a
-\fIfont\fP), or in a multi-byte encoding (for use with
-a \fIfontset\fP).  The graphic may also be a bitmap or
-pixmap.
-.LP
-When the pointer cursor is on a MenuButton widget, the
-MenuButton becomes highlighted by drawing a rectangle
-around its perimeter.  This highlighting indicates
-that the MenuButton is ready for selection.  When a
-pointer button is pressed, the MenuButton widget will
-pop up the menu named in the \fBmenuName\fP resource.
-.NH 3
-Resources
-.LP
-When creating a MenuButton widget instance,
-the following resources are retrieved from the argument list
-or from the resource database:
-.LP
-.IN "MenuButton widget" "resources"
-.TS H
-expand;
-lw(1i) lw(1i) lw(1i) lw(.5i) lw(2i).
-_
-.sp 3p
-.TB
-Name	Class	Type	Notes	Default Value
-.sp 3p
-_
-.TH
-.R
-.sp 3p
-accelerators	Accelerators	AcceleratorTable		NULL
-ancestorSensitive	AncestorSensitive	Boolean	D	True
-background	Background	Pixel		XtDefaultBackground
-backgroundPixmap	Pixmap	Pixmap		XtUnspecifiedPixmap
-bitmap	Bitmap	Pixmap		None
-borderColor	BorderColor	Pixel		XtDefaultForeground
-borderPixmap	Pixmap	Pixmap		XtUnspecifiedPixmap
-borderWidth	BorderWidth	Dimension		1
-callback	Callback	XtCallbackList		NULL
-colormap	Colormap	Colormap		Parent's Colormap
-cornerRoundPercent	CornerRoundPercent	Dimension		25
-cursor	Cursor	Cursor		None
-cursorName	Cursor	String		None
-depth	Depth	int	C	Parent's Depth
-destroyCallback	Callback	XtCallbackList		NULL
-encoding	Encoding	UnsignedChar		XawTextEncoding8bit
-font	Font	XFontStruct		XtDefaultFont
-fontSet	FontSet	XFontSet		XtDefaultFontSet
-foreground	Foreground	Pixel		XtDefaultForeground
-height	Height	Dimension	A	graphic height + 2 * \fBinternalHeight\fP
-highlightThickness	Thickness	Dimension	A	2 (0 if Shaped)
-insensitiveBorder	Insensitive	Pixmap		GreyPixmap
-internalHeight	Height	Dimension		2
-internalWidth	Width	Dimension		4
-international	International	Boolean	C	False
-justify	Justify	Justify		XtJustifyCenter (center)
-label	Label	String		name of widget
-leftBitmap	LeftBitmap	Bitmap		None
-mappedWhenManaged	MappedWhenManaged	Boolean		True
-menuName	MenuName	String		"menu"
-pointerColor	Foreground	Pixel		XtDefaultForeground
-pointerColorBackground	Background	Pixel		XtDefaultBackground
-resize	Resize	Boolean		True
-screen	Screen	Screen	R	Parent's Screen
-sensitive	Sensitive	Boolean		True
-shapeStype	ShapeStyle	ShapeStyle		Rectangle
-translations	Translations	TranslationTable		See below
-width	Width	Dimension	A	graphic width + 2 * \fBinternalWidth\fP
-x	Position	Position		0
-y	Position	Position		0
-.sp 3p
-_
-.TE
-.Ac
-.As
-.Bg
-.Gp
-.Bm
-.Bc
-.Bp
-.Bw
-.Cb
-.Cm
-.Cr
-.Cu
-.Cn
-.Dp
-.Dc
-.Lf
-.Ls
-.Lg
-.Hw
-.Ht
-.Ib
-.Ih
-.In
-.Ju
-.La
-.Mm
-.IP \fBmenuName\fP 1.5i
-The name of a popup shell to popup as a menu.  The MenuButton
-will search for this name using \fBXtNameToWidget\fP starting
-with itself as the reference widget.  If the search is
-unsuccessful the widget will continue up the widget tree using
-each of its ancestors as the reference widget passed to
-\fBXtNameToWidget\fP.  If no widget of called \fBmenuName\fP is
-found by this algorithm, the widget will print a warning message
-and give up.  When the menu is found it will be popped up
-exclusive and spring_loaded.  The MenuButton widget does not
-copy the value of this resource into newly allocated memory. The
-application programmer must pass the resource value in
-nonvolatile memory.
-.Pf
-.Pb
-.Re
-.Sc
-.Se
-.Ss
-.Tr
-.Xy
-.NH 3
-MenuButton Actions
-.IN "MenuButton widget" "actions"
-.LP
-The MenuButton widget supports the following actions:
-.IP \(bu 5
-Switching the button between the foreground and background
-colors with \fBset\fP and \fBunset\fP
-.IP \(bu 5
-Processing application callbacks with \fBnotify\fP
-.IP \(bu 5
-Switching the internal border between highlighted
-and unhighlighted states with \fBhighlight\fP and \fBunhighlight\fP
-.IP \(bu 5
-Popping up a menu with \fBPopupMenu\fP
-.LP
-The following are the default translation bindings used by the
-MenuButton widget:
-.LP
-.sp
-.Ds 0
-.TA .5i 2.25i
-.ta .5i 2.25i
-	<EnterWindow>:	highlight(\|)
-	<LeaveWindow>:	reset(\|)
-	<BtnDown>:	reset(\|) PopupMenu(\)
-.De
-.NH 3
-MenuButton Actions
-.LP
-The full list of actions supported by MenuButton is:
-.IP \fBhighlight\fP(\fIcondition\fP) 1.5i
-Displays the internal highlight border in the color (\fBforeground\fP
-or \fBbackground\fP ) that contrasts with the interior color of the
-Command widget.  The conditions \fBWhenUnset\fP and \fBAlways\fP are
-understood by this action procedure.  If no argument is passed,
-\fBWhenUnset\fP is assumed.
-.IP \fBunhighlight\fP(\|) 1.5i
-Displays the internal highlight border in the color (\fBXtNforeground\fP
-or \fBbackground\fP ) that matches the interior color of the
-MenuButton widget.
-.IP \fBset\fP(\|) 1.5i
-Enters the \fIset\fP state, in which \fBnotify\fP is possible.  This
-action causes the button to display its interior in the
-\fBforeground\fP color.  The label or bitmap is displayed in the
-\fBbackground\fP color.
-.IP \fBunset\fP(\|) 1.5i
-Cancels the \fIset\fP state and displays the interior of the button in the
-\fBbackground\fP color.  The label or bitmap is displayed in the
-\fBforeground\fP color.
-.IP \fBreset\fP(\|) 1.5i
-Cancels any \fBset\fP or \fBhighlight\fP and displays the interior of the
-button in the \fBbackground\fP color, with the label displayed in the
-\fBforeground\fP color.
-.IP \fBnotify\fP(\|) 1.5i
-When the button is in the \fBset\fP state this action calls all functions in
-the callback list named by the \fBcallback\fP resource.  The value of
-the call_data argument in these callback functions is undefined.
-.IP \fBPopupMenu\fP(\|) 1.5i
-Pops up the menu specified by the \fBmenuName\fP resource.
-.LP
-The MenuButton widget does not place a server grab on itself.
-Instead, PopupMenu is registered as a grab action.
-As a result, clients which popup menus without using XtMenuPopup
-or MenuPopup or PopupMenu in translations will fail to have a grab active.
-They should make a call to XtRegisterGrabAction on the appropriate action
-in the application initialization routine, or use a different translation.
-.bp
diff --git a/libXaw/spec/Paned b/libXaw/spec/Paned
deleted file mode 100644
index a6b8f0089..000000000
--- a/libXaw/spec/Paned
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,492 +0,0 @@
-.\" $Xorg: Paned,v 1.3 2000/08/17 19:42:27 cpqbld Exp $
-.NH 2
-Paned Widget
-.LP
-.XS
-	Paned Widget
-.XE
-.IN "Paned widget" "" "@DEF@"
-.Ds 0
-.TA 2.0i
-.ta 2.0i
-.sp
-Application Header file	<X11/Xaw/Paned.h>
-.IN "Paned.h" ""
-Class Header file	<X11/Xaw/PanedP.h>
-.IN "PanedP.h" ""
-Class		panedWidgetClass
-.IN "panedWidgetClass" ""
-Class Name	Paned
-.IN "Paned widget" "class name"
-Superclass	Constraint
-.sp
-.De
-.LP
-The Paned widget manages children in a vertically or horizontally
-tiled fashion.  The panes may be dynamically resized by the user by
-using the \fIgrips\fP that appear near the right or bottom edge of the
-border between two panes.
-.LP
-The Paned widget may accept any widget class as a pane \fBexcept\fP
-Grip.  Grip widgets have a special meaning for the Paned widget, and
-adding a Grip as its own pane will confuse the Paned widget.
-.NH 3
-Using the Paned Widget
-.IN "Paned widget" "using"
-.LP
-The grips allow the panes to be resized by the user.  The semantics of
-how these panes resize is somewhat complicated, and warrants further
-explanation here.  When the mouse pointer is positioned on a grip and
-pressed, an arrow is displayed that indicates the pane that is to be to
-be resized.  While keeping the mouse button down, the user can move the
-grip up and down (or left and right).  This, in turn, changes the size
-of the pane.  The size of the Paned widget will not change.   Instead,
-it chooses another pane (or panes) to resize. For more details on which
-pane it chooses to resize, see \fBLayout Semantics\fP.
-.LP
-One pointer binding allows the border between two panes to be moved,
-without affecting any of the other panes.  When this occurs the pointer
-will change to an arrow that points along the pane border.
-.LP
-The default bindings for the Paned widget's grips are:
-.TS H
-lw(1i) lw(2i) lw(2i).
-_
-.sp 3p
-.TB
-Mouse button	Pane to Resize - Vertical	Pane to Resize - Horizontal
-.sp 3p
-_
-.TH
-.R
-.sp 3p
-1 (left)	above the grip	left of the grip
-2 (middle)	adjust border	adjust border
-3 (right)	below the grip	right of the grip
-.sp 3p
-_
-.TE
-.NH 3
-Resources
-.LP
-When creating a Paned widget instance, the following resources are
-retrieved from the argument list or the resource database:
-.LP
-.IN "Paned widget" "resources"
-.TS H
-expand;
-lw(1i) lw(1i) lw(1i) lw(.4i) lw(2i).
-_
-.sp 3p
-.TB
-Name	Class	Type	Notes	Default Value
-.sp 3p
-_
-.TH
-.R
-.sp 3p
-accelerators	Accelerators	AcceleratorTable		NULL
-ancestorSensitive	AncestorSensitive	Boolean	D	True
-background	Background	Pixel		XtDefaultBackground
-backgroundPixmap	Pixmap	Pixmap		XtUnspecifiedPixmap
-betweenCursor	Cursor	Cursor	A	Depends on orientation
-borderColor	BorderColor	Pixel		XtDefaultForeground
-borderPixmap	Pixmap	Pixmap		XtUnspecifiedPixmap
-borderWidth	BorderWidth	Dimension		1
-children	ReadOnly	WidgetList	R	NULL
-colormap	Colormap	Colormap		Parent's Colormap
-cursor	Cursor	Cursor		None
-depth	Depth	int	C	Parent's Depth
-destroyCallback	Callback	XtCallbackList		NULL
-gripCursor	Cursor	Cursor	A	Depends on orientation
-gripIndent	GripIndent	Position		10
-gripTranslations	Translations	TranslationTable		see below
-height	Height	Dimension	A	Depends on orientation
-horizontalBetweenCursor	Cursor	Cursor		sb_up_arrow
-horizontalGripCursor	Cursor	Cursor		sb_h_double_arrow
-internalBorderColor	BorderColor	Pixel		XtDefaultForeground
-internalBorderWidth	BorderWidth	Dimension		1
-leftCursor	Cursor	Cursor		sb_left_arrow
-lowerCursor	Cursor	Cursor		sb_down_arrow
-mappedWhenManaged	MappedWhenManaged	Boolean		True
-numChildren	ReadOnly	Cardinal	R	0
-orientation	Orientation	Orientation		XtorientVertical
-refigureMode	Boolean	Boolean		True
-rightCursor	Cursor	Cursor		sb_right_arrow
-screen	Screen	Screen	R	Parent's Screen
-sensitive	Sensitive	Boolean		True
-translations	Translations	TranslationTable		NULL
-upperCursor	Cursor	Cursor		sb_up_arrow
-verticalBetweenCursor	Cursor	Cursor		sb_left_arrow
-verticalGripCursor	Cursor	Cursor		sb_v_double_arrow
-width	Width	Dimension	A	Depends on orientation
-x	Paned	Position		0
-y	Paned	Position		0
-.sp 3p
-_
-.TE
-.Ac
-.As
-.Bg
-.Gp
-.Bc
-.Bp
-.Bw
-.Ch
-.Cm
-.IP \fBcursor\fP 1.5i
-The cursor to use when the mouse pointer is over the Paned widget, but
-not in any of its children (children may also inherit this cursor).  It
-should be noted that the internal borders are actually part of the Paned
-widget, not the children.
-.Dp
-.Dc
-.IP \fBgripCursor\fP 1.5i
-The cursor to use when the grips are not active.  The default value is
-\fBverticalGripCursor\fP or \fBhorizontalGripCursor\fP depending on
-the orientation of the Paned widget.
-.IP \fBgripIndent\fP 1.5i
-The amount of space left between the right (or bottom) edge of the
-Paned widget and all the grips.
-.IP \fBgripTranslation\fP 1.5i
-Translation table that will be applied to all grips.
-.Hw
-.IP \fBhorizontalBetweenCursor\fP 1.5i
-.br
-.ns
-.IP \fBverticalBetweenCursor\fP 1.5i
-The cursor to be used for the grip when changing the boundary between
-two panes.  These resources allow the cursors to be different
-depending on the orientation of the Paned widget.
-.IP \fBhorizontalGripCursor\fP 1.5i
-.br
-.ns
-.IP \fBverticalGripCursor\fP 1.5i
-The cursor to be used for the grips when they are not active. These
-resources allow the cursors to be different depending on the
-orientation of the Paned widget.
-.IP \fBinternalBorderColor\fP 1.5i
-A pixel value which indexes the widget's colormap to derive the internal
-border color of the widget's window.  The class name of this resource
-allows \fIPaned*BorderColor: blue\fP to set the internal border color
-for the Paned widget.  An optimization is invoked if
-\fBinternalBorderColor\fP and \fBbackground\fP are the same, and the
-internal borders are not drawn.  \fBinternalBorderWidth\fP is still left
-between the panes, however.
-.IP \fBinternalBorderWidth\fP 1.5i
-The width of the internal borders.  This is the amount of space left
-between the panes.  The class name of this resource allows
-\fIPaned*BorderWidth: 3\fP to set the internal border width for the
-Paned widget.
-.IP \fBleftCursor\fP 1.5i
-.br
-.ns
-.IP \fBrightCursor\fP 1.5i
-The cursor used to indicate which is the \fIimportant\fP pane to resize
-when the Paned widget is oriented horizontally.
-.IP \fBlowerCursor\fP 1.5i
-.br
-.ns
-.IP \fBupperCursor\fP 1.5i
-The cursor used to indicate which is the \fIimportant\fP pane to resize
-when the Paned widget is oriented vertically.
-.Mm
-.Nc
-This is not the same as the number of panes, since this also contains a
-grip for some of the panes, use \fBXawPanedGetNumSub\fP to retrieve the
-number of panes.
-.IP \fBorientation\fP 1.5i
-The orientation to stack the panes.  This value can be either
-\fBXtorientVertical\fP or \fBXtorientHorizontal\fP.
-.IN "XtorientVertical" ""
-.IN "XtorientHorizontal" ""
-.IN "conversions" "Orientation"
-.Rs "vertical \fPand\fB horizontal"
-.IP \fBrefigureMode\fP 1.5i
-This resource allows pane layout to be suspended.  If this value is
-\fBFalse\fP, then no layout actions will be taken.  This may improve
-efficiency when adding or removing more than one pane from the Paned
-widget.
-.Sc
-.Se
-.Tr
-.Xy
-.NH 3
-Constraint Resources
-.LP
-.IN "Paned widget" "constraint resources"
-Each child of the Paned widget may request special layout resources
-be applied to it.  These \fIconstraint\fP resources allow the Paned
-widget's children to specify individual layout requirements.
-.LP
-.TS H
-lw(1i) lw(1i) lw(1i) lw(.5i) lw(2i).
-_
-.sp 3p
-.TB
-Name	Class	Type	Notes	Default Value
-.sp 3p
-_
-.TH
-.R
-.sp 3p
-allowResize	Boolean	Boolean		False
-max	Max	Dimension		Infinity
-min	Min	Dimension		Height of Grips
-preferredPaneSize	PreferredPaneSize	Dimension		ask child
-resizeToPreferred	Boolean	Boolean		False
-showGrip	ShowGrip	Boolean		True
-skipAdjust	Boolean	Boolean		False
-.sp 3p
-_
-.TE
-.IP \fBallowResize\fP 1.5i
-If this value is \fBFalse\fP the the Paned widget will disallow all
-geometry requests from this child.
-.IP \fBmax\fP 1.5i
-.br
-.ns
-.IP \fBmin\fP 1.5i
-The absolute maximum or minimum size for this pane.  These values will
-never be overridden by the Paned widget.  This may cause some panes to be
-pushed off the bottom (or right) edge of the paned widget.
-.IP \fBpreferredPaneSize\fP 1.5i
-Normally the paned widget makes a QueryGeometry call on a child to
-determine the preferred size of the child's pane.  There are times
-when the application programmer or the user has a better idea of the
-preferred size of a pane.  Setting this resource causes the value
-passed to be interpreted as the preferred size, in pixels, of this pane.
-.IP \fBresizeToPreferred\fP 1.5i
-Determines whether or not to resize each pane to its preferred size
-when the Paned widget is resized.  See \fBLayout Semantics\fP for details.
-.IP \fBshowGrip\fP 1.5i
-If \fBTrue\fP then a grip will be shown for this pane.  The grip
-associated with a pane is either below or to the right of the pane.  No
-grip is ever shown for the last pane.
-.IP \fBskipAdjust\fP 1.5i
-This resource is used to determine which pane is forced to be resized.
-Setting this value to \fBTrue\fP makes this pane less likely to be
-forced to be resized.  See \fBLayout Semantics\fP for details.
-.NH 3
-Layout Semantics
-.LP
-.IN "Paned widget" "layout semantics"
-In order to make effective use of the Paned widget it is helpful to know
-the rules it uses to determine which child will be resized in any given
-situation.  There are three rules used to determine which child is
-resized.  While these rules are always the same, the panes that are
-searched can change depending upon what caused the relayout.
-.LP
-.sp
-\fBLayout Rules\fP
-.IP \fB1\fP .5i
-Do not let a pane grow larger than its \fBmax\fP or smaller than its
-\fBmin\fP.
-.IP \fB2\fP .5i
-Do not adjust panes with \fBskipAdjust\fP set.
-.IP \fB3\fP .5i
-Do not adjust panes away from their preferred size, although moving one
-closer to its preferred size is fine.
-.LP
-When searching the children the Paned widget looks for panes that
-satisfy all the rules, and if unsuccessful then it eliminates rule 3
-and then 2.  Rule 1 is always enforced.
-.LP
-If the relayout is due to a resize or change in management then the
-panes are searched from bottom to top.  If the relayout is due to grip
-movement then they are searched from the grip selected in the direction
-opposite the pane selected.
-.NH 4
-Resizing Panes from a Grip Action
-.LP
-The pane above the grip is resized by invoking the GripAction with
-\fBUpLeftPane\fP specified.  The panes below the grip are each checked
-against all rules, then rules 2 and 1 and finally against rule 1 only.
-No pane above the chosen pane will ever be resized.
-.LP
-The pane below the grip is resized by invoking the GripAction with
-\fBLowRightPane\fP specified.  The panes above the grip are each
-checked in this case.  No pane below the chosen pane will ever be resized.
-.LP
-Invoking GripAction with \fBThisBorderOnly\fP specified just moves the
-border between the panes.  No other panes are ever resized.
-.NH 4
-Resizing Panes after the Paned widget is resized.
-.LP
-When the Pane widget is resized it must determine a new size for each
-pane.  There are two methods of doing this.  The Paned widget can either
-give each pane its preferred size and then resize the panes to fit, or
-it can use the current sizes and then resize the panes to fit.  The
-\fBresizeToPreferred\fP resource allows the application to tell the
-Paned widget whether to query the child about its preferred size
-(subject to the the \fBpreferredPaneSize\fP) or to use the current size
-when refiguring the pane locations after the pane has been resized.
-.LP
-There is one special case.  All panes assume they should resize to
-their preferred size until the Paned widget becomes visible to the user.
-.NH 4
-Managing Children and Geometry Management
-.LP
-The Paned widget always resizes its children to their preferred sizes when
-a new child is managed, or a geometry management request is honored.
-The Paned widget will first attempt to resize itself to contain its
-panes exactly.  If this is not possible then it will hunt through the
-children, from bottom to top (right to left), for a pane to resize.
-.NH 4
-Special Considerations
-.LP
-When a user resizes a pane with the grips, the Paned widget assumes that
-this new size is the preferred size of the pane.
-.NH 3
-Grip Translations
-.LP
-The Paned widget has no action routines of its own, as all actions are
-handled through the grips.  The grips are each assigned a default
-Translation table.
-.LP
-.sp
-.Ds 0
-.TA .5i 2.25i
-.ta .5i 2.25i
-	<Btn1Down>:	GripAction(Start, UpLeftPane)
-.IN "GripAction" ""
-	<Btn2Down>:	GripAction(Start, ThisBorderOnly)
-	<Btn3Down>:	GripAction(Start, LowRightPane)
-	<Btn1Motion>:	GripAction(Move, UpLeftPane)
-	<Btn2Motion>:	GripAction(Move, ThisBorderOnly)
-	<Btn3Motion>:	GripAction(Move, LowRightPane)
-	Any<BtnUp>:	GripAction(Commit)
-.De
-.sp
-.LP
-The Paned widget interprets the \fBGripAction\fP as taking two arguments.
-.IN "GripAction" ""
-The first argument may be any of the following:
-.IP \fBStart\fP 1i
-Sets up the Paned widget for resizing and changes the cursor of the
-grip.  The second argument determines which pane will be resized, and
-can take on any of the three values shown above.
-.IP \fBMove\fP 1i
-The internal borders are drawn over the current pane locations to
-animate where the borders would actually be placed if you were to move
-this border as shown.  The second argument must match the second argument
-that was passed to the \fBStart\fP action, that began this process.  If
-these arguments are not passed, the behavior is undefined.
-.IP \fBCommit\fP 1i
-This argument causes the Paned widget to commit the changes selected
-by the previously started action.  The cursor is changed back to the
-grip's inactive cursor.  No second argument is needed in this case.
-.NH 3
-Convenience Routines
-.LP
-.IN "Paned widget" "enable pane resizing"
-.IN "Paned widget" "disable pane resizing"
-To enable or disable a child's request for pane resizing,
-use
-.PN XawPanedAllowResize :
-.IN "XawPanedAllowResize" "" "@DEF@"
-.FD 0
-void XawPanedAllowResize(\fIw\fP, \fIallow_resize\fP)
-.br
-     Widget \fIw\fP;
-.br
-     Boolean \fIallow_resize\fP;
-.FN
-.IP \fIw\fP 1i
-Specifies the child pane.
-.IP \fIallow_resize\fP
-Specifies whether or not resizing requests for this child will be
-granted by the Paned widget.
-.LP
-If allow_resize is \fBTrue\fP, the Paned widget allows geometry
-requests from the child to change the pane's height. If allow_resize
-is \fBFalse\fP, the Paned widget ignores geometry requests from the
-child to change the pane's height. The default state is \fBTrue\fP
-before the Pane is realized and \fBFalse\fP after it is realized.
-This procedure is equivalent to changing the \fBallowResize\fP
-constraint resource for the child.
-.LP
-.sp
-.IN "Paned widget" "change height settings"
-To change the minimum and maximum height settings for a pane, use
-.PN XawPanedSetMinMax :
-.IN "XawPanedSetMinMax" "" "@DEF@"
-.FD 0
-void XawPanedSetMinMax(\fIw\fP, \fImin\fP, \fImax\fP)
-.br
-     Widget \fIw\fP;
-.br
-     int \fImin\fP, \fImax\fP;
-.FN
-.IP \fIw\fP 1i
-Specifies the child pane.
-.IP \fImin\fP 1i
-Specifies the new minimum height of the child, expressed in pixels.
-.IP \fImax\fP 1i
-Specifies new maximum height of the child, expressed in pixels.
-.LP
-This procedure is equivalent to setting the \fBmin\fP and \fBmax\fP
-constraint resources for the child.
-.LP
-.sp
-.IN "Paned widget" "get height settings"
-To retrieve the minimum and maximum height settings for a pane, use
-.PN XawPanedGetMinMax :
-.IN "XawPanedGetMinMax" "" "@DEF@"
-.FD 0
-void XawPanedGetMinMax(\fIw\fP, \fImin_return\fP, \fImax_return\fP)
-.br
-     Widget \fIw\fP;
-.br
-     int \fI*min_return\fP, \fI*max_return\fP;
-.FN
-.IP \fIw\fP 1i
-Specifies the child pane.
-.IP \fImin_return\fP 1i
-Returns the minimum height of the child, expressed in pixels.
-.IP \fImax_return\fP 1i
-Returns the maximum height of the child, expressed in pixels.
-.LP
-This procedure is equivalent to getting the \fBmin\fP and \fBmax\fP
-resources for this child child.
-.LP
-.sp
-.IN "Paned widget" "enable auto-reconfiguring"
-.IN "Paned widget" "disable auto-reconfiguring"
-To enable or disable automatic recalculation of pane sizes and positions,
-use
-.PN XawPanedSetRefigureMode :
-.IN "XawPanedSetRefigureMode" "" "@DEF@"
-.FD 0
-void XawPanedSetRefigureMode(\fIw\fP, \fImode\fP)
-.br
-     Widget \fIw\fP;
-.br
-     Boolean \fImode\fP;
-.FN
-.IP \fIw\fP 1i
-Specifies the Paned widget.
-.IP \fImode\fP 1i
-Specifies whether the layout of the Paned widget is enabled (\fBTrue\fP)
-or disabled (\fBFalse\fP).
-.LP
-When making several changes to the children of a Paned widget
-after the Paned has been realized, it is a good idea to disable
-relayout until after all changes have been made.
-.LP
-.sp
-.IN "Paned widget" "getting the number of children"
-To retrieve the number of panes in a paned widget use
-\fBXawPanedGetNumSub\fP:
-.IN "XawPanedGetNumSub" "" "@DEF@"
-.FD 0
-int XawPanedGetNumSub(\fIw\fP)
-.br
-     Widget \fIw\fP;
-.FN
-.IP \fIw\fP 1i
-Specifies the Paned widget.
-.LP
-This function returns the number of panes in the Paned widget.  This is
-\fBnot\fP the same as the number of children, since the grips are also
-children of the Paned widget.
diff --git a/libXaw/spec/Panner b/libXaw/spec/Panner
deleted file mode 100644
index 1bb11b5fd..000000000
--- a/libXaw/spec/Panner
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,247 +0,0 @@
-.\" $Xorg: Panner,v 1.3 2000/08/17 19:42:27 cpqbld Exp $
-.NH 2
-Panner Widget
-.LP
-.XS
-	Panner Widget
-.XE
-.IN "Panner widget" "" "@DEF@"
-.Ds 0
-.TA 2.0i
-.ta 2.0i
-.sp
-Application header file	<X11/Xaw/Panner.h>
-.IN "Panner.h" ""
-Class header file	<X11/Xaw/PannerP.h>
-.IN "PannerP.h" ""
-Class		pannerWidgetClass
-.IN "pannerWidgetClass" ""
-Class Name	Panner
-.IN "Panner widget" "class name"
-Superclass	Simple
-.sp
-.De
-.LP
-A Panner widget is a rectangle, called the
-``canvas,'' on which another rectangle, the ``slider,'' moves in two
-dimensions.  It is often used with a Porthole widget to move, or
-``scroll,'' a third widget in two dimensions, in which case the
-slider's size and position gives feedback as to what portion of
-the third widget is visible.
-.LP
-The slider may be scrolled around the canvas by pressing,
-dragging, and releasing Button1; the default translation also
-enables scrolling via arrow keys and some other keys.  While
-scrolling is in progress, the application receives notification
-through callback procedures.  Notification may be done either
-continuously whenever the slider moves or discretely whenever the
-slider has been given a new location.
-.NH 3
-Resources
-.LP
-When creating a Panner widget instance, the following resources are
-retrieved from the argument list or from the resource database:
-.LP
-.IN "Panner widget" "resources"
-.TS H
-expand;
-lw(1i) lw(1i) lw(1i) lw(.5i) lw(2i).
-_
-.sp 3p
-.TB
-Name	Class	Type	Notes	Default Value
-.sp 3p
-_
-.TH
-.R
-.sp 3p
-accelerators	Accelerators	AcceleratorTable		NULL
-allowOff	AllowOff	Boolean		False
-ancestorSensitive	AncestorSensitive	Boolean	D	True
-background	Background	Pixel		XtDefaultBackground
-backgroundPixmap	Pixmap	Pixmap		XtUnspecifiedPixmap
-backgroundStipple	BackgroundStipple	String		NULL
-borderColor	BorderColor	Pixel		XtDefaultForeground
-borderPixmap	Pixmap	Pixmap		XtUnspecifiedPixmap
-borderWidth	BorderWidth	Dimension		1
-canvasHeight	CanvasHeight	Dimension		0
-canvasWidth	CanvasWidth	Dimension		0
-colormap	Colormap	Colormap		Parent's Colormap
-cursor	Cursor	Cursor		None
-cursorName	Cursor	String		NULL
-defaultScale	DefaultScale	Dimension		8
-depth	Depth	int	C	Parent's Depth
-destroyCallback	Callback	XtCallbackList		NULL
-foreground	Foreground	Pixel		XtDefaultForeground
-height	Height	Dimension	A	depends on orientation
-internalSpace	InternalSpace	Dimension		4
-international	International	Boolean	C	False
-lineWidth	LineWidth	Dimension		0
-mappedWhenManaged	MappedWhenManaged	Boolean		True
-pointerColor	Foreground	Pixel		XtDefaultForeground
-pointerColorBackground	Background	Pixel		XtDefaultBackground
-reportCallback	ReportCallback	Callback		NULL
-resize	Resize	Boolean		True
-rubberBand	RubberBand	Boolean		False
-screen	Screen	Screen	R	Parent's Screen
-sensitive	Sensitive	Boolean		True
-shadowColor	ShadowColor	Pixel		XtDefaultForeground
-shadowThickness	ShadowThickness	Dimension		2
-sliderX	SliderX	Position		0
-sliderY	SliderY	Position		0
-sliderHeight	SliderHeight	Dimension		0
-sliderWidth	SliderWidth	Dimension		0
-translations	Translations	TranslationTable		See below
-width	Width	Dimension	A	depends on orientation
-x	Position	Position		0
-y	Position	Position		0
-.sp 3p
-_
-.TE
-.Ac
-.IP \fBallowOff\fP 1.5i
-Whether to allow the edges of the slider to go off the edges of the canvas.
-.As
-.Bg
-.Gp
-.IP \fBbackgroundStipple\fP 1.5i
-The name of a bitmap pattern to be used as the background for
-the area representing the canvas.
-.Bc
-.Bp
-.Bw
-.IP \fBcanvasHeight\fP 1.5i
-.br
-.ns
-.IP \fBcanvasWidth\fP 1.5i
-The size of the canvas.
-.Cm
-.Cu
-.Cn
-.IP \fBdefaultScale\fP 1.5i
-The percentage size that the Panner widget should have relative
-to the size of the canvas.
-.Dp
-.Dc
-.IP \fBforeground\fP 1.5i
-A pixel value which indexes the widget's colormap to derive the color
-used to draw the slider.
-.Hw
-.IP \fBinternalSpace\fP 1.5i
-The width of internal border in pixels between a slider representing the
-full size of the canvas
-and the edge of the Panner widget.
-.Ix
-.IP \fBlineWidth\fP 1.5i
-The width of the lines in the rubberbanding rectangle when rubberbanding
-is in effect instead of continuous scrolling.  The default is 0.
-.Mm
-.Pf
-.Pb
-.IP \fBreportCallback\fP 1.5i
-All functions on this callback list are called when the
-\fBnotify\fP action is invoked.  See the \fBPanner Actions\fP section
-for details.
-.IP \fBresize\fP 1.5i
-Whether or not to resize the panner whenever the canvas size is changed so
-that the \fBdefaultScale\fP is maintained.
-.IP \fBrubberBand\fP 1.5i
-Whether or not scrolling should be discrete (only moving a rubberbanded
-rectangle until the scrolling is done) or continuous (moving the slider
-itself).  This controls whether or not the \fBmove\fP action procedure also
-invokes the \fBnotify\fP action procedure.
-.Sc
-.Se
-.IP \fBshadowColor\fP 1.5i
-The color of the shadow underneath the slider.
-.IP \fBshadowThickness\fP 1.5i
-The width of the shadow underneath the slider.
-.IP \fBsliderX\fP 1.5i
-.br
-.ns
-.IP \fBsliderY\fP 1.5i
-The location of the slider in the coordinates of the canvas.
-.IP \fBsliderHeight\fP 1.5i
-.br
-.ns
-.IP \fBsliderWidth\fP 1.5i
-The size of the slider.
-.Tr
-.Xy
-.NH 3
-Panner Actions
-.IN "Panner widget" "actions"
-.LP
-The actions supported by the Panner widget are:
-.IP \fBstart\fP() 1.5i
-This action begins movement of the slider.
-.IP \fBstop\fP() 1.5i
-This action ends movement of the slider.
-.IP \fBabort\fP() 1.5i
-This action ends movement of the slider and restores it to the position it
-held when the \fBstart\fP action was invoked.
-.IP \fBmove\fP() 1.5i
-This action moves the outline of the slider (if the \fBrubberBand\fP resource
-is True) or the slider itself (by invoking the \fBnotify\fP
-action procedure).
-.IP \fBpage\fP(\fIxamount\fP,\fIyamount\fP) 1.5i
-This action moves the slider by the specified amounts.  The format
-for the amounts is a signed or unsigned floating-point number (e.g., +1.0
-or \-.5) followed
-by either \fBp\fP indicating pages (slider sizes), or \fBc\fP indicating
-canvas sizes.  Thus, \fIpage(+0,+.5p)\fP represents vertical movement down
-one-half the height of the slider and \fIpage(0,0)\fP represents moving to
-the upper left corner of the canvas.
-.IP \fBnotify\fP() 1.5i
-This action informs the application of the slider's current position by
-invoking the \fBreportCallback\fP functions registered by the application.
-.IP \fBset\fP(\fIwhat\fP,\fIvalue\fP) 1.5i
-This action changes the behavior of the Panner.  The \fIwhat\fP argument
-must currently be the string \fBrubberband\fP and controls the value of
-the \fBrubberBand\fP resource.  The \fIvalue\fP argument
-may have one of the values \fBon\fP, \fBoff\fP, or \fBtoggle\fP.
-.LP
-.sp
-The default bindings for Panner are:
-.IN "Panner widget" "default translation table"
-.LP
-.Ds 0
-.TA .5i 1.75i
-.ta .5i 1.75i
-	<Btn1Down>:	start(\|)
-	<Btn1Motion>:	move(\|)
-	<Btn1Up>:	notify(\|) stop(\|)
-	<Btn2Down>:	abort(\|)
-	<Key>KP_Enter:	set(rubberband,toggle)
-	<Key>space:	page(+1p,+1p)
-	<Key>Delete:	page(\-1p,\-1p)
-	<Key>BackSpace:	page(\-1p,\-1p)
-	<Key>Left:	page(\-.5p,+0)
-	<Key>Right:	page(+.5p,+0)
-	<Key>Up:	page(+0,\-.5p)
-	<Key>Down:	page(+0,+.5p)
-	<Key>Home:	page(0,0)
-.De
-.NH 3
-Panner Callbacks
-.IN "Panner widget" "callbacks"
-.LP
-The functions registered on the \fBreportCallback\fP list are invoked by
-the \fBnotify\fP action as follows:
-.IN "ReportProc" "" "@DEF@"
-.FD 0
-void ReportProc(\fIpanner\fP, \fIclient_data\fP, \fIreport\fP)
-.br
-	Widget \fIpanner\fP;
-.br
-	XtPointer \fIclient_data\fP;
-.br
-	XtPointer \fIreport\fP;    /* (XawPannerReport *) */
-.FN
-.IP \fIpanner\fP 1i
-Specifies the Panner widget.
-.IP \fIclient_data\fP 1i
-Specifies the client data.
-.IP \fIreport\fP 1i
-Specifies a pointer to an \fBXawPannerReport\fP structure containing
-the location and size of the slider and the size of the canvas.
diff --git a/libXaw/spec/Porthole b/libXaw/spec/Porthole
deleted file mode 100644
index 4d4104aa0..000000000
--- a/libXaw/spec/Porthole
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,125 +0,0 @@
-.\" $Xorg: Porthole,v 1.3 2000/08/17 19:42:27 cpqbld Exp $
-.NH 2
-Porthole Widget
-.LP
-.XS
-	Porthole Widget
-.XE
-.IN "Porthole widget" "" "@DEF@"
-.Ds 0
-.TA 2.0i
-.ta 2.0i
-.sp
-Application Header file	<X11/Xaw/Porthole.h>
-.IN "Porthole.h" ""
-Class Header file	<X11/Xaw/PortholeP.h>
-.IN "PortholeP.h" ""
-Class		portholeWidgetClass
-.IN "portholeWidgetClass" ""
-Class Name	Porthole
-.IN "Porthole widget" "class name"
-Superclass	Composite
-.sp
-.De
-.LP
-The Porthole widget provides geometry management of a list of arbitrary
-widgets, only one of which may be managed at any particular time.
-The managed child widget is reparented within the porthole and is moved around
-by the application (typically under the control of a Panner widget).
-.NH 3
-Resources
-.LP
-When creating a Porthole widget instance, the following resources are
-retrieved from the argument list or from the resource database:
-.LP
-.IN "Porthole widget" "resources"
-.TS H
-expand;
-lw(1i) lw(1i) lw(1i) lw(.5i) lw(2i).
-_
-.sp 3p
-.TB
-Name	Class	Type	Notes	Default Value
-.sp 3p
-_
-.TH
-.R
-.sp 3p
-accelerators	Accelerators	AcceleratorTable		NULL
-ancestorSensitive	AncestorSensitive	Boolean	D	True
-background	Background	Pixel		XtDefaultBackground
-backgroundPixmap	Pixmap	Pixmap		XtUnspecifiedPixmap
-borderColor	BorderColor	Pixel		XtDefaultForeground
-borderPixmap	Pixmap	Pixmap		XtUnspecifiedPixmap
-borderWidth	BorderWidth	Dimension		1
-children	ReadOnly	WidgetList	R	NULL
-colormap	Colormap	Colormap		Parent's Colormap
-depth	Depth	int	C	Parent's Depth
-destroyCallback	Callback	XtCallbackList		NULL
-height	Height	Dimension	A	see \fBLayout Semantics\fP
-mappedWhenManaged	MappedWhenManaged	Boolean		True
-numChildren	ReadOnly	Cardinal	R	0
-reportCallback	ReportCallback	Callback		NULL
-screen	Screen	Screen	R	Parent's Screen
-sensitive	Sensitive	Boolean		True
-translations	Translations	TranslationTable		NULL
-width	Width	Dimension	A	see \fBLayout Semantics\fP
-x	Position	Position		0
-y	Position	Position		0
-.sp 3p
-_
-.TE
-.Ac
-.As
-.Bg
-.Gp
-.Bc
-.Bp
-.Bw
-.Ch
-.Cm
-.Dp
-.Dc
-.Hw
-.Mm
-.Nc
-.IP \fBreportCallback\fP 1.5i
-A list of functions to invoke whenever the managed child widget changes
-size or position.
-.Sc
-.Se
-.Tr
-.Xy
-.NH 3
-Layout Semantics
-.IN "Porthole widget" "layout semantics"
-.LP
-The Porthole widget allows its managed child to request any size
-that is as large
-or larger than the Porthole itself and any location so long as the child
-still obscures all of the Porthole.  This widget typically is used with a
-Panner widget.
-.NH 3
-Porthole Callbacks
-.IN "Porthole widget" "callbacks"
-.LP
-The functions registered on the \fBreportCallback\fP list are invoked whenever
-the managed child changes size or position:
-.IN "ReportProc" "" "@DEF@"
-.FD 0
-void ReportProc(\fIporthole\fP, \fIclient_data\fP, \fIreport\fP)
-.br
-	Widget \fIporthole\fP;
-.br
-	XtPointer \fIclient_data\fP;
-.br
-	XtPointer \fIreport\fP;    /* (XawPannerReport *) */
-.FN
-.IP \fIporthole\fP 1i
-Specifies the Porthole widget.
-.IP \fIclient_data\fP 1i
-Specifies the client data.
-.IP \fIreport\fP 1i
-Specifies a pointer to an \fBXawPannerReport\fP structure containing
-the location and size of the slider and the size of the canvas.
-
diff --git a/libXaw/spec/Repeater b/libXaw/spec/Repeater
deleted file mode 100644
index 93872939c..000000000
--- a/libXaw/spec/Repeater
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,184 +0,0 @@
-.\" $Xorg: Repeater,v 1.3 2000/08/17 19:42:27 cpqbld Exp $
-.NH 2
-Repeater Widget
-.XS
-	Repeater Widget
-.XE
-.IN "Repeater widget" "" "@DEF@"
-.Ds 0
-.TA 2.0i
-.ta 2.0i
-.sp
-Application header file	<X11/Xaw/Repeater.h>
-.IN "Repeater.h" ""
-Class header file	<X11/Xaw/RepeaterP.h>
-.IN "RepeaterP.h" ""
-Class	repeaterWidgetClass
-.IN "repeaterWidgetClass" ""
-Class Name	Repeater
-.IN "Repeater widget" "class name"
-Superclass	Command
-.sp
-.De
-.LP
-The Repeater widget is a subclass of the Command widget; see the
-Command documentation for details.  The difference is that the Repeater can call its
-registered callbacks repeatedly, at an increasing rate.  The default translation
-does so for the duration the user holds down pointer button 1 while the pointer
-is on the Repeater.
-.NH 3
-Resources
-.LP
-When creating a Repeater widget instance, the following resources are
-retrieved from the argument list or from the resource database:
-.LP
-.IN "Repeater widget" "resources"
-.TS H
-expand;
-lw(1i) lw(1i) lw(1i) lw(.5i) lw(2i).
-_
-.sp 3p
-.TB
-Name	Class	Type	Notes	Default Value
-.sp 3p
-_
-.TH
-.R
-.sp 3p
-accelerators	Accelerators	AcceleratorTable		NULL
-ancestorSensitive	AncestorSensitive	Boolean	D	True
-background	Background	Pixel		XtDefaultBackground
-backgroundPixmap	Pixmap	Pixmap		XtUnspecifiedPixmap
-bitmap	Bitmap	Pixmap		None
-borderColor	BorderColor	Pixel		XtDefaultForeground
-borderPixmap	Pixmap	Pixmap		XtUnspecifiedPixmap
-borderWidth	BorderWidth	Dimension		1
-callback	Callback	XtCallbackList		NULL
-colormap	Colormap	Colormap		Parent's Colormap
-cornerRoundPercent	CornerRoundPercent	Dimension		25
-cursor	Cursor	Cursor		None
-cursorName	Cursor	String		NULL
-decay	Decay	Int		5
-depth	Depth	int	C	Parent's Depth
-destroyCallback	Callback	XtCallbackList		NULL
-encoding	Encoding	UnsignedChar		XawTextEncoding8bit
-flash	Boolean	Boolean		False
-font	Font	XFontStruct		XtDefaultFont
-fontSet	FontSet	XFontSet		XtDefaultFontSet
-foreground	Foreground	Pixel		XtDefaultForeground
-height	Height	Dimension	A	graphic height + 2 * \fBinternalHeight\fP
-highlightThickness	Thickness	Dimension	A	2 (0 if Shaped)
-initialDelay	Delay	Int		200
-insensitiveBorder	Insensitive	Pixmap		GreyPixmap
-internalHeight	Height	Dimension		2
-internalWidth	Width	Dimension		4
-international	International	Boolean	C	False
-justify	Justify	Justify		XtJustifyCenter (center)
-label	Label	String		name of widget
-leftBitmap	LeftBitmap	Bitmap		None
-mappedWhenManaged	MappedWhenManaged	Boolean		True
-minimumDelay	MinimumDelay	Int		10
-pointerColor	Foreground	Pixel		XtDefaultForeground
-pointerColorBackground	Background	Pixel		XtDefaultBackground
-repeatDelay	Delay	Int		50
-resize	Resize	Boolean		True
-screen	Screen	Pointer	R	Parent's Screen
-sensitive	Sensitive	Boolean		True
-shapeStyle	ShapeStyle	ShapeStyle		Rectangle
-startCallback	StartCallback	Callback		NULL
-stopCallback	StopCallback	Callback		NULL
-translations	Translations	TranslationTable		See below
-width	Width	Dimension	A	graphic width + 2 * \fBinternalWidth\fP
-x	Position	Position		0
-y	Position	Position		0
-.sp 3p
-_
-.TE
-\" Resource Descriptions
-.Ac
-.As
-.Bg
-.Gp
-.Bm
-.Bc
-.Bp
-.Bw
-.Cb
-.Cm
-.Cr
-.Cu
-.Cn
-.IP \fBdecay\fP 1.5i
-The number of milliseconds that should be subtracted from each succeeding
-interval while the Repeater button is being held down until the interval
-has reached \fBminimumDelay\fP milliseconds.
-.Dp
-.Dc
-.Le
-.IP \fBflash\fP 1.5i
-Whether or not to flash the Repeater button whenever the timer goes off.
-.Lf
-.Ls
-.Lg
-.Hw
-.Ht
-.IP \fBinitialDelay\fP 1.5i
-The number of milliseconds between the beginning of the Repeater button
-being held down and the first invocation of the \fBcallback\fP function.
-.Ib
-.Ih
-.In
-.Ju
-.La
-.Ll
-.Mm
-.IP \fBminimumDelay\fP 1.5i
-The minimum time between callbacks in milliseconds.
-.Pf
-.Pb
-.IP \fBrepeatDelay\fP 1.5i
-The number of milliseconds between each callback after the first (minus an
-increasing number of \fBdecay\fPs).
-.Re
-.Sc
-.Se
-.Ss
-.IP \fBstartCallback\fP 1.5i
-The list of functions to invoke by the \fBstart\fP action (typically
-when the Repeater button is first pressed).  The callback data parameter
-is set to NULL.
-.IP \fBstopCallback\fP 1.5i
-The list of functions to invoke by the \fBstop\fP action (typically
-when the Repeater button is released).  The callback data parameter
-is set to NULL.
-.Tr
-.Xy
-.NH 3
-Repeater Actions
-.IN "Repeater widget" "actions"
-.LP
-The Repeater widget supports the following actions beyond those of the Command
-button:
-.IP \fBstart\fP() 1.5i
-This invokes the functions on the \fBstartCallback\fP and \fBcallback\fP lists
-and sets a timer to go off in \fBinitialDelay\fP milliseconds.  The timer
-will cause the \fBcallback\fP functions to be invoked with increasing
-frequency until the \fBstop\fP action occurs.
-.IP \fBstop\fP() 1.5i
-This invokes the functions on the \fBstopCallback\fP list and prevents any
-further timers from occuring until the next \fBstart\fP action.
-.LP
-.sp
-.IN "Repeater widget" "translation bindings"
-The following are the default translation bindings used by the
-Repeater widget:
-.LP
-.Ds 0
-.TA .5i 2.25i
-.ta .5i 2.25i
-	<EnterWindow>:	highlight(\|)
-	<LeaveWindow>:	unhighlight(\|)
-	<Btn1Down>:	set(\|) start(\|)
-	<Btn1Up>:	stop(\|) unset(\|)
-.De
-.LP
diff --git a/libXaw/spec/Scrollbar b/libXaw/spec/Scrollbar
deleted file mode 100644
index faf693a3b..000000000
--- a/libXaw/spec/Scrollbar
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,386 +0,0 @@
-.\" $Xorg: Scrollbar,v 1.3 2000/08/17 19:42:27 cpqbld Exp $
-.NH 2
-Scrollbar Widget
-.LP
-.XS
-	Scrollbar Widget
-.XE
-.IN "Scrollbar widget" "" "@DEF@"
-.Ds 0
-.TA 2.0i
-.ta 2.0i
-.sp
-Application header file	<X11/Xaw/Scrollbar.h>
-.IN "Scrollbar.h" ""
-Class header file	<X11/Xaw/ScrollbarP.h>
-.IN "ScrollbarP.h" ""
-Class		scrollbarWidgetClass
-.IN "scrollbarWidgetClass" ""
-Class Name	Scrollbar
-.IN "Scrollbar widget" "class name"
-Superclass	Simple
-.sp
-.De
-.LP
-A Scrollbar widget is a rectangle, called the ``canvas,'' on
-which another rectangle, the ``thumb,'' moves in one
-dimension, either vertically or horizontally.  A Scrollbar
-can be used alone, as a value generator, or it can be used
-within a composite widget (for example, a Viewport).  When a
-Scrollbar is used to move, or ``scroll,'' the contents of
-another widget, the size and the position of the thumb usually give
-feedback as to what portion of the other widget's contents
-are visible.
-.LP
-Each pointer button invokes a specific action.  Pointer
-buttons 1 and 3 do not move the thumb automatically.
-Instead, they return the pixel position of the cursor on the
-scroll region.  When pointer button 2 is clicked, the thumb
-moves to the current pointer position.  When pointer button
-2 is held down and the pointer is moved, the thumb follows
-the pointer.
-.LP
-The pointer cursor in the scroll region changes depending on the current
-action.  When no pointer button is pressed, the cursor appears as a
-double-headed arrow that points in the direction that scrolling can
-occur.  When pointer button 1 or 3 is pressed, the cursor appears as a
-single-headed arrow that points in the logical direction that the thumb
-will move.  When pointer button 2 is pressed, the cursor
-appears as an arrow that points to the top or the left of the thumb.
-.LP
-When the user scrolls, the application receives notification
-through callback procedures.  For both discrete scrolling actions, the
-callback returns the Scrollbar widget, the client_data, and the pixel
-position of the pointer when the button was released.  For continuous
-scrolling, the callback routine returns the scroll bar widget, the
-client data, and the current relative position of the thumb.  When the
-thumb is moved using pointer button 2, the callback procedure is invoked
-continuously.  When either button 1 or 3 is pressed, the callback
-procedure is invoked only when the button is released and the client
-callback procedure is responsible for moving the thumb.
-.NH 3
-Resources
-.LP
-When creating a Scrollbar widget instance, the following resources are
-retrieved from the argument list or from the resource database:
-.LP
-.IN "Scrollbar widget" "resources"
-.TS H
-expand;
-lw(1i) lw(1i) lw(1i) lw(.5i) lw(2i).
-_
-.sp 3p
-.TB
-Name	Class	Type	Notes	Default Value
-.sp 3p
-_
-.TH
-.R
-.sp 3p
-accelerators	Accelerators	AcceleratorTable		NULL
-ancestorSensitive	AncestorSensitive	Boolean	D	True
-background	Background	Pixel		XtDefaultBackground
-backgroundPixmap	Pixmap	Pixmap		XtUnspecifiedPixmap
-borderColor	BorderColor	Pixel		XtDefaultForeground
-borderPixmap	Pixmap	Pixmap		XtUnspecifiedPixmap
-borderWidth	BorderWidth	Dimension		1
-colormap	Colormap	Colormap		parent's Colormap
-cursor	Cursor	Cursor		None
-cursorName	Cursor	String		NULL
-depth	Depth	int	C	parent's Depth
-destroyCallback	Callback	XtCallbackList		NULL
-foreground	Foreground	Pixel		XtDefaultForeground
-height	Height	Dimension	A	depends on orientation
-insensitiveBorder	Insensitive	Pixmap		GreyPixmap
-international	International	Boolean	C	False
-jumpProc	Callback	XtCallbackList		NULL
-length	Length	Dimension		1
-mappedWhenManaged	MappedWhenManaged	Boolean		True
-minimumThumb	MinimumThumb	Dimension		7
-orientation	Orientation	Orientation		XtorientVertical (vertical)
-pointerColor	Foreground	Pixel		XtDefaultForeground
-pointerColorBackground	Background	Pixel		XtDefaultBackground
-screen	Screen	Screen	R	parent's Screen
-scrollDCursor	Cursor	Cursor		XC_sb_down_arrow
-scrollHCursor	Cursor	Cursor		XC_sb_h_double_arrow
-scrollLCursor	Cursor	Cursor		XC_sb_left_arrow
-scrollProc	Callback	XtCallbackList		NULL
-scrollRCursor	Cursor	Cursor		XC_sb_right_arrow
-scrollUCursor	Cursor	Cursor		XC_sb_up_arrow
-scrollVCursor	Cursor	Cursor		XC_sb_v_arrow
-sensitive	Sensitive	Boolean		True
-shown	Shown	Float		0.0
-thickness	Thickness	Dimension		14
-thumb	Thumb	Bitmap		GreyPixmap
-thumbProc	Callback	XtCallbackList		NULL
-topOfThumb	TopOfThumb	Float		0.0
-translations	Translations	TranslationTable		See below
-width	Width	Dimension	A	depends on orientation
-x	Position	Position		0
-y	Position	Position		0
-.sp 3p
-_
-.TE
-.Ac
-.As
-.Bg
-.Gp
-.Bc
-.Bp
-.Bw
-.Cm
-.Cu
-.Cn
-.Dp
-.Dc
-.IP \fBforeground\fP 1.5i
-A pixel value which indexes the widget's colormap to derive the color
-used to draw the thumb.
-.Hw
-.Ib
-.Ix
-.IP \fBjumpProc\fP 1.5i
-All functions on this callback list are called when the
-\fBNotifyThumb\fP action is invoked.  See the \fBScrollbar
-Actions\fP section for details.
-.IP \fBlength\fP 1.5i
-The height of a vertical scrollbar or the width of a horizontal scrollbar.
-.Mm
-.IP \fBminimumThumb\fP 1.5i
-The smallest size, in pixels, to which the thumb can shrink.
-.IP \fBorientation\fP 1.5i
-The orientation is the direction that the thumb will be allowed to move.
-This value can be either \fBXtorientVertical\fP or
-\fBXtorientHorizontal\fP.
-.IN "XtorientVertical" ""
-.IN "XtorientHorizontal" ""
-.IN "conversions" "Orientation"
-.Rs "vertical \fPand\fB horizontal"
-.Pf
-.Pb
-.Sc
-.IP \fBscrollDCursor\fP 1.5i
-This cursor is used when scrolling backward in a vertical scrollbar.
-.IP \fBscrollHCursor\fP 1.5i
-This cursor is used when a horizontal scrollbar is inactive.
-.IP \fBscrollLCursor\fP 1.5i
-This cursor is used when scrolling forward in a horizontal scrollbar.
-.IP \fBscrollProc\fP 1.5i
-All functions on this callback list may be called when the
-\fBNotifyScroll\fP action is invoked.  See the \fBScrollbar
-Actions\fP section for details.
-.IP \fBscrollRCursor\fP 1.5i
-This cursor is used when scrolling backward in a horizontal scrollbar,
-or when thumbing a vertical scrollbar.
-.IP \fBscrollUCursor\fP 1.5i
-This cursor is used when scrolling forward in a vertical scrollbar, or when
-thumbing a horizontal scrollbar.
-.IP \fBscrollVCursor\fP 1.5i
-This cursor is used when a vertical scrollbar is inactive.
-.Se
-.IP \fBshown\fP 1.5i
-This is the size of the thumb, expressed as a percentage (0.0 - 1.0)
-of the length of the scrollbar.
-.IP \fBthickness\fP 1.5i
-The width of a vertical scrollbar or the height of a horizontal scrollbar.
-.IP \fBthumb\fP 1.5i
-This pixmap is used to tile (or stipple) the thumb of the scrollbar.  If
-no tiling is desired, then set this resource to \fBNone\fP.  This
-resource will accept either a bitmap or a pixmap that is the same depth
-as the window.  The resource converter for this resource constructs
-bitmaps from the contents of files.  (See \fBConverting Bitmaps\fP for
-details.)
-.IP \fBtopOfThumb\fP 1.5i
-The location of the top of the thumb, as a percentage (0.0 - 1.0)
-of the length of the scrollbar.  This resource was called \fBtop\fP in
-previous versions of the Athena widget set.  The name collided with the
-a Form widget constraint resource, and had to be changed.
-.Tr
-.Xy
-.NH 3
-Scrollbar Actions
-.IN "Scrollbar widget" "actions"
-.LP
-The actions supported by the Scrollbar widget are:
-.IP \fBStartScroll\fP(\fIvalue\fP) 1.5i
-The possible \fIvalues\fP are Forward, Backward, or Continuous.
-This must be the first action to begin a new movement.
-.IP \fBNotifyScroll\fP(\fIvalue\fP) 1.5i
-The possible \fIvalues\fP are Proportional or FullLength.  If the
-argument to StartScroll was Forward or Backward, NotifyScroll executes
-the \fBscrollProc\fP callbacks and passes either; the position of the
-pointer, if \fIvalue\fP is Proportional, or the full length of the
-scroll bar, if \fIvalue\fP is FullLength.  If the argument to
-StartScroll was Continuous, NotifyScroll returns without executing any
-callbacks.
-.IP \fBEndScroll\fP(\^) 1.5i
-This must be the last action after a movement is complete.
-.IP \fBMoveThumb\fP(\^) 1.5i
-Repositions the Scrollbar's thumb to the current pointer location.
-.IP \fBNotifyThumb\fP(\^)\ \ \  1.5i
-Calls the
-.PN jumpProc
-callbacks and passes the relative position of the
-pointer as a percentage of the scroll bar length.
-.LP
-.sp
-The default bindings for Scrollbar are:
-.IN "Scrollbar widget" "default translation table"
-.LP
-.Ds 0
-.TA .5i 1.75i
-.ta .5i 1.75i
-	<Btn1Down>:	StartScroll(Forward)
-	<Btn2Down>:	StartScroll(Continuous) MoveThumb(\|) NotifyThumb(\|)
-	<Btn3Down>:	StartScroll(Backward)
-	<Btn2Motion>:	MoveThumb(\|) NotifyThumb(\|)
-	<BtnUp>:	NotifyScroll(Proportional) EndScroll(\|)
-.De
-.LP
-.sp
-Examples of additional bindings a user might wish to specify in a
-resource file are:
-.LP
-.Ds 0
-.TA .5i 2.25i
-.ta .5i 2.25i
-*Scrollbar.Translations: \\
-	~Meta<Key>space:	StartScroll(Forward) NotifyScroll(FullLength) \\n\\
-	 Meta<Key>space:	StartScroll(Backward) NotifyScroll(FullLength) \\n\\
-		EndScroll(\|)
-.De
-.NH 3
-Scrollbar Callbacks
-.IN "Scrollbar widget" "callbacks"
-.LP
-There are two callback lists provided by the Scrollbar widget.
-The procedural interface for these functions is described here.
-.LP
-The calling interface to the \fBscrollProc\fP callback procedure is:
-.IN "ScrollProc" "" "@DEF@"
-.FD 0
-void ScrollProc(\fIscrollbar\fP, \fIclient_data\fP, \fIposition\fP)
-.br
-     Widget \fIscrollbar\fP;
-.br
-     XtPointer \fIclient_data\fP;
-.br
-     XtPointer \fIposition\fP;    /* int */
-.FN
-.IP \fIscrollbar\fP 1i
-Specifies the Scrollbar widget.
-.IP \fIclient_data\fP 1i
-Specifies the client data.
-.IP \fIposition\fP 1i
-Specifies a pixel position in integer form.
-.LP
-The \fBscrollProc\fP callback is used for incremental scrolling
-and is called by the \fBNotifyScroll\fP action.
-The position argument is a signed quantity and should be cast to an int
-when used. Using the default button bindings, button 1 returns a
-positive value, and button 3 returns a negative value. In both cases,
-the magnitude of the value is the distance of the pointer in
-pixels from the top (or left) of the Scrollbar. The value will never
-be greater than the length of the Scrollbar.
-.LP
-.sp
-The calling interface to the \fBjumpProc\fP callback procedure is:
-.IN "jumpProc" "" "@DEF@"
-.FD 0
-void JumpProc(\fIscrollbar\fP, \fIclient_data\fP, \fIpercent\fP)
-.br
-     Widget \fIscrollbar\fP;
-.br
-     XtPointer \fIclient_data\fP;
-.br
-     XtPointer \fIpercent_ptr\fP;    /* float* */
-.FN
-.IP \fIscrollbar\fP 1i
-Specifies the ID of the scroll bar widget.
-.IP \fIclient_data\fP 1i
-Specifies the client data.
-.IP \fIpercent_ptr\fP 1i
-Specifies the floating point position of the thumb (0.0 \- 1.0).
-.LP
-The \fBjumpProc\fP callback is used to implement smooth scrolling and
-is called by the \fBNotifyThumb\fP action.  Percent_ptr must be cast
-to a pointer to float before use; i.e.
-.LP
-.Ds 0
-.TA .5i
-.ta .5i
-	float percent = *(float*)percent_ptr;
-.De
-.LP
-With the default button bindings, button 2 moves the thumb interactively,
-and the \fBjumpProc\fP is called on each new position of the pointer,
-while the pointer button remains down.  The value specified by
-\fIpercent_ptr\fP is the current location of the thumb (from the top or
-left of the Scrollbar) expressed as a percentage of the length of the
-Scrollbar.
-.NH 3
-Convenience Routines
-.LP
-.IN "Scrollbar widget" "setting thumb values"
-To set the position and length of a Scrollbar thumb, use
-.PN XawScrollbarSetThumb .
-.IN "XawScrollbarSetThumb" "" "@DEF@"
-.FD 0
-void XawScrollbarSetThumb(\fIw\fP, \fItop\fP, \fIshown\fP)
-.br
-     Widget \fIw\fP;
-.br
-     float \fItop\fP;
-.br
-     float \fIshown\fP;
-.FN
-.IP \fIw\fP 1i
-Specifies the Scrollbar widget.
-.IP \fItop\fP 1i
-Specifies the position of the top of the thumb as a fraction of the
-length of the Scrollbar.
-.IP \fIshown\fP 1i
-Specifies the length of the thumb as a fraction of the total length
-of the Scrollbar.
-.LP
-.PN XawScrollbarThumb
-moves the visible thumb to a new position (0.0 \- 1.0) and length (0.0 \- 1.0).
-Either the top or shown arguments can be specified as \-1.0,
-in which case the current value is left unchanged.
-Values greater than 1.0 are truncated to 1.0.
-.LP
-If called from \fBjumpProc\fP, \fBXawScrollbarSetThumb\fP has no effect.
-.NH 3
-Setting Float Resources
-.IN "float resources" "setting"
-.LP
-The \fBshown\fP and \fBtopOfThumb\fP resources are of type
-\fIfloat\fP.  These resources can be difficult to get into an
-argument list.  The reason is that C performs an automatic cast of
-the float value to an integer value, usually truncating the important
-information.  The following code fragment is one portable method of
-getting a float into an argument list.
-.sp
-.Ds 0
-.SM
-.TA 1i 2i
-.ta 1i 2i
-	top = 0.5;
-	if (sizeof(float) > sizeof(XtArgVal)) {
-	/*
-	\ * If a float is larger than an XtArgVal then pass this
-	\ * resource value by reference.
-	\ */
-		XtSetArg(args[0], XtNshown, &top);
-	}
-	else {
-	/*
-	\ * Convince C not to perform an automatic conversion, which
-	\ * would truncate 0.5 to 0.
-	\ */
-		XtArgVal * l_top = (XtArgVal *) &top;
-		XtSetArg(args[0], XtNshown, *l_top);
-	}
-.NL
-.De
-.sp
diff --git a/libXaw/spec/Simple b/libXaw/spec/Simple
deleted file mode 100644
index a030d4012..000000000
--- a/libXaw/spec/Simple
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,95 +0,0 @@
-.\" $Xorg: Simple,v 1.3 2000/08/17 19:42:27 cpqbld Exp $
-.NH 2
-Simple Widget
-.XS
-	Simple Widget
-.XE
-.IN "Simple widget" "" "@DEF@"
-.Ds 0
-.TA 2.0i
-.ta 2.0i
-.sp
-Application Header file	<Xaw/Simple.h>
-.IN "Simple.h" ""
-Class Header file	<Xaw/SimpleP.h>
-.IN "SimpleP.h" ""
-Class		simpleWidgetClass
-.IN "simpleWidgetClass"
-Class Name	Simple
-.IN "Simple widget" "class name"
-Superclass	Core
-.sp
-.De
-.LP
-The Simple widget is not very useful by itself, as it has no semantics
-of its own.  It main purpose is to be used as a common superclass for
-the other \fIsimple\fP Athena widgets.  This widget adds six resources
-to the resource list provided by the Core widget and its superclasses.
-.NH 3
-Resources
-.LP
-When creating a Simple widget instance, the following resources are
-retrieved from the argument list or from the resource database:
-.LP
-.IN "Simple widget" "resources"
-.TS H
-expand;
-lw(1i) lw(1i) lw(1i) lw(.5i) lw(2i).
-_
-.sp 3p
-.TB
-Name	Class	Type	Notes	Default Value
-.sp 3p
-_
-.TH
-.R
-.sp 3p
-accelerators	Accelerators	AcceleratorTable		NULL
-ancestorSensitive	AncestorSensitive	Boolean	D	True
-background	Background	Pixel		XtDefaultBackground
-backgroundPixmap	Pixmap	Pixmap		XtUnspecifiedPixmap
-borderColor	BorderColor	Pixel		XtDefaultForeground
-borderPixmap	Pixmap	Pixmap		XtUnspecifiedPixmap
-borderWidth	BorderWidth	Dimension		1
-colormap	Colormap	Colormap		Parent's Colormap
-cursor	Cursor	Cursor		None
-cursorName	Cursor	String		NULL
-depth	Depth	int	C	Parent's Depth
-destroyCallback	Callback	XtCallbackList		NULL
-height	Height	Dimension		0
-insensitiveBorder	Insensitive	Pixmap		GreyPixmap
-international	International	Boolean	C	False
-mappedWhenManaged	MappedWhenManaged	Boolean		True
-pointerColor	Foreground	Pixel		XtDefaultForeground
-pointerColorBackground	Background	Pixel		XtDefaultBackground
-screen	Screen	Screen	R	Parent's Screen
-sensitive	Sensitive	Boolean		True
-translations	Translations	TranslationTable		NULL
-width	Width	Dimension		0
-x	Position	Position		0
-y	Position	Position		0
-.sp 3p
-_
-.TE
-.Ac
-.As
-.Bg
-.Gp
-.Bc
-.Bp
-.Bw
-.Cm
-.Cu Bold
-.Cn Bold
-.Dp
-.Dc
-.Hw
-.Ib Bold
-.Ix Bold
-.Mm
-.Pf Bold
-.Pb Bold
-.Sc
-.Se
-.Tr
-.Xy
diff --git a/libXaw/spec/SimpleMenu b/libXaw/spec/SimpleMenu
deleted file mode 100644
index b59e511c8..000000000
--- a/libXaw/spec/SimpleMenu
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,315 +0,0 @@
-.\" $Xorg: SimpleMenu,v 1.3 2000/08/17 19:42:27 cpqbld Exp $
-.NH 2
-SimpleMenu Widget
-.XS
-	SimpleMenu Widget
-.XE
-.IN "SimpleMenu widget" "" "@DEF@"
-.Ds 0
-.TA 2.0i
-.ta 2.0i
-.sp
-Application Header file	<X11/Xaw/SimpleMenu.h>
-.IN "SimpleMenu.h" ""
-Class Header file	<X11/Xaw/SimpleMenP.h>
-.IN "SimpleMenP.h" ""
-Class		simpleMenuWidgetClass
-.IN "simpleMenuWidgetClass" ""
-Class Name	SimpleMenu
-.IN "SimpleMenu widget" "class name"
-Superclass	OverrideShell
-.sp
-.De
-.LP
-The SimpleMenu widget is a container for the menu entries.  It is a
-direct subclass of shell, and is should be created with
-\fBXtCreatePopupShell\fP, not \fBXtCreateManagedWidget\fP.  This is the
-only part of the menu that
-actually is associated with a window.  The SimpleMenu serves as the glue to bind
-the individual menu entries together into a menu.
-.NH 3
-Resources
-.LP
-.IN "SimpleMenu widget" "resources"
-.LP
-The resources associated with the SimpleMenu widget control aspects
-that will affect the entire menu.
-.TS H
-lw(1i) lw(1i) lw(1i) lw(.5i) lw(2i).
-_
-.sp 3p
-.TB
-Name	Class	Type	Notes	Default Value
-.sp 3p
-_
-.TH
-.R
-.sp 3p
-accelerators	Accelerators	AcceleratorTable		NULL
-ancestorSensitive	AncestorSensitive	Boolean	D	True
-allowShellResize	AllowShellResize	Boolean		True
-background	Background	Pixel		XtDefaultBackground
-backgroundPixmap	Pixmap	Pixmap		XtUnspecifiedPixmap
-backingStore	BackingStore	BackingStore		see below
-borderColor	BorderColor	Pixel		XtDefaultForeground
-borderPixmap	Pixmap	Pixmap		XtUnspecifiedPixmap
-borderWidth	BorderWidth	Dimension		1
-bottomMargin	VerticalMargins	Dimension		0
-children	ReadOnly	WidgetList	R	NULL
-createPopupChildProc	CreatePopupChildProc	Function		NULL
-colormap	Colormap	Colormap		Parent's Colormap
-cursor	Cursor	Cursor		None
-depth	Depth	int	C	Parent's Depth
-destroyCallback	Callback	XtCallbackList		NULL
-geometry	Geometry	String		NULL
-height	Height	Dimension		Enough space to contain all entries
-label	Label	String		NULL
-labelClass	LabelClass	Pointer		SmeBSBObjectClass
-mappedWhenManaged	MappedWhenManaged	Boolean		True
-menuOnScreen	MenuOnScreen	Boolean		True
-numChildren	ReadOnly	Cardinal	R	0
-overrideRedirect	OverrideRedirect	Boolean		True
-popdownCallback	Callback	XtCallbackList		NULL
-popupCallback	Callback	XtCallbackList		NULL
-popupOnEntry	PopupOnEntry	Widget	A	Label or first entry
-rowHeight	RowHeight	Dimension		0
-saveUnder	SaveUnder	Boolean		False
-screen	Screen	Screen	R	Parent's Screen
-sensitive	Sensitive	Boolean		True
-topMargin	VerticalMargins	Dimension		0
-translations	Translations	TranslationTable		See below
-visual	Visual	Visual		CopyFromParent
-width	Width	Dimension		Width of widest entry
-x	Position	Position		0
-y	Position	Position		0
-.sp 3p
-_
-.TE
-.Ac
-.As
-.IP \fBbackingStore\fP 1.5i
-.IN "conversions" "BackingStore"
-Determines what type of backing store will be used for the menu.  Legal
-values for this resource are \fBNotUseful\fP, \fBWhenMapped\fP, and
-\fBAlways\fP.  These values are the backing-store integers defined in
-<X11/X.h>.
-.Rs "notUseful, whenMapped, always, \fPand\fP default"
-If \fBdefault\fP is specified (the default behavior) the server will use
-whatever it thinks is appropriate.
-.Bg
-.Gp
-.Bc
-.Bp
-.Bw
-.IP \fBbottomMargin\fP 1.5i
-.br
-.ns
-.IP \fBtopMargin\fP 1.5i
-The amount of space between the top or bottom of the menu and the menu entry
-closest to that edge.
-.Ch
-.Cm
-.IP \fBcursor\fP 1.5i
-The shape of the mouse pointer whenever it is in this widget.
-.Dp
-.Dc
-.IP geometry 1.5i
-If this resource is specified it will override the x, y, width and
-height of this widget.  The format of this string is
-[<\fIwidth\fP>x<\fIheight\fP>][{+ -} <\fIxoffset\fP> {+ -}<\fIyoffset\fP>].
-.Hw
-.IP \fBlabel\fP 1.5i
-This label will be placed at the top of the SimpleMenu, and may not be
-highlighted.  The name of the
-label object is \fBmenuLabel\fP.  Using this name it is possible to
-modify the label's attributes through the resource database.  When the label
-is created, the \fBlabel\fP is hard coded to the value of \fBlabel\fP, and
-\fBjustify\fP is hard coded as \fBXtJustifyCenter\fP.
-.IP \fBlabelClass\fP 1.5i
-Specifies the type of Sme object created as the menu label.
-.Mm
-.IP \fBmenuOnScreen\fP 1.5i
-If the menu is automatically positioned under the cursor with the
-\fBXawPositionSimpleMenu\fP action, and this resource is \fBTrue\fP,
-then the menu will always be fully visible on the screen.
-.Nc
-.IP overrideRedirect 1.5i
-Determines the value of the override_redirect attribute of the
-SimpleMenu's window.  The override_redirect attribute of a window
-determines whether or not a window manager may interpose itself between
-this window and the root window of the display.  For more information
-see the \fIInterclient Communications Conventions Manual\fP.
-.IP popdownCallback 1.5i
-.br
-.ns
-.IP popupCallback 1.5i
-These callback functions are called by the Xt Intrinsics whenever the
-shell is popped up or down (See \fI\*(xT\fP for details).
-.IP \fBpopupOnEntry\fP 1.5i
-The \fBXawPositionSimpleMenu\fP action will, by default, popup the
-SimpleMenu with its label (or first entry) directly under the
-pointer.  To popup the menu under
-another entry, set this resource to the menu entry that should be
-under the pointer, when the menu is popped up.  This allows the
-application to offer the user a default menu entry that can be selected
-with out moving the pointer.
-.IP \fBrowHeight\fP 1.5i
-If this resources is zero (the default) then each menu entry will be
-given its desired height.  If this resource has any other value then
-all menu entries will be forced to be \fBrowHeight\fP pixels high.
-.IP saveUnder 1.5i
-If this is \fBTrue\fP then save unders will be active on the menu's window.
-.Sc
-.Se
-.Tr
-.Xy
-.NH 3
-SimpleMenu Actions
-.IN "SimpleMenu widget" "actions"
-.LP
-The SimpleMenu widget supports the following actions:
-.IP \(bu 5
-Switching the entry under the mouse pointer between
-the foreground and background colors with \fBhighlight\fP
-and \fBunhighlight\fP
-.IP \(bu 5
-Processing menu entry callbacks with \fBnotify\fP
-.sp
-.LP
-.IN "SimpleMenu widget" "default translations"
-The following are the default translation bindings used
-by the SimpleMenu widget:
-.LP
-.sp
-.Ds 0
-.TA .5i 2.25i
-.ta .5i 2.25i
-	<EnterWindow>:	highlight(\|)
-	<LeaveWindow>:	unhighlight(\|)
-	<BtnMotion>:	highlight(\|)
-	<BtnUp>:	MenuPopdown(\|) notify(\|) unhighlight(\|)
-.De
-.sp
-.LP
-.IN "SimpleMenu widget" "MenuPopdown routine"
-The user can pop down the menu without activating any of the callback
-functions by releasing the pointer button when no menu item is
-highlighted.
-.sp
-.LP
-The full list of actions supported by SimpleMenu is:
-.IP \fBhighlight\fP() 1.5i
-Highlight the menu entry that is currently under the pointer.
-Only a item that is highlighted will be notified when the \fBnotify\fP
-action is invoked.  The look of a highlighted entry is determined by
-the menu entry.
-.IP \fBunhighlight\fP(\|) 1.5i
-Unhighlights the currently highlighted menu item, and returns it to
-its normal look.
-.IP \fBnotify\fP(\|) 1.5i
-Notifies the menu entry that is currently highlighted that is has been
-selected.  It is the responsibility of the menu entry to take the
-appropriate action.
-.IP \fBMenuPopdown\fP(\fImenu\fP)
-This action is defined in \fI\*(xT\fP.
-.IN "SimpleMenu widget" "MenuPopdown routine"
-.NH 3
-Positioning the SimpleMenu
-.IN "XawPositionSimpleMenu" "" "@DEF@"
-.IN "SimpleMenu widget" "positioning" "@DEF@"
-.LP
-If the SimpleMenu widget is to be used as a pulldown menu then the
-MenuButton widget, or some other outside means should be used to place
-the menu when it is popped up.
-.LP
-If popup menus are desired it will be necessary to add the
-\fBXawPositionSimpleMenu\fP and \fBMenuPopup\fP actions to the
-translation table of the widget that will be popping up the menu.  The
-\fBMenuPopup\fP action is described in \fI\*(xT\fP.
-\fBXawPositionSimpleMenu\fP is a global action procedure registered by
-the SimpleMenu widget when the first one is created or the convenience
-routine \fBXawSimpleMenuAddGlobalActions\fP is called.
-.LP
-Translation writers should be aware that Xt does not register grabs on
-``don't care'' modifiers, and therefore the left hand side of the
-production should be written to exclude unspecified modifiers.
-For example these are the translations needed to popup some of
-\fBxterm's\fP menus:
-.sp
-.LP
-.Ds 0
-.TA .5i 2.25i
-.ta .5i 2.25i
-	!Ctrl<Btn1Down>: XawPositionSimpleMenu(xterm) MenuPopup(xterm)
-	!Ctrl<Btn2Down>: XawPositionSimpleMenu(modes) MenuPopup(modes)
-.De
-.sp 1
-.LP
-.IP \fBXawPositionSimpleMenu\fP(\fImenu\fP) 2.25i
-The \fBXawPositionSimpleMenu\fP routine will search for the menu name
-passed to it using \fBXtNameToWidget\fP starting with the widget
-invoking the action as the reference widget.  If it is unsuccessful it
-will continue up the widget tree using each of the invoking widget's
-ancestors as the reference widget.  If it is still unsuccessful it will
-print a warning message and give up.  \fBXawPositionSimpleMenu\fP will
-position the menu directly under the pointer cursor.  The menu will be
-placed so that the pointer cursor is centered on the entry named by the
-\fBpopupOnEntry\fP resource.  If the \fBmenuOnScreen\fP resource is
-\fBTrue\fP then the menu will always be fully visible on the screen.
-.NH 3
-Convenience Routines
-.NH 4
-Registering the Global Action Routines
-.LP
-.IN "XawPositionSimpleMenu" ""
-The \fBXawPositionSimpleMenu\fP action routine may often be invoked
-before any menus have been created.  This can occur when an
-application uses dynamic menu creation.  In these cases an application will
-need to register this global action routine by calling
-\fBXawSimpleMenuAddGlobalActions\fP:
-.IN "XawSimpleMenuAddGlobalActions" "" "@DEF@"
-.FD 0
-void XawSimpleMenuAddGlobalActions(\fIapp_con\fP)
-.br
-      XtAppContext \fIapp_con\fP;
-.FN
-.IP \fIapp_con\fP 1i
-Specifies the application context in which this action should be registered.
-.LP
-This function need only be called once per application and must be
-called before any widget that uses \fBXawPositionSimpleMenu\fP action
-is realized.
-.NH 4
-Getting and Clearing the Current Menu Entry
-.LP
-To get the currently highlighted menu entry use
-\fBXawSimpleMenuGetActiveEntry\fP:
-.IN "XawSimpleMenuGetActiveEntry" "" "@DEF@"
-.FD 0
-Widget XawSimpleMenuGetActiveEntry(\fIw\fP)
-.br
-      Widget \fIw\fP;
-.FN
-.IP \fIw\fP 1i
-Specifies the SimpleMenu widget.
-.LP
-This function returns the menu entry that is
-currently highlighted, or NULL if no entry is highlighted.
-.LP
-.sp
-To clear the SimpleMenu widget's internal information about the
-currently highlighted menu entry use
-\fBXawSimpleMenuClearActiveEntry\fP:
-.IN "XawSimpleMenuClearActiveEntry" "" "@DEF@"
-.FD 0
-Widget XawSimpleMenuClearActiveEntry(\fIw\fP)
-.br
-      Widget \fIw\fP;
-.FN
-.IP \fIw\fP 1i
-Specifies the SimpleMenu widget.
-.LP
-This function unsets all internal references to the currently
-highlighted menu entry.  It does not \fIunhighlight\fP or otherwise
-alter the appearance of the active entry.  This function is primarily
-for use by implementors of menu entries.
diff --git a/libXaw/spec/Sme b/libXaw/spec/Sme
deleted file mode 100644
index 48eaa1510..000000000
--- a/libXaw/spec/Sme
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,106 +0,0 @@
-.\" $Xorg: Sme,v 1.3 2000/08/17 19:42:28 cpqbld Exp $
-.NH 2
-Sme Object
-.LP
-.XS
-	Sme Object
-.XE
-.IN "Sme object" "" "@DEF@"
-.sp
-.Ds 0
-.TA 2.0i
-.ta 2.0i
-Application Header file	<X11/Xaw/Sme.h>
-.IN "Sme.h" ""
-Class Header file	<X11/Xaw/SmeP.h>
-.IN "SmeP.h" ""
-Class		smeObjectClass
-.IN "smeObjectClass" ""
-Class Name	Sme
-.IN "Sme object" "class name"
-Superclass	RectObj
-.De
-.sp
-.LP
-The Sme object is the base class for all menu entries.  While this
-object is mainly intended to be subclassed, it may be used in a menu to
-add blank space between menu entries.
-.NH 3
-Resources
-.IN "SmeLine object" "resources"
-.LP
-The resources associated with the SmeLine object are defined in this
-section, and affect only the single menu entry specified by this object.
-There are no new resources added for this class, as it picks up all its
-resources from the RectObj class.
-.TS H
-lw(1.5i) lw(1i) lw(1i) lw(.5i) lw(2i).
-_
-.sp 3p
-.TB
-Name	Class	Type	Notes	Default Value
-.sp 3p
-_
-.TH
-.R
-.sp 3p
-ancestorSensitive	AncestorSensitive	Boolean		True
-callback	Callback	XtCallbackList		NULL
-destroyCallback	Callback	XtCallbackList		NULL
-height	Height	Dimension		0
-international	International	Boolean	C	False
-sensitive	Sensitive	Boolean		True
-width	Width	Dimension		1
-.sp 3p
-_
-.TE
-.As
-.Dc
-.Hw
-Keep in mind that the SimpleMenu widget will force all menu items to
-be the width of the widest entry.
-.Ix Bold
-.Se
-.NH 3
-Subclassing the Sme Object
-.IN "Sme object" "subclassing" "@DEF"
-.LP
-.sp
-To Create a new Sme object \fIclass\fP you will need to define three class methods.
-These methods allow the SimpleMenu to highlight and unhighlight the
-menu entry as the pointer cursor moves over it, as well as notify the
-entry when the user has selected it.  All of
-these methods may be inherited from the Sme object, although the default
-semantics are not very interesting.
-.IP \fBHighlight\fP(\|) 1i
-.IN "Sme object" "Highlight method"
-Called to put the menu entry into the highlighted state.
-.IP \fBUnhighlight\fP(\|) 1i
-.IN "Sme object" "Unhighlight method"
-Called to return the widget to its normal (unhighlighted) state.
-.IP \fBNotify\fP(\|)
-.IN "Sme object" "Notify method"
-Called when the user selects this menu entry.
-.LP
-.sp
-Other then these methods, creating a new object
-is straight forward.  Here is some information that may help you
-avoid some common mistakes.
-.IP 1) 3n
-Objects can be zero pixels high.
-.IP 2) 3n
-Objects draw on their parent's window, therefore the Drawing dimensions
-are different from those of widgets.  For instance, y locations vary
-from \fBy\fP to \fBy + height\fP, not \fB0\fP to \fBheight\fP.
-.IP 3) 3n
-XtSetValues calls may come from the application while the Sme is highlighted,
-and if the SetValues method returns True, will result in an expose event.
-The SimpleMenu may later call the menu entry's \fBunhighlight\fP
-procedure.  However, due to the asynchronous nature of
-X, the expose event generated by \fBXtSetValues\fP will come \fIafter\fP
-this unhighlight.
-.IP 4) 3n
-Remember that your subclass of the Sme does not own the
-window.  Share the space with other menu entries, and refrain
-from drawing outside the subclass's own section of the menu.
-
diff --git a/libXaw/spec/SmeBSB b/libXaw/spec/SmeBSB
deleted file mode 100644
index 2cfae9d8f..000000000
--- a/libXaw/spec/SmeBSB
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,125 +0,0 @@
-.\" $Xorg: SmeBSB,v 1.3 2000/08/17 19:42:28 cpqbld Exp $
-.NH 2
-SmeBSB Object
-.LP
-.XS
-	SmeBSB Object
-.XE
-.IN "SmeBSB object" "" "@DEF@"
-.Ds 0
-.TA 2.0i
-.ta 2.0i
-.sp
-Application Header file	<X11/Xaw/SmeBSB.h>
-.IN "SmeBSB.h" ""
-Class Header file	<X11/Xaw/SmeBSBP.h>
-.IN "SmeBSBP.h" ""
-Class		smeBSBObjectClass
-.IN "smeBSBObjectClass" ""
-Class Name	SmeBSB
-.IN "SmeBSB object" "class name"
-Superclass	Sme
-.sp
-.De
-.LP
-The SmeBSB object is used to create a menu entry that contains a string,
-and optional bitmaps in its left and right margins.  Since each menu
-entry is an independent object, the application is able to change the
-font, color, height, and other attributes of the menu entries, on an
-entry by entry basis.  The format of the string may either be the encoding
-of the 8 bit \fBfont\fP utilized, or in a multi-byte encoding for use with a
-\fBfontSet\fP.
-.NH 3
-Resources
-.IN "SmeBSB object" "resources"
-.LP
-The resources associated with the SmeBSB object are defined in this section,
-and affect only the single menu entry specified by this object.
-.TS H
-lw(1i) lw(1i) lw(1i) lw(.5i) lw(2i).
-_
-.sp 3p
-.TB
-Name	Class	Type	Notes	Default Value
-.sp 3p
-_
-.TH
-.R
-.sp 3p
-ancestorSensitive	AncestorSensitive	Boolean	D	True
-callback	Callback	Callback		NULL
-destroyCallback	Callback	XtCallbackList		NULL
-font	Font	FontStruct		XtDefaultFont
-fontSet	FontSet	XFontSet		XtDefaultFontSet
-foreground	Foreground	Pixel		XtDefaultForeground
-height	Height	Dimension	A	Font height + \fBvertSpace\fP
-international	International	Boolean	C	False
-justify	Justify	Justify		XtjustifyLeft
-label	Label	String		NULL
-leftBitmap	LeftBitmap	Pixmap		XtUnspecifiedPixmap
-leftMargin	leftMargin	Dimension		4
-rightBitmap	RightBitmap	Pixmap		XtUnspecifiedPixmap
-rightMargin	rightMargin	Dimension		4
-sensitive	Sensitive	Boolean		True
-vertSpace	VertSpace	int		25
-width	Width	Dimension	A	TextWidth + margins
-.sp 3p
-_
-.TE
-.As
-.IP \fBcallback\fP 1.5i
-All callback functions on this list are called when the SimpleMenu
-\fInotifies\fP this entry that the user has selected it.
-.Dc
-.IP \fBfont\fP 1.5i
-The text font to use when displaying the \fBlabel\fP, when the
-\fBinternational\fP resource is \fBfalse\fP.
-.IP \fBfontSet\fP 1.5i
-The text font set to use when displaying the \fBlabel\fP, when the
-\fBinternational\fP resource is \fBtrue\fP.
-.IP \fBforeground\fP 1.5i
-A pixel value which indexes the SimpleMenu's colormap to derive the
-foreground color of the menu entry's window.  This color is also
-used to render all 1's in the left and right \fBbitmaps\fP.
-.Hw
-Keep in mind that the SimpleMenu widget will force the width of all
-menu entries to be the width of the longest entry.
-.In
-.IP \fBjustify\fP 1.5i
-How the label is to be rendered between the left and right margins when
-the space is wider than the actual text.  This resource may be
-specified with the values \fBXtJustifyLeft\fP, \fBXtJustifyCenter\fP,
-or \fBXtJustifyRight\fP.  When specifying the justification from a
-resource file the values \fBleft\fP, \fBcenter\fP, or \fBright\fP may be
-used.
-.IP \fBlabel\fP 1.5i
-This is a the string that will be displayed in the menu entry.  The
-exact location of this string within the bounds of the menu entry is
-controlled by the \fBleftMargin\fP, \fBrightMargin\fP, \fBvertSpace\fP,
-and \fBjustify\fP resources.
-.IP \fBleftBitmap\fP 1.5i
-.br
-.ns
-.IP \fBrightBitmap\fP 1.5i
-This is a name of a bitmap to display in the left or right margin of the
-menu entry.  All 1's in the bitmap will be rendered in the foreground
-color, and all 0's will be drawn in the background color of the
-SimpleMenu widget.  It is the
-programmers' responsibility to make sure that the menu entry is tall
-enough, and the appropriate margin wide enough to accept the bitmap.
-If care is not taken the bitmap may extend into another menu entry, or
-into this entry's label.
-.IP \fBleftMargin\fP 1.5i
-.br
-.ns
-.IP \fBrightMargin\fP 1.5i
-This is the amount of space (in pixels) that will be left between the
-edge of the menu entry and the label string.
-.Se
-.IP \fBvertSpace\fP 1.5i
-This is the amount of vertical padding, expressed as a percentage of
-the height of the font, that is to be placed around the label of a
-menu entry.. The label and bitmaps are always centered vertically
-within the menu.  The default value for this
-resource (25) causes the default height to be 125% of the height of the
-font.
diff --git a/libXaw/spec/SmeLine b/libXaw/spec/SmeLine
deleted file mode 100644
index 5b87cd9a5..000000000
--- a/libXaw/spec/SmeLine
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,72 +0,0 @@
-.\" $Xorg: SmeLine,v 1.3 2000/08/17 19:42:28 cpqbld Exp $
-.NH 2
-SmeLine Object
-.LP
-.XS
-	SmeLine Object
-.XE
-.IN "SmeLine object" "" "@DEF@"
-.sp
-.Ds 0
-.TA 2.0i
-.ta 2.0i
-Application Header file	<X11/Xaw/SmeLine.h>
-.IN "SmeLine.h" ""
-Class Header file	<X11/Xaw/SmeLineP.h>
-.IN "SmeLineP.h" ""
-Class		smeLineObjectClass
-.IN "smeLineObjectClass" ""
-Class Name	SmeLine
-.IN "SmeLine object" "class name"
-Superclass	Sme
-.De
-.sp
-.LP
-The SmeLine object is used to add a horizontal line or menu separator to
-a menu.  Since each SmeLine is an independent object, the application
-is able to change the color, height, and other attributes of the SmeLine
-objects on an entry by entry basis.  This object is not selectable, and
-will not highlight when the pointer cursor is over it.
-.NH 3
-Resources
-.IN "SmeLine object" "resources"
-.LP
-The resources associated with the SmeLine object are defined in this section,
-and affect only the single menu entry specified by this object.
-.TS H
-lw(1i) lw(1i) lw(1i) lw(.5i) lw(2i).
-_
-.sp 3p
-.TB
-Name	Class	Type	Notes	Default Value
-.sp 3p
-_
-.TH
-.R
-.sp 3p
-destroyCallback	Callback	XtCallbackList		NULL
-foreground	Foreground	Pixel		XtDefaultForeground
-height	Height	Dimension		\fBlineWidth\fP
-international	International	Boolean	C	False
-lineWidth	LineWidth	Dimension		1
-stipple	Stipple	Pixmap		XtUnspecifiedPixmap
-width	Width	Dimension		1
-.sp 3p
-_
-.TE
-.Dc
-.IP \fBforeground\fP 1.5i
-A pixel value which indexes the SimpleMenu's colormap to derive the
-foreground color used to draw the separator line.
-.Hw
-Keep in mind that the SimpleMenu widget will force all menu items to
-be the width of the widest entry.  Thus, setting the width is generally not
-very important.
-.Ix
-.IP \fBlineWidth\fP 1.5i
-The width of the horizontal line that is to be displayed.
-.IP \fBstipple\fP 1.5i
-If a bitmap is specified for this resource, the line will be stippled
-through it.  This allows the menu separator to be rendered as something
-more exciting than just a line.  For instance, if you define a stipple
-that is a chain link, then your menu separators will look like chains.
diff --git a/libXaw/spec/StripChart b/libXaw/spec/StripChart
deleted file mode 100644
index 3a4e68338..000000000
--- a/libXaw/spec/StripChart
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,160 +0,0 @@
-.\" $Xorg: StripChart,v 1.3 2000/08/17 19:42:28 cpqbld Exp $
-.NH 2
-StripChart Widget
-.XS
-	StripChart Widget
-.XE
-.IN "StripChart widget" "" "@DEF@"
-.Ds 0
-.TA 2.0i
-.ta 2.0i
-.sp
-Application Header file	<Xaw/StripChart.h>
-.IN "StripChart.h" ""
-Class Header file	<Xaw/StripCharP.h>
-.IN "StripCharP.h" ""
-Class		stripChartWidgetClass
-.IN "stripChartWidgetClass" ""
-Class Name	StripChart
-.IN "StripChart widget" "class name"
-Superclass	Simple
-.sp
-.De
-.LP
-The StripChart widget is used to provide a roughly real
-time graphical chart of a single value.  For example,
-it is used by the common client program \fBxload\fP
-to provide a graph of processor load.  The StripChart
-reads data from an application, and updates the chart
-at the \fBupdate\fP interval specified.
-.NH 3
-Resources
-.LP
-When creating a StripChart widget instance, the following resources are
-retrieved from the argument list or from the resource database:
-.LP
-.IN "StripChart widget" "resources"
-.TS H
-expand;
-lw(1i) lw(1i) lw(1i) lw(.5i) lw(2i).
-_
-.sp 3p
-.TB
-Name	Class	Type	Notes	Default Value
-.sp 3p
-_
-.TH
-.R
-.sp 3p
-accelerators	Accelerators	AcceleratorTable		NULL
-ancestorSensitive	AncestorSensitive	Boolean	D	True
-background	Background	Pixel		XtDefaultBackground
-backgroundPixmap	Pixmap	Pixmap		XtUnspecifiedPixmap
-borderColor	BorderColor	Pixel		XtDefaultForeground
-borderPixmap	Pixmap	Pixmap		XtUnspecifiedPixmap
-borderWidth	BorderWidth	Dimension		1
-colormap	Colormap	Colormap		Parent's Colormap
-cursor	Cursor	Cursor		None
-cursorName	Cursor	String		NULL
-depth	Depth	int	C	Parent's Depth
-destroyCallback	Callback	XtCallbackList		NULL
-foreground	Foreground	Pixel		XtDefaultForeground
-getValue	Callback	XtCallbackList		NULL
-height	Height	Dimension		120
-highlight	Foreground	Pixel		XtDefaultForeground
-insensitiveBorder	Insensitive	Pixmap		GreyPixmap
-international	International	Boolean	C	False
-jumpScroll	JumpScroll	int	A	half the width of the widget
-mappedWhenManaged	MappedWhenManaged	Boolean		True
-minScale	Scale	int		1
-pointerColor	Foreground	Pixel		XtDefaultForeground
-pointerColorBackground	Background	Pixel		XtDefaultBackground
-screen	Screen	Pointer	R	Parent's Screen
-sensitive	Sensitive	Boolean		True
-translations	Translations	TranslationTable		NULL
-update	Interval	int		10
-width	Width	Dimension		120
-x	Position	Position		0
-y	Position	Position		0
-.sp 3p
-_
-.TE
-.Ac
-.As
-.Bg
-.Gp
-.Bc
-.Bp
-.Bw
-.Cm
-.Cu
-.Cn
-.Dp
-.Dc
-.IP \fBforeground\fP 1.5i
-A pixel value which indexes the widget's colormap to derive the color
-that will be used to draw the graph.
-.IP \fBgetValue\fP 1.5i
-A list of callback functions to call every \fBupdate\fP seconds.
-This list should contain one function, which returns the
-value to be graphed by the StripChart widget.  The following
-section describes the procedural interface.  Behavior when this list has
-more than one function is undefined.
-.Hw
-.IP \fBhighlight\fP 1.5i
-A pixel value which indexes the widget's colormap to derive the color
-that will be used to draw the scale lines on the graph.
-.Ib
-.Ix
-.IP \fBjumpScroll\fP 1.5i
-When the graph reaches the right edge of the window it must be
-scrolled to the left.  This resource specifies the number of pixels
-it will jump.  Smooth scrolling can be achieved by setting this resource
-to 1.
-.Mm
-.IP \fBminScale\fP 1.5i
-The minimum scale for the graph.  The number of divisions on the graph
-will always be greater than or equal to this value.
-.Pf
-.Pb
-.Sc
-.Se
-.Tr
-.IP \fBupdate\fP
-The number of seconds between graph updates.  Each update is
-represented on the graph as a 1 pixel wide line.  Every \fBupdate\fP seconds
-the \fBgetValue\fP procedure will be used to get a new graph point,
-and this point will be added to the right end of the StripChart.
-.Xy
-.NH 3
-Getting the StripChart Value
-.IN "StripChart widget" "getting the value"
-.LP
-The StripChart widget will call the application routine passed to it
-as the \fBgetValue\fP callback function every \fBupdate\fP seconds to
-obtain another point for the StripChart graph.
-.LP
-The calling interface for the \fBgetValue\fP callback is:
-.IN "StripChart widget" "getValue callback" "@DEF@"
-.FD 0
-void (*\fIgetValueProc\fP)(\fIw\fP, \fIclient_data\fP, \fIvalue\fP)
-.br
-     Widget \fIw\fP;
-.br
-     XtPointer \fIclient_data\fP;
-.br
-     XtPointer \fIvalue\fP;    /* double * */
-.FN
-.IP \fIw\fP 1i
-Specifies the StripChart widget.
-.IP \fIclient_data\fP 1i
-Specifies the client data.
-.IP \fIvalue\fP 1i
-Returns a pointer to a double.  The application should set the address
-pointed to by this argument to a double containing the value to be
-graphed on the StripChart.
-.LP
-This function is used by the StripChart to call an application routine.
-The routine will pass the value to be graphed back to the the StripChart
-in the \fBvalue\fP field of this routine.
-
diff --git a/libXaw/spec/TPage_Credits b/libXaw/spec/TPage_Credits
deleted file mode 100644
index 7301ddf63..000000000
--- a/libXaw/spec/TPage_Credits
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,156 +0,0 @@
-.\" $Xorg: TPage_Credits,v 1.3 2000/08/17 19:42:28 cpqbld Exp $
-.\" $XdotOrg: xc/doc/specs/Xaw/TPage_Credits,v 1.2 2004/04/23 18:42:18 eich Exp $
-.ds CH
-.ds CF
-.ps 11
-.nr PS 11
-\&
-.sp 8
-.ce 5
-\s+2\fB\*(xW\fP\s-2
-
-\s+1\fBX Window System\fP\s-1
-
-\s+1\fBX Version 11, Release 7\fP\s-1
-
-\s+1\fB\*(xV\fP\s-1
-
-.sp 6
-.ce 4
-Chris D. Peterson
-.sp 6p
-formerly MIT X Consortium
-.bp
-\&
-.ps 9
-.nr PS 9
-.sp 8
-.LP
-X Window System is a trademark of The Open Group.
-.LP
-Copyright \(co 1985, 1986, 1987, 1988, 1989, 1991, 1994 X Consortium
-.LP
-Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy
-of this software and associated documentation files (the ``Software''), to deal
-in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights
-to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell
-copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is
-furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
-.LP
-The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in
-all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
-.LP
-THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'', WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
-IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
-FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
-X CONSORTIUM BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
-AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN
-CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
-.LP
-Except as contained in this notice, the name of the X Consortium shall not be
-used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings
-in this Software without prior written authorization from the X Consortium.
-.LP
-Copyright \(co 1985, 1986, 1987, 1988, 1989, 1991
-Digital Equipment Corporation, Maynard, Massachusetts.
-.LP
-Permission to use, copy, modify and distribute this documentation for any
-purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright
-notice appears in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this
-permission notice appear in supporting documentation, and that the name of
-Digital not be used in in advertising or publicity pertaining
-to distribution of the software without specific, written prior permission.
-Digital makes no representations about the suitability of the
-software described herein for any purpose.
-It is provided ``as is'' without express or implied warranty.
-.ps 11
-.nr PS 11
-.bp 5
-.af PN i
-.ds CF \fB\\n(PN\fP
-.XS v
-Acknowledgments
-.XE
-\&
-.ce 3
-\s+1\fBAcknowledgments\fP\s-1
-.sp 2
-.na
-.LP
-Many thanks go to Ralph Swick (Project Athena / Digital) who has
-contributed much time and effort to this widget set.  Previous
-versions of the widget set are largely due to his time and effort.
-Many of the improvements that I have been able to make are because he
-provided a solid foundation to build upon.  While much of the effort
-has been Ralph's, many other people have contributed to the code.
-.LP
-.Ds
-Mark Ackerman (formerly Project Athena)
-Donna Converse (MIT X Consortium)
-Jim Fulton (formerly MIT X Consortium)
-Loretta Guarino-Reid (Digital WSL)
-Charles Haynes (Digital WSL)
-Rich Hyde (Digital WSL)
-Mary Larson (Digital UEG)
-Joel McCormack (Digital WSL)
-Ron Newman (formerly Project Athena)
-Jeanne Rich (Digital WSL)
-Terry Weissman (formerly Digital WSL)
-.De
-.LP
-While not much remains of the X10 toolkit, many of the ideas for this
-widget set come from that original version.  The design and
-implementation of the X10 toolkit were done by:
-.LP
-.Ds
-Mike Gancarz (formerly Digital UEG)
-Charles Haynes (Digital WSL)
-Phil Karlton (formerly Digital WSL)
-Kathleen Langone (Digital UEG)
-Mary Larson (Digital UEG)
-Ram Rao (Digital UEG)
-Smokey Wallace (formerly Digital WSL)
-Terry Weissman (formerly Digital WSL)
-.De
-.LP
-I have used the formatting ideas, and some of the words from previous
-versions of this document.  The X11R3 Athena widget document was
-written by:
-.LP
-.Ds
-Ralph R. Swick (Project Athena/ Digital)
-Terry Weissman (formerly Digital WSL)
-Al Mento (Digital UEG)
-.De
-.LP
-Putting this manual together was a major task in and of itself.  I
-would like to thank Ralph Swick, Donna Converse, and Jim Fulton for
-taking the time to help convert my technical knowledge into legible
-text.  A special thanks to Jean Diaz (O'Reilly and Associates) for
-spending nearly a month with me working out all the annoying little
-details.
-.sp
-.Ds 0
-Chris D. Peterson
-MIT X Consortium 1989
-.De
-.LP
-.sp
-The R5 edition of this document has been edited by the research staff of
-the MIT X Consortium, with significant contributions by Jim Fulton (NCD).
-.sp
-.Ds 0
-Donna Converse
-MIT X Consortium 1991
-.De
-.LP
-.sp
-The R6 edition of this document has been edited to reflect changes
-brought about by research staff of the Omron Corporation, with special
-recognition to Li Yuhong, Seiji Kuwari, and Hiroshi Kuribayashi for
-the X11R5/contrib/lib/Xaw internationalization that inspired this version.
-.sp
-.Ds 0
-Frank Sheeran
-Omron Corporation 1994
-.De
diff --git a/libXaw/spec/Template b/libXaw/spec/Template
deleted file mode 100644
index b5dc050b2..000000000
--- a/libXaw/spec/Template
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,426 +0,0 @@
-.\" $Xorg: Template,v 1.3 2000/08/17 19:42:28 cpqbld Exp $
-All Athena widgets have three separate files associated with them:
-.LP
-.IP \(bu 3
-A \*Qpublic\*U header file containing declarations needed by
-applications programmers
-.IP \(bu 3
-A \*Qprivate\*U header file containing additional declarations needed by the
-widget and any subclasses
-.IP \(bu 3
-A source code file containing the implementation of the widget
-.LP
-This separation of functions into three files is suggested for all
-widgets, but nothing in the Toolkit actually requires this format.  In
-particular, a private widget created for a single application may easily
-combine the \*Qpublic\*U and \*Qprivate\*U header files into a single file, or
-merge the contents into another application header file.  Similarly, the
-widget implementation can be merged into other application code.
-.LP
-.sp
-In the following example, the public header file
-.Pn < X11/Xaw/Template.h >,
-the private header file
-.Pn < X11/Xaw/TemplateP.h >
-and the source code file
-.Pn < X11/Xaw/Template.c >
-will be modified to produce the \*QWindowWidget\*U described above.
-In each case, the files have been designed so that a global string
-replacement of ``Template'' and ``template''
-with the name of your new widget, using
-the appropriate case, can be done.
-.NH 2
-Public Header File
-.LP
-The public header file contains declarations that will be required by any
-application module that needs to refer to the widget; whether to create
-an instance of the class, to perform an
-.PN XtSetValues
-operation, or to call a public routine implemented by the widget class.
-.LP
-The contents of the Template public header file,
-.Pn < X11/Xaw/Template.h >,
-are:
-.de CB
-.sp
-.Ds 0
-.SM
-.vs 10
-.in +.25i
-.TA .25i 1.4i 2.4i 2.75i 3.5i
-.ta .25i 1.4i 2.4i 2.75i 3.5i
-..
-.de CE
-.NL
-.vs 13
-.De
-.\".in -.25i
-..
-.CB
-.\".so ../../lib/Xaw/Template.h
-/* XConsortium: Template.h,v 1.2 88/10/25 17:22:09 swick Exp $ */
-/* Copyright (c) X Consortium 1987, 1988 */
-
-#ifndef _Template_h
-#define _Template_h
-
-/****************************************************************
- *
- * Template widget
- *
- ****************************************************************/
-
-/* Resources:
-
- Name	Class		RepType	Default Value
- ----		-----		-------	-------------
- background	Background		Pixel	XtDefaultBackground
- border	BorderColor		Pixel	XtDefaultForeground
- borderWidth	BorderWidth		Dimension	1
- destroyCallback	Callback		Pointer	NULL
- height	Height		Dimension	0
- mappedWhenManaged	MappedWhenManaged	Boolean	True
- sensitive	Sensitive		Boolean	True
- width	Width		Dimension	0
- x		Position		Position	0
- y		Position		Position	0
-
-*/
-
-/* define any special resource names here that are not in <X11/StringDefs.h> */
-
-#define XtNtemplateResource "templateResource"
-
-#define XtCTemplateResource "TemplateResource"
-
-/* declare specific TemplateWidget class and instance datatypes */
-
-typedef struct _TemplateClassRec*	TemplateWidgetClass;
-typedef struct _TemplateRec*	TemplateWidget;
-
-/* declare the class constant */
-
-extern WidgetClass templateWidgetClass;
-
-#endif /* _Template_h */
-.CE
-.LP
-.sp
-You will notice that most of this file is documentation.  The crucial
-parts are the last 8 lines where macros for any private resource names
-and classes are defined and where the widget class datatypes and class
-record pointer are declared.
-.LP
-For the \*QWindowWidget\*U, we want 2 drawing colors, a callback list for
-user input and an
-\fBexposeCallback\fP callback list, and we will declare three
-convenience procedures, so we need to add
-.LP
-.sp
-.CB
-/* Resources:
-	...
- callback	Callback	Callback	NULL
- drawingColor1	Color	Pixel		XtDefaultForeground
- drawingColor2	Color	Pixel		XtDefaultForeground
- exposeCallback	Callback	Callback	NULL
- font		Font	XFontStruct*	XtDefaultFont
-	...
- */
-
-#define XtNdrawingColor1 "drawingColor1"
-#define XtNdrawingColor2 "drawingColor2"
-#define XtNexposeCallback "exposeCallback"
-
-extern Pixel WindowColor1(\|/* Widget */\|);
-extern Pixel WindowColor2(\|/* Widget */\|);
-extern Font\ \ WindowFont(\|/* Widget */\|);
-.CE
-.LP
-Note that we have chosen to call the input callback list by the generic
-name, \fBcallback\fP, rather than a specific name.  If widgets that define
-a single user-input action all choose the same resource name then there
-is greater possibility for an application to switch between widgets of
-different types.
-.NH 2
-Private Header File
-.LP
-The private header file contains the complete declaration of the class
-and instance structures for the widget and any additional private data
-that will be required by anticipated subclasses of the widget.
-Information in the private header file is normally hidden from the
-application and is designed to be accessed only through other public
-procedures; e.g.
-.PN XtSetValues .
-.LP
-The contents of the Template private header file,
-.Pn < X11/Xaw/TemplateP.h >,
-are:
-.CB
-.\".so ../../lib/Xaw/TemplateP.h
-/* XConsortium: TemplateP.h,v 1.2 88/10/25 17:31:47 swick Exp $ */
-
-/* Copyright (c) X Consortium 1987, 1988
- */
-
-#ifndef _TemplateP_h
-#define _TemplateP_h
-
-#include <X11/Xaw/Template.h>
-/* include superclass private header file */
-#include <X11/CoreP.h>
-
-/* define unique representation types not found in <X11/StringDefs.h> */
-
-#define XtRTemplateResource "TemplateResource"
-
-typedef struct {
-	int empty;
-} TemplateClassPart;
-
-typedef struct _TemplateClassRec {
-	CoreClassPart	core_class;
-	TemplateClassPart	template_class;
-} TemplateClassRec;
-
-extern TemplateClassRec templateClassRec;
-
-typedef struct {
-	/* resources */
-	char* resource;
-	/* private state */
-} TemplatePart;
-
-typedef struct _TemplateRec {
-	CorePart	core;
-	TemplatePart	template;
-} TemplateRec;
-
-#endif /* _TemplateP_h */
-.CE
-.LP
-.sp
-The private header file includes the private header file of its
-superclass, thereby exposing the entire internal structure of the widget.
-It may not always be advantageous to do this; your own project
-development style will dictate the appropriate level of detail to expose
-in each module.
-.LP
-The \*QWindowWidget\*U needs to declare two fields in its instance structure to
-hold the drawing colors, a resource field for the font and a field for the
-expose and user input callback lists:
-.CB
-typedef struct {
-	/* resources */
-	Pixel color_1;
-	Pixel color_2;
-	XFontStruct* font;
-	XtCallbackList expose_callback;
-	XtCallbackList input_callback;
-	/* private state */
-	/* (none) */
-} WindowPart;
-.CE
-.NH 2
-Widget Source File
-.LP
-The source code file implements the widget class itself.  The unique
-part of this file is the declaration and initialization of the
-widget class record structure and the declaration of all resources and
-action routines added by the widget class.
-.LP
-The contents of the Template implementation file,
-.Pn < X11/Xaw/Template.c >,
-are:
-.CB
-.\".so ../../lib/Xaw/Template.c
-/* XConsortium: Template.c,v 1.2 88/10/25 17:40:25 swick Exp $ */
-
-/* Copyright (c) X Consortium 1987, 1988
- */
-
-#include <X11/IntrinsicP.h>
-#include <X11/StringDefs.h>
-#include "TemplateP.h"
-
-static XtResource resources[] = {
-#define offset(field) XtOffsetOf(TemplateRec, template.field)
-	/* {name, class, type, size, offset, default_type, default_addr}, */
-    { XtNtemplateResource, XtCTemplateResource, XtRTemplateResource,
-	  sizeof(char*), offset(resource), XtRString, (XtPointer) "default" },
-#undef offset
-};
-
-static void TemplateAction(/* Widget, XEvent*, String*, Cardinal* */);
-
-static XtActionsRec actions[] =
-{
-	/* {name,	procedure}, */
-	{"template",	TemplateAction},
-};
-
-static char translations[] =
-"	<Key>:	template(\|) \\n\\
-";
-
-TemplateClassRec templateClassRec = {
-  { /* core fields */
-	/* superclass	*/	(WidgetClass) &widgetClassRec,
-	/* class_name	*/	"Template",
-	/* widget_size	*/	sizeof(TemplateRec),
-	/* class_initialize	*/	NULL,
-	/* class_part_initialize	*/	NULL,
-	/* class_inited	*/	FALSE,
-	/* initialize	*/	NULL,
-	/* initialize_hook	*/	NULL,
-	/* realize	*/	XtInheritRealize,
-	/* actions	*/	actions,
-	/* num_actions	*/	XtNumber(actions),
-	/* resources	*/	resources,
-	/* num_resources	*/	XtNumber(resources),
-	/* xrm_class	*/	NULLQUARK,
-	/* compress_motion	*/	TRUE,
-	/* compress_exposure	*/	TRUE,
-	/* compress_enterleave */	TRUE,
-	/* visible_interest	*/	FALSE,
-	/* destroy	*/	NULL,
-	/* resize	*/	NULL,
-	/* expose	*/	NULL,
-	/* set_values	*/	NULL,
-	/* set_values_hook	*/	NULL,
-	/* set_values_almost	*/	XtInheritSetValuesAlmost,
-	/* get_values_hook	*/	NULL,
-	/* accept_focus	*/	NULL,
-	/* version	*/	XtVersion,
-	/* callback_private	*/	NULL,
-	/* tm_table	*/	translations,
-	/* query_geometry	*/	XtInheritQueryGeometry,
-	/* display_accelerator	*/	XtInheritDisplayAccelerator,
-	/* extension	*/	NULL
-  },
-  { /* template fields */
-	/* empty	*/	0
-  }
-};
-
-WidgetClass templateWidgetClass = (WidgetClass)&templateClassRec;
-
-.CE
-The resource list for the \*QWindowWidget\*U might look like the following:
-.CB
-static XtResource resources[] = {
-#define offset(field) XtOffsetOf(WindowWidgetRec, window.field)
-	/* {name, class, type, size, offset, default_type, default_addr}, */
-	{ XtNdrawingColor1, XtCColor, XtRPixel, sizeof(Pixel),
-		  offset(color_1), XtRString, XtDefaultForeground },
-	{ XtNdrawingColor2, XtCColor, XtRPixel, sizeof(Pixel),
-		  offset(color_2), XtRString, XtDefaultForeground },
-	{ XtNfont, XtCFont, XtRFontStruct, sizeof(XFontStruct*),
-		  offset(font), XtRString, XtDefaultFont },
-	{ XtNexposeCallback, XtCCallback, XtRCallback, sizeof(XtCallbackList),
-		  offset(expose_callback), XtRCallback, NULL },
-	{ XtNcallback, XtCCallback, XtRCallback, sizeof(XtCallbackList),
-		  offset(input_callback), XtRCallback, NULL },
-#undef offset
-};
-.CE
-.LP
-The user input callback will be implemented by an action procedure which
-passes the event pointer as call_data.  The action procedure
-is declared as:
-.CB
-/* ARGSUSED */
-static void InputAction(w, event, params, num_params)
-	Widget w;
-	XEvent *event;
-	String *params;		/* unused */
-	Cardinal *num_params;	/* unused */
-{
-	XtCallCallbacks(w, XtNcallback, (XtPointer)event);
-}
-
-static XtActionsRec actions[] =
-{
-	/* {name,	procedure}, */
-	{"input",	InputAction},
-};
-.CE
-.LP
-and the default input binding will be to execute the input callbacks on
-.PN KeyPress
-and
-.PN ButtonPress :
-.LP
-.CB
-static char translations[] =
-"	<Key>:	input(\|) \\n\\
- 	<BtnDown>:	input(\|) \\
-";
-.CE
-.LP
-In the class record declaration and initialization, the only field that
-is different from the Template is the expose procedure:
-.CB
-/* ARGSUSED */
-static void Redisplay(w, event, region)
-	Widget w;
-	XEvent *event;	/* unused */
-	Region region;
-{
-	XtCallCallbacks(w, XtNexposeCallback, (XtPointer)region);
-}
-
-WindowClassRec windowClassRec = {
-
-	...
-
-	/* expose	*/	Redisplay,
-.CE
-.LP
-.sp
-The \*QWindowWidget\*U will also declare three public procedures to return the
-drawing colors and the font id, saving the application the effort of
-constructing an argument list for a call to
-.PN XtGetValues :
-.LP
-.CB
-Pixel WindowColor1(w)
-	Widget w;
-{
-	return ((WindowWidget)w)->window.color_1;
-}
-
-Pixel WindowColor2(w)
-	Widget w;
-{
-	return ((WindowWidget)w)->window.color_2;
-}
-
-Font WindowFont(w)
-	Widget w;
-{
-	return ((WindowWidget)w)->window.font->fid;
-}
-.CE
-.LP
-The \*QWindowWidget\*U is now complete.  The application can retrieve the two
-drawing colors from the widget instance by calling either
-.PN XtGetValues ,
-or the \fBWindowColor\fP functions.  The actual window created for the
-\*QWindowWidget\*U is available by calling the
-.PN XtWindow
-function.
-.ds LH
-.ds CH
-.ds RH
-.nr PN +1
-.XS
-Index
-.XE
-.tm .pn \n(PN
-.nr PN -1
-.\" print Table of Contents
-.if o .bp \" blank page to make count even
-.bp 3
-.af PN i
-.PX
diff --git a/libXaw/spec/Text b/libXaw/spec/Text
deleted file mode 100644
index 7fea09a19..000000000
--- a/libXaw/spec/Text
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,123 +0,0 @@
-.\" $Xorg: Text,v 1.3 2000/08/17 19:42:28 cpqbld Exp $
-.NH 2
-Text Widget
-.LP
-.XS
-	Text Widget
-.XE
-.IN "Text widget" "" "@DEF@"
-.LP
-.Ds 0
-.TA 2.0i
-.ta 2.0i
-Application Header file	<X11/Xaw/Text.h>
-.IN "Text.h" ""
-Class Header file	<X11/Xaw/TextP.h>
-.IN "TextP.h" ""
-Class		textWidgetClass
-.IN "textWidgetClass" ""
-Class Name	Text
-.IN "Text widget" "class name"
-Superclass	Simple
-.De
-.sp 1
-.LP
-The Text widget is the glue that binds all the other pieces together, it
-maintains the internal state of the displayed text, and acts as a
-mediator between the source and sink.
-.LP
-This section lists the resources that are actually part of the
-Text widget, and explains the functionality provided by each.
-.NH 3
-Resources
-.LP
-When creating a Text widget instance, the following resources are
-retrieved from the argument list or from the resource database:
-.LP
-.IN "Text widget" "resources"
-.TS H
-expand;
-lw(1i) lw(1i) lw(1.1i) lw(.5i) lw(1.9i).
-_
-.sp 3p
-.TB
-Name	Class	Type	Notes	Default Value
-.sp 3p
-_
-.TH
-.R
-.sp 3p
-accelerators	Accelerators	AcceleratorTable		NULL
-ancestorSensitive	AncestorSensitive	Boolean	D	True
-autoFill	AutoFill	Boolean		False
-background	Background	Pixel		XtDefaultBackground
-backgroundPixmap	Pixmap	Pixmap		XtUnspecifiedPixmap
-borderColor	BorderColor	Pixel		XtDefaultForeground
-borderPixmap	Pixmap	Pixmap		XtUnspecifiedPixmap
-borderWidth	BorderWidth	Dimension		1
-bottomMargin	Margin	Position		2
-colormap	Colormap	Colormap		Parent's Colormap
-cursor	Cursor	Cursor		XC_xterm
-cursorName	Cursor	String		NULL
-depth	Depth	int	C	Parent's Depth
-destroyCallback	Callback	XtCallbackList		NULL
-displayCaret	Output	Boolean		True
-displayPosition	TextPosition	XawTextPosition		0
-height	Height	Dimension	A	Font height + margins
-insensitiveBorder	Insensitive	Pixmap		GreyPixmap
-insertPosition	TextPosition	int		0
-leftMargin	Margin	Position		2
-mappedWhenManaged	MappedWhenManaged	Boolean		True
-pointerColor	Foreground	Pixel		XtDefaultForeground
-pointerColorBackground	Background	Pixel		XtDefaultBackground
-resize	Resize	XawTextResizeMode		XawtextResizeNever
-rightMargin	Margin	Position		4
-screen	Screen	Pointer	R	Parent's Screen
-scrollHorizontal	Scroll	ScrollMode		XawtextScrollNever
-scrollVertical	Scroll	XawTextScrollMode		XawtextScrollNever
-selectTypes	SelectTypes	XawTextSelectType*		See above
-sensitive	Sensitive	Boolean		True
-textSink	TextSink	Widget		NULL
-textSource	TextSource	Widget		NULL
-topMargin	Margin	Position		2
-translations	Translations	TranslationTable		See above
-unrealizeCallback	Callback	XtCallbackList		NULL
-width	Width	Dimension		100
-wrap	Wrap	WrapMode		XawtextWrapNever
-x	Position	Position		0
-y	Position	Position		0
-.sp 3p
-_
-.TE
-.Ac
-.As
-.Af Bold
-.Bg
-.Gp
-.Bc
-.Bp
-.Bw
-.Tm Bold
-.Cm
-.Cu
-.Cn
-.Dp
-.Dc
-.Tc Bold
-.Td Bold
-.Hw
-.Ib
-.Ti Bold
-.Mm
-.Pf
-.Pb
-.Tz Bold
-.Sc
-.Ts Bold
-.St Bold
-.Se
-.To Bold
-.Tr
-.Tw Bold
-.Tu Bold
-.Xy
diff --git a/libXaw/spec/TextActions b/libXaw/spec/TextActions
deleted file mode 100644
index 69c89c9ac..000000000
--- a/libXaw/spec/TextActions
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,506 +0,0 @@
-.\" $Xorg: TextActions,v 1.3 2000/08/17 19:42:28 cpqbld Exp $
-.NH 2
-Text Widget Actions
-.LP
-.IN "Text widget" "actions"
-.XS
-	Actions Supported by all Text Widgets
-.XE
-.IN "Text widget" "actions" "@DEF@"
-
-All editing functions are performed by translation manager actions that may
-be specified through the \fBtranslations\fP resource in the Text widget.
-.LP
-.sp
-.Ds 0
-.TA .5i 2.5i 3i
-.ta .5i 2.5i 3i
-Insert Point Movement	Delete
-	forward-character		delete-next-character
-	backward-character		delete-previous-character
-	forward-word		delete-next-word
-	backward-word		delete-previous-word
-	forward-paragraph		delete-selection
-	backward-paragraph
-	beginning-of-line
-	end-of-line	Selection
-	next-line		select-word
-	previous-line		select-all
-	next-page		select-start
-	previous-page		select-adjust
-	beginning-of-file		select-end
-	end-of-file		extend-start
-	scroll-one-line-up		extend-adjust
-	scroll-one-line-down		extend-end
-			insert-selection
-
-
-Miscellaneous	New Line
-	redraw-display		newline-and-indent
-	insert-file		newline-and-backup
-	insert-char		newline
-	insert-string
-	display-caret
-	focus-in	Kill
-	focus-in		kill-word
-	search			backward-kill-word
-	multiply		kill-selection
-	form-paragraph		kill-to-end-of-line
-	transpose-characters		kill-paragraph
-	no-op		kill-to-end-of-paragraph
-	XawWMProtocols
-	reconnect-im
-.De
-.sp
-.LP
-Most of the actions take no arguments, and unless otherwise noted you
-may assume this to be the case.
-.LP
-.NH 3
-Cursor Movement Actions\fP
-.LP
-.sp
-.IP forward-character(\|) 2.0i
-.br
-.ns
-.IP backward-character(\|) 2.0i
-These actions move the insert point forward or backward one character in
-the buffer.  If the insert point is at the end or beginning of a line
-this action will move the insert point to the next (or previous) line.
-.IP forward-word(\|) 2.0i
-.br
-.ns
-.IP backward-word(\|) 2.0i
-These actions move the insert point to the next or previous word boundary.
-A word boundary is defined as a Space, Tab or Carriage Return.
-.IP forward-paragraph(\|) 2.0i
-.br
-.ns
-.IP backward-paragraph(\|) 2.0i
-These actions move the insert point to the next or previous paragraph boundary.
-A paragraph boundary is defined as two Carriage Returns in a row with only
-Spaces or Tabs between them.
-.IP beginning-of-line(\|) 2.0i
-.br
-.ns
-.IP end-of-line(\|) 2.0i
-These actions move to the beginning or end of the current line.  If the
-insert point is already at the end or beginning of the line then no action is taken.
-.IP next-line(\|) 2.0i
-.br
-.ns
-.IP previous-line(\|) 2.0i
-These actions move the insert point up or down one line.  If the insert
-point is currently N characters from the beginning of the line then it
-will be N characters from the beginning of the next or previous line.
-If N is past the end of the line, the insert point is placed at the end
-of the line.
-.IP next-page(\|) 2.0i
-.br
-.ns
-.IP previous-page(\|) 2.0i
-These actions move the insert point up or down one page in the file.
-One page is defined as the current height of the text widget.  The
-insert point is always placed at the first character of the top line by
-this action.
-.IP beginning-of-file(\|) 2.0i
-.br
-.ns
-.IP end-of-file(\|) 2.0i
-These actions place the insert point at the beginning or end of the
-current text buffer.  The text widget is then scrolled the minimum
-amount necessary to make the new insert point location visible.
-.IP scroll-one-line-up(\|) 2.0i
-.br
-.ns
-.IP scroll-one-line-down(\|) 2.0i
-These actions scroll the current text field up or down by one line.
-They do not move the insert point.  Other than the scrollbars this is
-the only way that the insert point may be moved off of the visible text
-area.  The widget will be scrolled so that the insert point is back on
-the screen as soon as some other action is executed.
-.NH 3
-Delete Actions
-.LP
-.sp
-.IP delete-next-character(\|) 2.0i
-.br
-.ns
-.IP delete-previous-character(\|) 2.0i
-These actions remove the character immediately before or after the
-insert point.  If a Carriage Return is removed then the next line is
-appended to the end of the current line.
-.IP delete-next-word(\|) 2.0i
-.br
-.ns
-.IP delete-previous-word(\|) 2.0i
-These actions remove all characters between the insert point location and
-the next word boundary.  A word boundary is defined as a Space, Tab or
-Carriage Return.
-.IP delete-selection(\|) 2.0i
-This action removes all characters in the current selection.
-The selection can be set with the selection actions.
-.NH 3
-Selection Actions
-.LP
-.sp
-.IP select-word(\|) 2.0i
-This action selects the word in which the insert point is currently located.
-If the insert point is between words then it will select the previous word.
-.IP select-all(\|) 2.0i
-This action selects the entire text buffer.
-.IP select-start(\|) 2.0i
-This action sets the insert point to the current pointer location (if
-triggered by a button event) or text cursor location (if triggered by
-a key event).  It
-will then begin a selection at this location.  If many of these
-selection actions occur quickly in succession then the selection count
-mechanism will be invoked (see the section titled \fBText Selections for
-Application Programmers\fP for details).
-.IP select-adjust(\|) 2.0i
-This action allows a selection started with the \fIselect-start\fP
-action to be modified, as described above.
-.IP select-end(\fIname\fP[,\fIname\fP,...]) 2.0i
-This action ends a text selection that began with the \fIselect-start\fP
-action, and asserts ownership of the selection or selections specified.
-A \fIname\fP can be a selection (e.g., \fBPRIMARY\fP) or a cut buffer
-(e.g., \fBCUT_BUFFER0\fP).  Note that case is important.  If no
-\fInames\fP are specified, \fBPRIMARY\fP is asserted.
-.IP extend-start(\|) 2.0i
-This action finds the nearest end of the current selection, and moves it
-to the current pointer location (if triggered by a button event) or text
-cursor location (if triggered by a key event).
-.IP extend-adjust(\|) 2.0i
-This action allows a selection started with an \fIextend-start\fP action
-to be modified.
-.IP extend-end(\fIname\fP[,\fIname\fP,...]) 2.0i
-This action ends a text selection that began with the \fIextend-start\fP
-action, and asserts ownership of the selection or selections specified.
-A \fIname\fP can be a selection (e.g. \fBPRIMARY\fP) or a cut buffer
-(e.g \fBCUT_BUFFER0\fP).  Note that case is important.  If no names are
-given, \fBPRIMARY\fP is asserted.
-.IP insert-selection(\fIname\fP[,\fIname\fP,...]) 2.0i
-This action retrieves the value of the first (left-most) named selection
-that exists or the cut buffer that is not empty and inserts it into the
-Text widget at the current insert point location. A \fIname\fP can be a
-selection (e.g. \fBPRIMARY\fP) or a cut buffer (e.g \fBCUT_BUFFER0\fP).
-Note that case is important.
-.NH 3
-The New Line Actions
-.LP
-.sp
-.IP newline-and-indent(\|) 2.0i
-This action inserts a newline into the text and adds spaces to
-that line to indent it to match the previous line.
-.IP newline-and-backup(\|) 2.0i
-This action inserts a newline into the text \fIafter\fP the insert point.
-.IP newline(\|) 2.0i
-This action inserts a newline into the text \fIbefore\fP the insert point.
-.NH 3
-Kill and Actions
-.LP
-.sp
-.IP kill-word(\|) 2.0i
-.br
-.ns
-.IP backward-kill-word(\|) 2.0i
-These actions act exactly like the \fIdelete-next-word\fP and
-\fIdelete-previous-word\fP actions, but they stuff the word that was
-killed into the kill buffer (\fBCUT_BUFFER_1\fP).
-.IP kill-selection(\|) 2.0i
-This action deletes the current selection and stuffs the deleted text into
-the kill buffer (\fBCUT_BUFFER_1\fP).
-.IP kill-to-end-of-line(\|) 2.0i
-This action deletes the entire line to the right of the insert point position,
-and stuffs the deleted text into the kill buffer (\fBCUT_BUFFER_1\fP).
-.IP kill-paragraph(\|) 2.0i
-This action deletes the current paragraph, if between paragraphs it deletes
-the paragraph above the insert point, and stuffs the deleted text into
-the kill buffer (\fBCUT_BUFFER_1\fP).
-.IP kill-to-end-of-paragraph(\|) 2.0i
-This action deletes everything between the current insert point location and
-the next paragraph boundary, and stuffs the deleted text into the kill
-buffer (\fBCUT_BUFFER_1\fP).
-.NH 3
-Miscellaneous Actions
-.LP
-.sp 1
-.IP redraw-display(\|) 2.0i
-This action recomputes the location of all the text lines on the
-display, scrolls the text to vertically center the line containing the insert point
-on the screen, clears the entire screen, and redisplays it.
-.IP insert-file([\fIfilename\fP]) 2.0i
-This action activates the insert file popup.  The \fIfilename\fP
-option specifies the default filename to put in the filename buffer of
-the popup.  If no \fIfilename\fP is specified the buffer is empty
-at startup.
-.IP insert-char(\|) 2.0i
-This action may only be attached to a key event. When the
-\fBinternational\fP resource is \fBfalse\fP, this action
-calls XLookupString to translate the event into a (rebindable) Latin-1
-character (sequence) and inserts it into the text at the
-insert point.  When the \fBinternational\fP resource is \fBtrue\fP,
-characters are passed to the input method via XwcLookupString, and any
-committed string returned is inserted into the text at the insert point.
-.IP insert-string(\fIstring\fP[,\fIstring\fP,...]) 2.0i
-This action inserts each \fIstring\fP into the text
-at the insert point location.  Any \fIstring\fP
-beginning with the characters "0x" followed by an even
-number of hexadecimal digits is
-interpreted as a hexadecimal constant and the
-corresponding string is inserted instead.  This
-hexadecimal string may represent up to 50 8-bit characters.
- When the\fBinternational\fP resource is
-\fBtrue\fP, a hexadecimal string is intrepeted as
-being in a multi-byte encoding, and a hexadecimal
-or regular string will result in an error message
-if it is not legal in the current locale.
-.IP display-caret(\fIstate\fP,\fIwhen\fP) 2.0i
-This action allows the insert point to be turned on and off.
-The \fIstate\fP argument specifies the desired state of the insert point.
-This value may be any of the string
-values accepted for Boolean resources (e.g. \fBon\fP, \fBTrue\fP,
-\fBoff\fP, \fBFalse\fP, etc.).  If no arguments are specified, the
-default value is \fBTrue\fP.
-The \fIwhen\fP argument specifies, for \fBEnterNotify\fP or \fBLeaveNotify\fP
-events whether or not the focus field in the event is to be examined.
-If the second argument is not specified, or specified as something other
-than \fBalways\fP then if the action is bound to an  \fBEnterNotify\fP
-or \fBLeaveNotify\fP event, the action will be taken only if the focus
-field is \fBTrue\fP.  An augmented binding that might be useful is:
-.LP
-.Ds 0
-.TA 2.0i 2.5i 4.0i
-.ta 2.0i 2.5i 4.0i
-	*Text.Translations: #override \\
-		<FocusIn>:	display-caret(on) \\n\\
-		<FocusOut>:	display-caret(off)
-.De
-.IP focus-in(\|) 2.0i
-.br
-.ns
-.IP focus-out(\|) 2.0i
-These actions do not currently do anything.
-.IP search(\fIdirection\fP,[\fIstring\fP]) 2.0i
-This action activates the search popup.  The \fIdirection\fP must be
-specified as either \fBforward\fP or \fBbackward\fP.  The string is
-optional and is used as an initial value for the \fISearch for\fP: string.
-For further explanation of the search widget see the section on
-\fBText Searches\fP.
-.IP multiply(\fIvalue\fP) 2.0i
-The multiply action allows the user to multiply the effects of many of
-the text actions.  Thus the following action sequence
-\fImultiply(10) delete-next-word()\fP will delete 10 words.  It does not
-matter whether these actions take place in one event or many events.
-Using the default translations the key sequence \fIControl-u,
-Control-d\fP will delete 4 characters.
-Multiply actions can be chained, thus \fImultiply(5)
-multiply(5)\fP is the same as \fImultiply(25)\fP.  If the string
-\fBreset\fP is passed to the multiply action the effects of all previous
-multiplies are removed and a beep is sent to the display.
-.IP form-paragraph(\|) 2.0i
-This action removes all the Carriage Returns from the current
-paragraph and reinserts them so that each line is as long as possible, while
-still fitting on the current screen.  Lines are broken at word boundaries if
-at all possible.  This action currently works only on Text widgets
-that use ASCII text.
-.IP transpose-characters(\|) 2.0i
-This action will swap the position of the character to the left of the
-insert point with the character to the right of the insert point.  The insert point will then
-be advanced one character.
-.IP no-op([\fIaction\fP]) 2.0i
-The no-op action makes no change to the text widget, and is mainly used
-to override translations.  This action takes one optional argument.  If
-this argument is \fIRingBell\fP then a beep is sent to the display.
-.IP XawWMProtocols([\fIwm_protocol_name\fP]) 2.0i
-.IN "XawWMProtocols"
-.sp
-This action is written specifically for the file insertion and the search
-and replace
-dialog boxes.  This action is attached to those shells by the Text widget,
-in order to handle ClientMessage events with the WM_PROTOCOLS atom in the
-detail field.  This action supports WM_DELETE_WINDOW on the Text widget
-popups, and may support other window manager protocols if necessary in
-the future.  The popup will be dismissed if the window manager sends
-a WM_DELETE_WINDOW request and there are no parameters in the action
-call, which is the default.  The popup will also be dismissed if the
-parameters include the string ``wm_delete_window,'' and the event is a
-ClientMessage event requesting dismissal or is not a ClientMessage event.
-This action is not sensitive to the case of the strings passed as parameters.
-.IP reconnect-im() 2.0i
-.IN "Input Method"
-When the \fBinternational\fP resource is \fBtrue\fP,
-input is usually passed to an input method, a separate
-process, for composing.  Sometimes the connection to
-this process gets severed; this action will attempt to
-reconnect it.  Causes for severage include network
-trouble, and the user explicitly killing one input
-method and starting a new one.  This action may also
-establish first connection when the application is
-started before the input method.
-.NH 3
-Text Selections for Application Programmers
-.IN "Text widget" "Text Selections for Application Programmers"
-.LP
-The default behavior of the text selection array is described in the
-section called \fBText Selections for Users\fP.  To modify the selections
-a programmer must construct a \fBXawTextSelectType\fP array (called the
-selection array), containing the selections desired, and pass this as
-the new value for the \fBselectionTypes\fP resource.  The selection
-array may also be modified using the \fBXawTextSetSelectionArray\fP
-.IN "XawTextSetSelectionArray" ""
-function.  All selection arrays must end with the value
-\fBXawselectNull\fP.  The \fBselectionTypes\fP resource has no converter
-registered and cannot be modified through the resource manager.
-.LP
-The array contains a list of entries that will be called when the user
-attempts to select text in rapid succession with the \fIselect-start\fP
-action (usually by clicking a pointer button).  The first entry in the
-selection array will be used when the \fIselect-start\fP action is
-initially called.  The next entry will be used when \fIselect-start\fP
-is called again, and so on.  If a timeout value (1/10 of a second) is
-exceeded, the the next \fIselect-start\fP action will begin at the top
-of the selection array.  When \fBXawselectNull\fP is reached the array
-is recycled beginning with the first element.
-.TS
-lw(1.25i) lw(4.25i).
-T{
-\fBXawselectAll\fP
-.IN "XawselectAll" ""
-T}	T{
-Selects the contents of the entire buffer.
-T}
-.sp 6p
-T{
-\fBXawselectChar\fP
-.IN "XawselectChar" ""
-T}	T{
-Selects text characters as the pointer moves over them.
-T}
-.sp 6p
-T{
-\fBXawselectLine\fP
-.IN "XawselectLine" ""
-T}	T{
-Selects the entire line.
-T}
-.sp 6p
-T{
-\fBXawselectNull\fP
-.IN "XawselectNull" ""
-T}	T{
-Indicates the end of the selection array.
-T}
-.sp 6p
-T{
-\fBXawselectParagraph\fP
-.IN "XawselectParagraph" ""
-T}	T{
-Selects the entire paragraph.
-T}
-.sp 6p
-T{
-\fBXawselectPosition\fP
-.IN "XawselectPosition" ""
-T}	T{
-Selects the current pointer position.
-T}
-.sp 6p
-T{
-\fBXawselectWord\fP
-.IN "XawselectWord" ""
-T}	T{
-Selects whole words as the pointer moves onto them.
-T}
-.TE
-.LP
-The default selectType array is:
-.LP
-.sp
-.Ds 0
-{XawselectPosition, XawselectWord, XawselectLine, XawselectParagraph, XawselectAll, XawselectNull}
-.De
-.sp
-.LP
-The selection array is not copied by the text widgets.  The
-application must allocate space for the array and cannot deallocate or
-change it until the text widget is destroyed or until a new selection
-array is set.
-.NH 2
-Default Translation Bindings
-.LP
-.XS
-	Default Translation Bindings
-.XE
-.IN "Text widget" "default translations"
-The following translations are defaults built into every Text widget.
-They can be overridden, or replaced by specifying a new value for the
-Text widget's \fBtranslations\fP resource.
-.LP
-.sp
-.Ds 0
-.TA .5i 2.5i
-.ta .5i 2.5i
-	Ctrl<Key>A:	beginning-of-line(\|) \\n\\
-	Ctrl<Key>B:	backward-character(\|) \\n\\
-	Ctrl<Key>D:	delete-next-character(\|) \\n\\
-	Ctrl<Key>E:	end-of-line(\|) \\n\\
-	Ctrl<Key>F:	forward-character(\|) \\n\\
-	Ctrl<Key>G:	multiply(Reset) \\n\\
-	Ctrl<Key>H:	delete-previous-character(\|) \\n\\
-	Ctrl<Key>J:	newline-and-indent(\|) \\n\\
-	Ctrl<Key>K:	kill-to-end-of-line(\|) \\n\\
-	Ctrl<Key>L:	redraw-display(\|) \\n\\
-	Ctrl<Key>M:	newline(\|) \\n\\
-	Ctrl<Key>N:	next-line(\|) \\n\\
-	Ctrl<Key>O:	newline-and-backup(\|) \\n\\
-	Ctrl<Key>P:	previous-line(\|) \\n\\
-	Ctrl<Key>R:	search(backward) \\n\\
-	Ctrl<Key>S:	search(forward) \\n\\
-	Ctrl<Key>T:	transpose-characters(\|) \\n\\
-	Ctrl<Key>U:	multiply(4) \\n\\
-	Ctrl<Key>V:	next-page(\|) \\n\\
-	Ctrl<Key>W:	kill-selection(\|) \\n\\
-	Ctrl<Key>Y:	insert-selection(CUT_BUFFER1) \\n\\
-	Ctrl<Key>Z:	scroll-one-line-up(\|) \\n\\
-	Ctrl<Key>\\:	reconnect-im(\|) \\n\\
-	Meta<Key>B:	backward-word(\|) \\n\\
-	Meta<Key>F:	forward-word(\|) \\n\\
-	Meta<Key>I:	insert-file(\|) \\n\\
-	Meta<Key>K:	kill-to-end-of-paragraph(\|) \\n\\
-	Meta<Key>Q:	form-paragraph(\|) \\n\\
-	Meta<Key>V:	previous-page(\|) \\n\\
-	Meta<Key>Y:	insert-selection(PRIMARY, CUT_BUFFER0) \\n\\
-	Meta<Key>Z:	scroll-one-line-down(\|) \\n\\
-	:Meta<Key>d:	delete-next-word(\|) \\n\\
-	:Meta<Key>D:	kill-word(\|) \\n\\
-	:Meta<Key>h:	delete-previous-word(\|) \\n\\
-	:Meta<Key>H:	backward-kill-word(\|) \\n\\
-	:Meta<Key>\\<:	beginning-of-file(\|) \\n\\
-	:Meta<Key>\\>:	end-of-file(\|) \\n\\
-	:Meta<Key>]:	forward-paragraph(\|) \\n\\
-	:Meta<Key>[:	backward-paragraph(\|) \\n\\
-	~Shift Meta<Key>Delete:		delete-previous-word(\|) \\n\\
-	\ Shift Meta<Key>Delete:		backward-kill-word(\|) \\n\\
-	~Shift Meta<Key>Backspace:	delete-previous-word(\|) \\n\\
-	\ Shift Meta<Key>Backspace:	backward-kill-word(\|) \\n\\
-	<Key>Right:	forward-character(\|) \\n\\
-	<Key>Left:	backward-character(\|) \\n\\
-	<Key>Down:	next-line(\|) \\n\\
-	<Key>Up:	previous-line(\|) \\n\\
-	<Key>Delete:	delete-previous-character(\|) \\n\\
-	<Key>BackSpace:	delete-previous-character(\|) \\n\\
-	<Key>Linefeed:	newline-and-indent(\|) \\n\\
-	<Key>Return:	newline(\|) \\n\\
-	<Key>:		insert-char(\|) \\n\\
-	<Key>Kanji:	reconnect-im(\|) \\n\\
-	<FocusIn>:	focus-in(\|) \\n\\
-	<FocusOut>:	focus-out(\|) \\n\\
-	<Btn1Down>:	select-start(\|) \\n\\
-	<Btn1Motion>:	extend-adjust(\|) \\n\\
-	<Btn1Up>:	extend-end(PRIMARY, CUT_BUFFER0) \\n\\
-	<Btn2Down>:	insert-selection(PRIMARY, CUT_BUFFER0) \\n\\
-	<Btn3Down>:	extend-start(\|) \\n\\
-	<Btn3Motion>:	extend-adjust(\|) \\n\\
-	<Btn3Up>:	extend-end(PRIMARY, CUT_BUFFER0) \\n
-.De
diff --git a/libXaw/spec/TextCustom b/libXaw/spec/TextCustom
deleted file mode 100644
index fbb656970..000000000
--- a/libXaw/spec/TextCustom
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,63 +0,0 @@
-.NH 2
-Customizing the Text Widget
-.LP
-.XS
-	Customizing the Text Widget
-.XE
-.IN "Text widget" "customizing" "@DEF@"
-.LP
-The remainder of this chapter will describe customizing the Text
-widget.  The Text widget may be customized by subclassing, or by
-creating new sources and sinks.  Subclassing is described in
-detail in Chapter 7; this section will describe only those things that
-are specific to the Text widget.  Attributes of the Text widget base
-class and creating new sources and sinks will be discussed.
-.LP
-The Text widget is made up of a number of different pieces, with the
-Text widget as the base widget class.  It and the AsciiText widget are
-the only true "widgets" in the Text widget family.  The other pieces
-(sources and sinks) are X Toolkit objects and have no window
-associated with them.  No source or sink is useful unless assigned to
-a Text widget.
-.LP
-Each of the following pieces of the Text widget has a specific purpose,
-and will be, or has been, discussed in detail in this chapter:
-.IN "Text widget" ""
-.IP \fBText\fP 15
-This is the glue that binds everything else together.  This widget reads
-the text data from the source, and displays the information in the sink.
-All translations and actions are handled in the Text widget itself.
-.IN "TextSink object" ""
-.IP \fBTextSink\fP 15
-This object is responsible for displaying and clearing the drawing area.
-It also reports the configuration of the window that contains the
-drawing area.  The TextSink does not have its own window; instead it does
-its drawing on the Text widget's window.
-.IN "TextSrc object" ""
-.IP \fBTextSrc\fP 15
-This object is responsible for reading, editing and searching through the
-text buffer.
-.IN "AsciiSink object" ""
-.IP \fBAsciiSink\fP 15
-This object is a subclass of the TextSink and knows how to display
-ASCII text.  Support has been added to display any 8-bit character set, given
-the font.
-.IN "MultiSink object" ""
-.IP \fBMultiSink\fP 15
-This object is a subclass of the TextSink and knows how to display
-font sets.
-.IN "AsciiSrc object" ""
-.IP \fBAsciiSrc\fP 15
-This object is a subclass of the TextSrc and knows how to read strings
-and files.
-.IN "MultiSrc object" ""
-.IP \fBMultiSrc\fP 15
-This object is a subclass of the TextSrc and knows how to read strings
-and multibyte files, converting them to wide characters based on locale.
-.IN "AsciiText widget" ""
-.IP \fBAsciiText\fP 15
-This widget is a subclass of the Text widget.  When created, the AsciiText
-automatically creates and attaches either an AsciiSrc and AsciiSink, or a
-MultiSrc and MultiSink, to itself.  The AsciiText provides the simplest
-interface to the Athena Text widgets.
-
diff --git a/libXaw/spec/TextFuncs b/libXaw/spec/TextFuncs
deleted file mode 100644
index ea26068a5..000000000
--- a/libXaw/spec/TextFuncs
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,397 +0,0 @@
-.\" $Xorg: TextFuncs,v 1.3 2000/08/17 19:42:28 cpqbld Exp $
-.NH 2
-Text Functions
-.XS
-	Text Functions
-.XE
-.LP
-The following functions are provided as convenience routines for use with
-the Text widget.  Although many of these actions can be performed by
-modifying resources, these interfaces are frequently more efficient.
-.LP
-These data structures are defined in the Text widget's public header file,
-<X11/Xaw/Text.h>.
-.LP
-.IN "XawTextPosition" "" "@DEF@"
-typedef long XawTextPosition;
-.sp
-.LP
-Character positions in the Text widget begin at 0 and end at n, where
-n is the number of characters in the Text source widget.
-.LP
-.IN "XawTextBlock" "" "@DEF@"
-.Ds 0
-.TA .5i 1.5i 2.25i
-.ta .5i 1.5i 2.25i
-typedef struct {
-	int \fIfirstPos\fP;
-	int \fIlength\fP;
-	char *\fIptr\fP;
-	unsigned long \fIformat\fP;
-} XawTextBlock, *XawTextBlockPtr;
-.De
-.LP
-.IN "XawTextBlockPtr" ""
-.IP \fIfirstPos\fP 1.0i
-The first position, or index, to use within the \fIptr\fP field.
-The value is commonly zero.
-.IP \fIlength\fP 1.0i
-The number of characters to be used from the \fIptr\fP field.
-The number of characters used is commonly the number of characters
-in \fIptr\fP, and must not be greater than the length of the string
-in \fIptr\fP.
-.IP \fIptr\fP 1.0i
-Contains the string to be referenced by the Text widget.
-.IP \fIformat\fP 1.0i
-This flag indicates whether the data pointed to by \fBptr\fP is char
-or wchar_t.  When the associated widget has \fBinternational\fP set
-to \fBfalse\fP this field must be XawFmt8Bit.  When the associated
-widget has \fBinternational\fP set to \fBtrue\fP this field must be
-either XawFmt8Bit or XawFmtWide.
-.LP
-Note: Previous versions of Xaw used
-.PN FMT8BIT ,
-which has been retained for backwards compatibility. \fBFMT8BIT\fP is
-deprecated and will eventually be removed from the implementation.
-.NH 3
-Selecting Text
-.LP
-To select a piece of text, use
-.PN XawTextSetSelection :
-.IN "XawTextSetSelection" "" "@DEF@"
-.FD 0
-void XawTextSetSelection(\fIw\fP, \fIleft\fP, \fIright\fP)
-.br
-     Widget \fIw\fP;
-.br
-     XawTextPosition \fIleft\fP, \fIright\fP;
-.FN
-.IP \fIw\fP 1i
-Specifies the Text widget.
-.IP \fIleft\fP 1i
-Specifies the character position at which the selection begins.
-.IP \fIright\fP 1i
-Specifies the character position at which the selection ends.
-.LP
-See section 5.4 for a description of \fBXawTextPosition\fP.
-If redisplay is enabled, this function highlights the text and
-makes it the \fBPRIMARY\fP selection.  This function does not have any
-effect on \fBCUT_BUFFER0\fP.
-.LP
-.NH 3
-Unhighlighting Text
-.LP
-To unhighlight previously highlighted text in a widget, use
-\fBXawTextUnsetSelection\fP:
-.IN "XawTextUnsetSelection" "" "@DEF@"
-.FD 0
-void XawTextUnsetSelection(\fIw\fP)
-.br
-     Widget \fIw\fP;
-.FN
-.IP \fIw\fP 1i
-Specifies the Text widget.
-.NH 3
-Getting Current Text Selection
-.LP
-To retrieve the text that has been selected by this
-text widget use \fBXawTextGetSelectionPos\fP:
-.IN "XawTextGetSelectionPos" "" "@DEF@"
-.FD 0
-void XawTextGetSelectionPos(\fIw\fP, \fIbegin_return\fP, \fIend_return\fP)
-.br
-     Widget \fIw\fP;
-.br
-     XawTextPosition *\fIbegin_return\fP, *\fIend_return\fP;
-.FN
-.IP \fIw\fP 1i
-Specifies the Text widget.
-.IP \fIbegin_return\fP 1i
-Returns the beginning of the text selection.
-.IP \fIend_return\fP 1i
-Returns the end of the text selection.
-.LP
-See section 5.4 for a description of \fBXawTextPosition\fP.
-If the returned values are equal, no text is currently selected.
-.NH 3
-Replacing Text
-.LP
-To modify the text in an editable Text widget use \fBXawTextReplace\fP:
-.IN "XawTextReplace" "" "@DEF@"
-.FD 0
-int XawTextReplace(\fIw\fP, \fIstart\fP, \fIend\fP, \fItext\fP)
-.br
-     Widget \fIw\fP;
-.br
-     XawTextPosition \fIstart\fP, \fIend\fP;
-.br
-     XawTextBlock *\fItext\fP;
-.FN
-.IP \fIw\fP 1i
-Specifies the Text widget.
-.IP \fIstart\fP 1i
-Specifies the starting character position of the text replacement.
-.IP \fIend\fP 1i
-Specifies the ending character position of the text replacement.
-.IP \fItext\fP 1i
-Specifies the text to be inserted into the file.
-.LP
-This function will not
-be able to replace text in read-only text widgets.  It will also only
-be able to append text to an append-only text widget.
-.LP
-See section 5.4 for a description of \fBXawTextPosition\fP and
-\fBXawTextBlock\fP.
-.LP
-This function may return the following values:
-.IP \fBXawEditDone\fP 1.25i
-.IN "XawEditDone" ""
-The text replacement was successful.
-.IP \fBXawPositionError\fP 1.25i
-.IN "XawPositionError" ""
-The edit mode is \fBXawtextAppend\fP and \fIstart\fP is not the position of
-the last character of the source.
-.IP \fBXawEditError\fP 1.25i
-.IN "XawEditError" ""
-Either the Source was read-only or the range to be deleted is larger
-than the length of the Source.
-
-.LP
-The \fBXawTextReplace\fP arguments \fIstart\fP and
-\fIend\fP represent the text source character positions for the
-existing text that is to be replaced by the text in the text block.
-The characters from \fIstart\fP up to
-but not including \fIend\fP are deleted, and the characters
-specified on the text block are inserted in their place.  If
-\fIstart\fP and \fIend\fP are equal, no text is deleted and the new
-text is inserted after \fIstart\fP.
-.NH 3
-Searching for Text
-.LP
-To search for a string in the Text widget, use
-\fBXawTextSearch\fP:
-.IN "XawTextSearch" "" "@DEF@"
-.FD 0
-XawTextPosition XawTextSearch(\fIw\fP, \fIdir\fP, \fItext\fP)
-.br
-      Widget \fIw\fP;
-.br
-      XawTextScanDirection \fIdir\fP;
-.br
-      XawTextBlock * \fItext\fP;
-.FN
-.IP \fIw\fP 1i
-Specifies the Text widget.
-.IP \fIdir\fP 1i
-Specifies the direction to search in.  Legal values are
-\fBXawsdLeft\fP and \fBXawsdRight\fP.
-.IP \fItext\fP 1i
-Specifies a text block structure that contains the text to search for.
-.LP
-See section 5.4 for a description of \fBXawTextPosition\fP and \fBXawTextBlock\fP.
-The \fBXawTextSearch\fP function will begin at the insertion point
-and search in the
-direction specified for a string that matches the one passed in
-\fItext\fP.  If the string is found the location of the first
-character in the string is returned.  If the string could not be
-found then the value \fBXawTextSearchError\fP is returned.
-.NH 3
-Redisplaying Text
-.LP
-To redisplay a range of characters, use \fBXawTextInvalidate\fP:
-.IN "XawTextInvalidate" "" "@DEF@"
-.FD 0
-void XawTextInvalidate(\fIw\fP, \fIfrom\fP, \fIto\fP)
-.br
-      Widget \fIw\fP;
-.br
-      XawTextPosition \fIfrom\fP, \fIto\fP;
-.FN
-.IP \fIw\fP 1i
-Specifies the Text widget.
-.IP \fIfrom\fP 1i
-Specifies the start of the text to redisplay.
-.IP \fIto\fP 1i
-Specifies the end of the text to redisplay.
-.LP
-See section 5.4 for a description of \fBXawTextPosition\fP.
-The \fBXawTextInvalidate\fP
-function causes the specified range of characters to be redisplayed
-immediately if redisplay is enabled or the next time that redisplay is
-enabled.
-.LP
-.sp 1
-To enable redisplay, use \fBXawTextEnableRedisplay\fP:
-.IN "XawTextEnableRedisplay" "" "@DEF@"
-.FD 0
-void XawTextEnableRedisplay(\fIw\fP)
-.br
-      Widget \fIw\fP;
-.FN
-.IP \fIw\fP 1i
-Specifies the Text widget.
-.LP
-The \fBXawTextEnableRedisplay\fP function flushes any changes due to
-batched updates when \fBXawTextDisableRedisplay\fP
-was called and allows future changes to be reflected immediately.
-.LP
-.sp 1
-To disable redisplay while making several changes, use
-\fBXawTextDisableRedisplay\fP.
-.IN "XawTextDisableRedisplay" "" "@DEF@"
-.FD 0
-void XawTextDisableRedisplay(\fIw\fP)
-.br
-       Widget \fIw\fP;
-.FN
-.IP \fIw\fP 1i
-Specifies the Text widget.
-.LP
-The \fBXawTextDisableRedisplay\fP function causes all changes to be
-batched until either \fBXawTextDisplay\fP or \fBXawTextEnableRedisplay\fP
-is called.
-.LP
-.sp 1
-To display batched updates, use \fBXawTextDisplay\fP:
-.IN "XawTextDisplay" "" "@DEF@"
-.FD 0
-void XawTextDisplay(\fIw\fP)
-.br
-     Widget \fIw\fP;
-.FN
-.IP \fIw\fP 1i
-Specifies the Text widget.
-.LP
-The \fBXawTextDisplay\fP function forces any accumulated updates to be
-displayed.
-.NH 3
-Resources Convenience Routines
-.LP
-To obtain the character position of the left-most character on the
-first line displayed in the widget (the value of the
-\fBdisplayPosition\fP resource), use \fBXawTextTopPosition\fP.
-.IN "XawTextTopPosition" "" @DEF@"
-.FD 0
-XawTextPosition XawTextTopPosition(\fIw\fP)
-.br
-      Widget \fIw\fP;
-.FN
-.IP \fIw\fP 1i
-Specifies the Text widget.
-.LP
-.sp 1
-To assign a new selection array to a text widget use
-\fBXawTextSetSelectionArray\fP:
-.IN "XawTextSetSelectionArray" "" "@DEF@"
-.FD 0
-void XawTextSetSelectionArray(\fIw\fP, \fIsarray\fP)
-.br
-      Widget \fIw\fP;
-.br
-      XawTextSelectType * \fIsarray\fP;
-.FN
-.IP \fIw\fP 1i
-Specifies the Text widget.
-.IP \fIsarray\fP 1i
-Specifies a selection array as defined in the section called \fBText
-Selections for Application Programmers\fP.
-.LP
-Calling this function is equivalent to setting the value of the
-\fBselectionTypes\fP resource.
-.LP
-.sp 1
-To move the insertion point to the specified source position, use
-\fBXawTextSetInsertionPoint\fP:
-.IN "XawTextSetInsertionPoint" "" "@DEF@"
-.FD 0
-void XawTextSetInsertionPoint(\fIw\fP, \fIposition\fP)
-.br
-      Widget \fIw\fP;
-.br
-      XawTextPosition \fIposition\fP;
-.FN
-.IP \fIw\fP 1i
-Specifies the Text widget.
-.IP \fIposition\fP 1i
-Specifies the new position for the insertion point.
-.LP
-See section 5.4 for a description of \fBXawTextPosition\fP.
-The text will be scrolled vertically if necessary to make the line
-containing the insertion point visible.  Calling this function is
-equivalent to setting the \fBinsertPosition\fP resource.
-.LP
-.sp 1
-To obtain the current position of the insertion point, use
-\fBXawTextGetInsertionPoint\fP:
-.IN "XawTextGetInsertionPoint" "" "@DEF@"
-.FD 0
-XawTextPosition XawTextGetInsertionPoint(\fIw\fP)
-.br
-      Widget \fIw\fP;
-.FN
-.IP \fIw\fP 1i
-Specifies the Text widget.
-.LP
-See section 5.4 for a description of \fBXawTextPosition\fP.
-The result is equivalent to retrieving the value of the
-\fBinsertPosition\fP resource.
-.LP
-.sp 1
-To replace the text source in the specified widget, use
-\fBXawTextSetSource\fP:
-.IN "XawTextSetSource" "" "@DEF@"
-.FD 0
-void XawTextSetSource(\fIw\fP, \fIsource\fP, \fIposition\fP)
-.br
-      Widget \fIw\fP;
-.br
-      Widget \fIsource\fP;
-.br
-      XawTextPosition \fIposition\fP;
-.FN
-.IP \fIw\fP 1i
-Specifies the Text widget.
-.IP \fIsource\fP 1i
-Specifies the text source object.
-.IP \fIposition\fP 1i
-Specifies character position that will become the upper left hand corner
-of the displayed text.  This is usually set to zero.
-.LP
-See section 5.4 for a description of \fBXawTextPosition\fP.
-A display update will be performed if redisplay is enabled.
-.LP
-.sp 1
-To obtain the current text source for the specified widget, use
-\fBXawTextGetSource\fP:
-.IN "XawTextGetSource" "" "@DEF@"
-.FD 0
-Widget XawTextGetSource(\fIw\fP)
-.br
-      Widget \fIw\fP;
-.FN
-.IP \fIw\fP 1i
-Specifies the Text widget.
-.LP
-This function returns the text source that this Text widget is currently
-using.
-.LP
-.sp
-To enable and disable the insertion point, use
-\fBXawTextDisplayCaret\fP:
-.IN "XawTextDisplayCaret" "" "@DEF@"
-.FD 0
-void XawTextDisplayCaret(\fIw\fP, \fIvisible\fP)
-.br
-      Widget \fIw\fP;
-.br
-      Boolean \fIvisible\fP;
-.FN
-.IP \fIw\fP 1i
-Specifies the Text widget.
-.IP \fIvisible\fP 1i
-Specifies whether or not the caret should be displayed.
-.LP
-If \fIvisible\fP is \fBFalse\fP the insertion point will be disabled.
-The marker is re-enabled either by setting \fIvisible\fP to \fBTrue\fP, by
-calling \fBXtSetValues\fP, or by executing the \fIdisplay-caret\fP
-action routine.
diff --git a/libXaw/spec/TextSink b/libXaw/spec/TextSink
deleted file mode 100644
index 72ae3cf99..000000000
--- a/libXaw/spec/TextSink
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,420 +0,0 @@
-.\" $Xorg: TextSink,v 1.3 2000/08/17 19:42:28 cpqbld Exp $
-.NH 2
-TextSink Object
-.LP
-.XS
-	TextSink Object
-.XE
-.IN "TextSink object" "" "@DEF@"
-.LP
-.Ds 0
-.TA 2.0i
-.ta 2.0i
-Application Header file	<X11/Xaw/TextSink.h>
-.IN "TextSink.h" ""
-Class Header file	<X11/Xaw/TextSinkP.h>
-.IN "TextSinkP.h" ""
-Class		textSinkObjectClass
-.IN "textSinkObjectClass" ""
-Class Name	TextSink
-.IN "TextSink object" "class name"
-Superclass	Object
-.De
-.LP
-The TextSink object is the root object for all text sinks.  Any new text
-sink objects should be subclasses of the TextSink Object.  The TextSink
-Class contains all methods that the Text widget expects a text sink to
-export.
-.LP
-Since all text sinks will have some resources in common, the TextSink
-defines a few new resources.
-.NH 3
-Resources
-.LP
-When creating an TextSink object instance, the following resources are
-retrieved from the argument list or from the resource database:
-.LP
-.IN "AsciiSink object" "resources"
-.TS H
-lw(1i) lw(1i) lw(1i) lw(.5i) lw(2i).
-_
-.sp 3p
-.TB
-Name	Class	Type	Notes	Default Value
-.sp 3p
-_
-.TH
-.R
-.sp 3p
-background	Background	Pixel		XtDefaultBackground
-destroyCallback	Callback	XtCallbackList		NULL
-foreground	Foreground	Pixel		XtDefaultForeground
-.sp 3p
-_
-.TE
-.Bg Bold
-.Dc
-.Sg Bold
-.NH 3
-Subclassing the TextSink
-.IN "TextSink object" "subclassing" "@DEF@"
-.LP
-The only purpose of the TextSink Object is to be subclassed.  It
-contains the minimum set of class methods that all text sinks must have.
-While all may be inherited, the direct descendant of TextSink \fBmust
-specify\fP some of them as TextSink does contain enough information to
-be a valid text sink by itself.  Do not try to use
-the TextSink as a valid sink for the Text widget; it is not intended
-to be used as a sink by itself.
-.TS H
-lw(1i) lw(1.5i) lw(2i) lw(1i).
-_
-.sp 3p
-.TB
-Function	Inherit with	Public Interface	must specify
-.sp 3p
-_
-.TH
-.R
-.sp 3p
-DisplayText	XtInheritDisplayText	XawTextSinkDisplayText	yes
-.IN "XtInheritDisplayText" ""
-.IN "XawTextSinkDisplayText" ""
-InsertCursor	XtInheritInsertCursor	XawTextSinkInsertCursor	yes
-.IN "XtInheritInsertCursor" ""
-.IN "XawTextSinkInsertCursor" ""
-ClearToBackground	XtInheritClearToBackground	XawTextSinkClearToBackground	no
-.IN "XtInheritClearToBackground" ""
-.IN "XawTextSinkClearToBackground" ""
-FindPosition	XtInheritFindPosition	XawTextSinkFindPosition	yes
-.IN "XtInheritFindPosition" ""
-.IN "XawTextSinkFindPosition" ""
-FindDistance	XtInheritFindDistance	XawTextSinkFindDistance	yes
-.IN "XtInheritFindDistance" ""
-.IN "XawTextSinkFindDistance" ""
-Resolve	XtInheritResolve	XawTextSinkResolve	yes
-.IN "XtInheritResolve" ""
-.IN "XawTextSinkResolve" ""
-MaxLines	XtInheritMaxLines	XawTextSinkMaxLines	no
-.IN "XtInheritMaxLines" ""
-.IN "XawTextSinkMaxLines" ""
-MaxHeight	XtInheritMaxHeight	XawTextSinkMaxHeight	no
-.IN "XtInheritMaxHeight" ""
-.IN "XawTextSinkMaxHeight" ""
-SetTabs	XtInheritSetTabs	XawTextSinkSetTabs	no
-.IN "XtInheritSetTabs" ""
-.IN "XawTextSinkSetTabs" ""
-GetCursorBounds	XtInheritGetCursorBounds	XawTextSinkGetCursorBounds	yes
-.IN "XtInheritGetCursorBounds" ""
-.IN "XawTextSinkGetCursorBounds" ""
-_
-.TE
-.NH 4
-Displaying Text
-.LP
-To display a section of the text buffer contained in the text source
-use the function \fBDisplayText\fP:
-.IN "TextSink object" "DisplayText" "@DEF@"
-.FD 0
-void DisplayText(\fIw\fP, \fIx\fP, \fIy\fP, \fIpos1\fP, \fIpos2\fP, \fIhighlight\fP)
-.br
-      Widget \fIw\fP;
-.br
-      Position \fIx\fP, \fIy\fP;
-.br
-      XawTextPosition \fIpos1\fP, \fIpos2\fP;
-.br
-      Boolean \fIhighlight\fP;
-.FN
-.IP \fIw\fP 1i
-Specifies the TextSink object.
-.IP \fIx\fP 1i
-Specifies the x location to start drawing the text.
-.IP \fIy\fP 1i
-Specifies the y location to start drawing text.
-.IP \fIpos1\fP 1i
-Specifies the location within the text source of the first character
-to be printed.
-.IP \fIpos2\fP 1i
-Specifies the location within the text source of the last character
-to be printed.
-.IP \fIhighlight\fP 1i
-Specifies whether or not to paint the text region highlighted.
-.LP
-The Text widget will only pass one line at a time to the text sink, so
-this function does not need to know how to line feed the text.  It is
-acceptable for this function to just ignore Carriage Returns.  \fIx\fP
-and \fIy\fP denote the upper left hand corner of the first character to
-be displayed.
-.NH 4
-Displaying the Insert Point
-.LP
-The function that controls the display of the text cursor is
-\fBInsertCursor\fP.  This function will be called whenever the text
-widget desires to change the state of, or move the insert point.
-.FD 0
-void InsertCursor(\fIw\fP, \fIx\fP, \fIy\fP, \fIstate\fP)
-.IN "TextSink object" "InsertCursor" "@DEF@"
-.br
-      Widget \fIw\fP;
-.br
-      Position \fIx\fP, \fIy\fP;
-.br
-      XawTextInsertState \fIstate\fP;
-.FN
-.IP \fIw\fP 1i
-Specifies the TextSink object.
-.IP \fIx\fP 1i
-Specifies the x location of the cursor in Pixels.
-.IP \fIy\fP 1i
-Specifies the y location of the cursor in Pixels.
-.IP \fIstate\fP 1i
-Specifies the state of the cursor, may be one of \fBXawisOn\fP or
-\fBXawisOff\fP.
-.LP
-\fIX\fP and \fIy\fP denote the upper left hand corner of the insert point.
-.NH 4
-Clearing Portions of the Text window
-.LP
-To clear a portion of the Text window to its background color, the Text
-widget will call \fBClearToBackground\fP.  The TextSink object already
-defines this function as calling \fBXClearArea\fP on the region passed.
-This behavior will be used if you specify
-\fBXtInheritClearToBackground\fP for this method.
-.IN "XtInheritClearToBackground" ""
-.IN "TextSink object" "ClearToBackground" "@DEF@"
-.FD 0
-void ClearToBackground(\fIw\fP, \fIx\fP, \fIy\fP, \fIwidth\fP, \fIheight\fP)
-.br
-      Widget \fIw\fP;
-.br
-      Position \fIx\fP, \fIy\fP;
-.br
-      Dimension \fIwidth\fP, \fIheight\fP;
-.FN
-.IP \fIw\fP 1i
-Specifies the TextSink object.
-.IP \fIx\fP 1i
-Specifies the x location, in pixels, of the Region to clear.
-.IP \fIy\fP 1i
-Specifies the y location, in pixels, of the Region to clear.
-.IP \fIwidth\fP 1i
-Specifies the width, in pixels, of the Region to clear.
-.IP \fIheight\fP 1i
-Specifies the height, in pixels, of the Region to clear.
-.LP
-\fIX\fP and \fIy\fP denote the upper left hand corner of region to clear.
-.NH 4
-Finding a Text Position Given Pixel Values
-.LP
-To find the text character position that will be rendered at a given x
-location the Text widget uses the function \fBFindPosition\fP:
-.IN "TextSink object" "FindPosition" "@DEF@"
-.FD 0
-void FindPosition(\fIw\fP, \fIfromPos\fP, \fIfromX\fP, \fIwidth\fP, \fIstopAtWordBreak\fP, \fIpos_return\fP, \fIwidth_return\fP, \fIheight_return\fP)
-.br
-      Widget \fIw\fP;
-.br
-      XawTextPosition \fIfromPos\fP;
-.br
-      int \fIfromX\fP, \fIwidth\fP;
-.br
-      Boolean \fIstopAtWordBreak\fP;
-.br
-      XawTextPosition \fI*pos_return\fP;
-.br
-      int \fI*width_return\fP, \fI*height_return\fP;
-.FN
-.IP \fIw\fP 1.25i
-Specifies the TextSink object.
-.IP \fIfromPos\fP 1.25i
-Specifies a reference position, usually the first character in this line.
-This character is always to the left of the desired character location.
-.IP \fIfromX\fP 1.25i
-Specifies the distance that the left edge of \fIfromPos\fP is from the
-left edge of the window.  This is the reference x location for the
-reference position.
-.IP \fIwidth\fP 1.25i
-Specifies the distance, in pixels, from the reference position to the
-desired character position.
-.IP \fIstopAtWordBreak\fP 1.25i
-Specifies whether or not the position that is returned should be forced
-to be on a word boundary.
-.IP \fIpos_return\fP 1.25i
-Returns the character position that corresponds to the location that has
-been specified, or the work break immediately to the left of the
-position if \fIstopAtWordBreak\fP is \fBTrue\fP.
-.IP \fIwidth_return\fP 1.25i
-Returns the actual distance between \fIfromPos\fP and \fIpos_return\fI.
-.IP \fIheight_return\fP 1.25i
-Returns the maximum height of the text between \fIfromPos\fP and
-\fIpos_return\fI.
-.LP
-This function need make no attempt to deal with line feeds.  The text
-widget will only call it one line at a time.
-.LP
-.sp
-Another means of finding a text position is provided by the \fBResolve\fP
-function:
-.IN "TextSink object" "Resolve" "@DEF@"
-.FD 0
-void Resolve(\fIw\fP, \fIfromPos\fP, \fIfromX\fP, \fIwidth\fP, \fIpos_return\fP)
-.br
-      Widget \fIw\fP;
-.br
-      XawTextPosition \fIfromPos\fP;
-.br
-      int \fIfromX\fP, \fIwidth\fP;
-.br
-      XawTextPosition \fI*pos_return\fP;
-.FN
-.IP \fIw\fP 1i
-Specifies the TextSink object.
-.IP \fIfromPos\fP 1i
-Specifies a reference position, usually the first character in this line.
-This character is always to the left of the desired character location.
-.IP \fIfromX\fP 1i
-Specifies the distance that the left edge of \fIfromPos\fP is from the
-left edge of the window.  This is the reference x location for the
-reference position.
-.IP \fIwidth\fP 1i
-Specifies the distance, in pixels, from the reference position to the
-desired character position.
-.IP \fIpos_return\fP 1i
-Returns the character position that corresponds to the
-location that has been specified, or the word break immediately to the left
-if \fIstopAtWordBreak\fP is \fBTrue\fP.
-.LP
-This function need make no attempt to deal with line feeds.  The text
-widget will only call it one line at a time.  This is a more convenient
-interface to the \fBFindPosition\fP function, and provides a subset of its
-functionality.
-.IN "FindPosition" ""
-.NH 4
-Finding the Distance Between two Text Positions
-.LP
-To find the distance in pixels between two text positions on the same
-line use the function \fBFindDistance\fP.
-.IN "TextSink object" "FindDistance" "@DEF@"
-.FD 0
-void FindDistance(\fIw\fP, \fIfromPos\fP, \fIfromX\fP, \fItoPos\fP, \fIwidth_return\fP, \fIpos_return\fP, \fIheight_return\fP)
-.br
-      Widget \fIw\fP;
-.br
-      XawTextPosition \fIfromPos\fP, \fItoPos\fP;
-.br
-      int \fIfromX\fP;
-.br
-      XawTextPosition \fI*pos_return\fP;
-.br
-      int \fI*width_return\fP, \fI*height_return\fP;
-.FN
-.IP \fIw\fP 1i
-Specifies the TextSink object.
-.IP \fIfromPos\fP 1i
-Specifies the text buffer position, in characters, of the first position.
-.IP \fIfromX\fP 1i
-Specifies the distance that the left edge of \fIfromPos\fP is from the
-left edge of the window.  This is the reference x location for the
-reference position.
-.IP \fItoPos\fP 1i
-Specifies the text buffer position, in characters, of the second position.
-.IP \fIresWidth\fP 1i
-Return the actual distance between \fIfromPos\fP
-and \fIpos_return\fI.
-.IP \fIresPos\fP 1i
-Returns the character position that corresponds to the actual character
-position used for \fItoPos\fP in the calculations.  This may be
-different than \fItoPos\fP, for example if \fIfromPos\fP and \fItoPos\fP
-are on different lines in the file.
-.IP \fIheight_return\fP 1i
-Returns the maximum height of the text between \fIfromPos\fP and
-\fIpos_return\fP.
-.LP
-This function need make no attempt to deal with line feeds.  The Text
-widget will only call it one line at a time.
-.NH 4
-Finding the Size of the Drawing area
-.LP
-To find the maximum number of lines that will fit into the current Text
-widget, use the function \fBMaxLines\fP.  The TextSink already defines
-this function to compute the maximum number of lines by using the height
-of \fBfont\fP.
-.IN "TextSink object" "MaxLines" "@DEF@"
-.FD 0
-int MaxLines(\fIw\fP, \fIheight\fP)
-.br
-      Widget \fIw\fP;
-.br
-      Dimension \fIheight\fP;
-.FN
-.IP \fIw\fP 1i
-Specifies the TextSink object.
-.IP \fIheight\fP 1i
-Specifies the height of the current drawing area.
-.LP
-Returns the maximum number of lines that will fit in \fIheight\fP.
-.LP
-.sp
-To find the height required for a given number of text lines, use
-the function \fBMaxHeight\fP.  The TextSink already defines this
-function to compute the maximum height of the window by using the
-height of \fBfont\fP.
-.IN "TextSink object" "MaxHeight" "@DEF@"
-.FD 0
-int MaxHeight(\fIw\fP, \fIlines\fP)
-.br
-      Widget \fIw\fP;
-.br
-      int \fIlines\fP;
-.FN
-.IP \fIw\fP 1i
-Specifies the TextSink object.
-.IP \fIheight\fP 1i
-Specifies the height of the current drawing area.
-.LP
-Returns the height that will be taken up by the number of lines passed.
-.NH 4
-Setting the Tab Stops
-.LP
-To set the tab stops for a text sink use the \fBSetTabs\fP function.
-The TextSink already defines this function to set the tab x location in
-pixels to be the number of characters times the figure width of
-\fBfont\fP.
-.IN "TextSink object" "SetTabs" "@DEF@"
-.FD 0
-void SetTabs(\fIw\fP, \fItab_count\fP, \fItabs\fP)
-.br
-      Widget \fIw\fP;
-.br
-      int \fItab_count\fP, \fI*tabs\fP;
-.FN
-.IP \fIw\fP 1i
-Specifies the TextSink object.
-.IP \fItab_count\fP 1i
-Specifies the number of tabs passed in \fItabs\fP.
-.IP \fItabs\fP 1i
-Specifies the position, in characters, of the tab stops.
-.LP
-This function is responsible for the converting character positions passed
-to it into whatever internal positions the TextSink uses for tab placement.
-.NH 4
-Getting the Insert Point's Size and Location
-.LP
-To get the size and location of the insert point use the
-\fBGetCursorBounds\fP function.
-.IN "TextSink object" "GetCursorBounds" "@DEF@"
-.FD 0
-void GetCursorBounds(\fIw\fP, \fIrect_return\fP)
-.br
-Widget \fIw\fP;
-.br
-XRectangle \fI*rect_return\fP;
-.FN
-.IP \fIw\fP 1i
-Specifies the TextSinkObject.
-.IP \fIrect_return\fP 1i
-Returns the location and size of the insert point.
-.LP
-\fIRect\fP will be filled with the current size and location of the
-insert point.
diff --git a/libXaw/spec/TextSource b/libXaw/spec/TextSource
deleted file mode 100644
index 852db2dd3..000000000
--- a/libXaw/spec/TextSource
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,331 +0,0 @@
-.\" $Xorg: TextSource,v 1.3 2000/08/17 19:42:28 cpqbld Exp $
-.NH 2
-TextSrc Object
-.LP
-.XS
-	TextSrc Object
-.XE
-.IN "TextSrc object" "" "@DEF@"
-.LP
-.Ds 0
-.TA 2.0i
-.ta 2.0i
-Application Header file	<X11/Xaw/TextSrc.h>
-.IN "TextSrc.h" ""
-Class Header file	<X11/Xaw/TextSrcP.h>
-.IN "TextSrcP.h" ""
-Class		textSrcObjectClass
-.IN "textSrcObjectClass" ""
-Class Name	TextSrc
-.IN "TextSrc object" "class name"
-Superclass	Object
-.De
-.LP
-The TextSrc object is the root object for all text sources.  Any new text
-source objects should be subclasses of the TextSrc Object.  The
-TextSrc Class contains all methods the Text widget expects a text
-source to export.
-.LP
-Since all text sources will have some resources in common the
-TextSrc defines a few new resources.
-.NH 3
-Resources
-.LP
-When creating an TextSrc object instance, the following resources are
-retrieved from the argument list or from the resource database:
-.LP
-.IN "TextSrc object" "resources"
-.TS H
-lw(1i) lw(1i) lw(1i) lw(.5i) lw(2i).
-_
-.sp 3p
-.TB
-Name	Class	Type	Notes	Default Value
-.sp 3p
-_
-.TH
-.R
-.sp 3p
-destroyCallback	Callback	XtCallbackList		NULL
-editType	EditType	EditMode		NULL
-.sp 3p
-_
-.TE
-.Dc
-.Oe Bold
-.NH 3
-Subclassing the TextSrc
-.IN "TextSrc object" "subclassing" "@DEF@"
-.LP
-The only purpose of the TextSrc Object is to be subclassed.  It contains
-the minimum set of class methods that all text sources must have.  All
-class methods of the TextSrc must be defined, as the Text widget uses
-them all.  While all may be inherited, the direct descendant of TextSrc
-\fBmust\fP specify some of them as TextSrc does not contain enough
-information to be a valid text source by itself.  Do not try to use the
-TextSrc as a valid source for the Text widget; it is not intended to be
-used as a source by itself and bad things will probably happen.
-.TS H
-lw(1i) lw(1.5i) lw(2i) lw(1i).
-_
-.sp 3p
-.TB
-Function	Inherit with	Public Interface	must specify
-.sp 3p
-_
-.TH
-.R
-.sp 3p
-Read	XtInheritRead	XawTextSourceRead	yes
-.IN "XtInheritRead" ""
-.IN "XawTextSourceRead" ""
-Replace	XtInheritReplace	XawTextSourceReplace	no
-.IN "XtInheritReplace" ""
-.IN "XawTextSourceReplace" ""
-Scan	XtInheritScan	XawTextSourceScan	yes
-.IN "XtInheritScan" ""
-.IN "XawTextSourceScan" ""
-Search	XtInheritSearch	XawTextSourceSearch	no
-.IN "XtInheritSearch" ""
-.IN "XawTextSourceSearch" ""
-SetSelection	XtInheritSetSelection	XawTextSourceSetSelection	no
-.IN "XtInheritSetSelection" ""
-.IN "XawTextSourceSetSelection" ""
-ConvertSelection	XtInheritConvertSelection	XawTextSourceConvertSelection	no
-.IN "XtInheritConvertSelection" ""
-.IN "XawTextSourceConvertSelection" ""
-_
-.TE
-.NH 4
-Reading Text.
-.LP
-To read the text in a text source use the \fBRead\fP function:
-.IN "TextSrc object" "Read" "@DEF@"
-.FD 0
-XawTextPosition Read(\fIw\fP, \fIpos\fP, \fItext_return\fP, \fIlength\fP)
-.br
-Widget \fIw\fP;
-.br
-XawTextPosition \fIpos\fP;
-.br
-XawTextBlock \fI*text_return\fP;
-.br
-int \fIlength\fP;
-.FN
-.IP \fIw\fP 1i
-Specifies the TextSrc object.
-.IP \fIpos\fP 1i
-Specifies the position of the first character to be read from the text buffer.
-.IP \fItext\fP 1i
-Returns the text read from the source.
-.IP \fIlength\fP 1i
-Specifies the maximum number of characters the TextSrc should
-return to the application in \fItext_return\fP.
-.LP
-This function returns the text position immediately after the
-characters read from the
-text buffer.  The function is not required to read \fIlength\fP
-characters if that many characters are in the file, it may break at
-any point that is convenient to the internal structure of the
-source.  It may take several calls to \fBRead\fP before the desired
-portion of the text buffer is fully retrieved.
-.NH 4
-Replacing Text.
-.LP
-To replace or edit the text in a text buffer use the \fBReplace\fP function:
-.FD 0
-XawTextPosition Replace(\fIw\fP, \fIstart\fP, \fIend\fP, \fItext\fP)
-.IN "TextSrc object" "Replace" @DEF@
-.br
-Widget \fIw\fP;
-.br
-XawTextPosition \fIstart\fP, \fIend\fP;
-.br
-XawTextBlock \fI*text\fP;
-.FN
-.IP \fIw\fP 1i
-Specifies the TextSrc object.
-.IP \fIstart\fP 1i
-Specifies the position of the first character to be removed from the text
-buffer.  This is also the location to begin inserting the new text.
-.IP \fIend\fP 1i
-Specifies the position immediately after the last character to be
-removed from the text buffer.
-.IP \fItext\fP 1i
-Specifies the text to be added to the text source.
-.LP
-This function can return any of the following values:
-.IP \fBXawEditDone\fP 1.25i
-.IN "XawEditDone" ""
-The text replacement was successful.
-.IP \fBXawPositionError\fP 1.25i
-.IN "XawPositionError" ""
-The edit mode is \fBXawtextAppend\fP and \fIstart\fP is not the last
-character of the source.
-.IP \fBXawEditError\fP 1.25i
-.IN "XawEditError" ""
-Either the Source was read-only or the range to be deleted is larger
-than the length of the Source.
-.LP
-The \fBReplace\fP arguments \fIstart\fP and \fIend\fP represent the
-text source character positions for the existing text that is to be
-replaced by the text in the text block.  The characters from
-\fIstart\fP up to but not including \fIend\fP are deleted, and the
-buffer specified by the text block is inserted in their
-place.  If \fIstart\fP and \fIend\fP are equal, no text is deleted and
-the new text is inserted after \fIstart\fP.
-.NH 4
-Scanning the TextSrc
-.LP
-To search the text source for one of the predefined boundary types use
-the \fBScan\fP function:
-.FD 0
-XawTextPosition Scan(\fIw\fP, \fIposition\fP, \fItype\fP, \fIdir\fP, \fIcount\fP, \fIinclude\fP)
-.IN "TextSrc object" "Scan" @DEF@
-.br
-Widget \fIw\fP;
-.br
-XawTextPosition \fIposition\fP;
-.br
-XawTextScanType \fItype\fP;
-.br
-XawTextScanDirection \fIdir\fP;
-.br
-int \fIcount\fP;
-.br
-Boolean \fIinclude\fP;
-.FN
-.IP \fIw\fP 1i
-Specifies the TextSrc object.
-.IP \fIposition\fP 1i
-Specifies the position to begin scanning the source.
-.IP \fItype\fP 1i
-Specifies the type of boundary to scan for, may be one of:
-\fBXawstPosition\fP, \fBXawstWhiteSpace\fP, \fBXawstEOL\fP,
-.IN "XawstPositions" ""
-.IN "XawstWhiteSpace" ""
-.IN "XawstEOL" ""
-\fBXawstParagraph\fP, \fBXawstAll\fP.  The exact meaning of these
-.IN "XawstParagraph" ""
-.IN "XawstAll" ""
-boundaries is left up to the individual text source.
-.IP \fIdir\fP 1i
-Specifies the direction to scan, may be either \fBXawsdLeft\fP to search
-.IN "XawsdLeft" ""
-backward, or \fBXawsdRight\fP to search forward.
-.IN "XawsdRight" ""
-.IP \fIcount\fP 1i
-Specifies the number of boundaries to scan for.
-.IP \fIinclude\fP 1i
-Specifies whether the boundary itself should be included in the scan.
-.LP
-The \fBScan\fP function returns the position in the text source of the desired
-boundary.  It is expected to return a valid address for
-all calls made to it, thus if a particular request is made that would take
-the text widget beyond the end of the source it must return the
-position of that end.
-.NH 4
-Searching through a TextSrc
-.LP
-To search for a particular string use the \fBSearch\fP function.
-.FD 0
-XawTextPosition Search(\fIw\fP, \fIposition\fP, \fIdir\fP, \fItext\fP)
-.IN "TextSrc object" "Search" @DEF@
-.br
-Widget \fIw\fP;
-.br
-XawTextPosition \fIposition\fP;
-.br
-XawTextScanDirection \fIdir\fP;
-.br
-XawTextBlock \fI*text\fP;
-.FN
-.IP \fIw\fP 1i
-Specifies the TextSrc object.
-.IP \fIposition\fP 1i
-Specifies the position to begin the search.
-.IP \fIdir\fP 1i
-Specifies the direction to search, may be either \fBXawsdLeft\fP to search
-.IN "XawsdLeft" ""
-backward, or \fBXawsdRight\fP to search forward.
-.IN "XawsdRight" ""
-.IP \fItext\fP 1i
-Specifies a text block containing the text to search for.
-.LP
-This function will search through the text buffer attempting to find a
-match for the string in the text block.  If a match is found in the
-direction specified, then the character location of the first character
-in the string is returned.  If no text was found then
-\fBXawTextSearchError\fP is returned.
-.IN "XawTextSearchError" ""
-.NH 4
-Text Selections
-.LP
-While many selection types are handled by the Text widget, text sources
-may have selection types unknown to the Text widget.  When a selection
-conversion is requested by the X server the Text widget will first call
-the \fBConvertSelection\fP function, to attempt the selection
-conversion.
-.FD 0
-Boolean ConvertSelections(\fIw\fP, \fIselection\fP, \fItarget\fP, \fItype\fP, \fIvalue_return\fP, \fIlength_return\fP, \fIformat_return\fP)
-.IN "Text widget" "ConvertSelection" @DEF@
-.br
-Widget \fIw\fP;
-.br
-Atom \fI*selection\fP, \fI*target\fP, \fI*type\fP;
-.br
-caddr_t \fI*value_return\fP;
-.br
-unsigned long \fI*length_return\fP;
-.br
-int \fI*format_return\fP;
-.FN
-.IP \fIw\fP 1i
-Specifies the TextSrc object.
-.IP \fIselection\fP 1i
-Specifies the type of selection that was requested (e.g. \fBPRIMARY\fP).
-.IP \fItarget\fP 1i
-Specifies the type of the selection that has been requested, which
-indicates the desired information about the selection (e.g. Filename,
-Text, Window).
-.IP \fItype\fP 1i
-Specifies a pointer to the atom into which the property type of the converted
-value of the selection is to be stored.  For instance, either file
-name or text might have property type \fBXA_STRING\fP.
-.IP \fIvalue_return\fP 1i
-Returns a pointer into which a pointer to the converted value of the
-selection
-is to be stored.  The selection owner is responsible for allocating
-this storage.  The memory is considered owned by the toolkit, and is
-freed by XtFree when the Intrinsics selection mechanism is done with it.
-.IP \fIlength_return\fP 1i
-Returns a pointer into which the number of elements in value is to be stored.
-The size of each element is determined by \fIformat\fP.
-.IP \fIformat_return\fP 1i
-Returns a pointer into which the size in bits of the data elements of the
-selection value is to be stored.
-.LP
-If this function returns \fBTrue\fP then the Text widget will assume
-that the source has taken care of converting the selection, Otherwise the
-Text widget will attempt to convert the selection itself.
-.LP
-.sp
-If the source needs to know when the text selection is modified it
-should define a \fBSetSelection\fP procedure:
-.FD 0
-void SetSelection(\fIw\fP, \fIstart\fP, \fIend\fP, \fIselection\fP)
-Widget \fIw\fP;
-.IN "SetSelection" "" @DEF@
-.br
-XawTextPosition \fIstart\fP, \fIend\fP;
-.br
-Atom \fIselection\fP;
-.FN
-.IP \fIw\fP 1i
-Specifies the TextSrc object.
-.IP \fIstart\fP 1i
-Specifies the character position of the beginning of the new text selection.
-.IP \fIend\fP
-Specifies the character position of the end of the new text selection.
-.IP \fIselection\fP 1i
-Specifies the type of selection that was requested (e.g. \fBPRIMARY\fP).
diff --git a/libXaw/spec/Toggle b/libXaw/spec/Toggle
deleted file mode 100644
index 12a605bd2..000000000
--- a/libXaw/spec/Toggle
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,370 +0,0 @@
-.\" $Xorg: Toggle,v 1.3 2000/08/17 19:42:29 cpqbld Exp $
-.NH 2
-Toggle Widget
-.XS
-	Toggle Widget
-.XE
-.IN "Toggle widget" "" "@DEF@"
-.Ds 0
-.TA 2.0i
-.ta 2.0i
-.sp
-Application Header file	<Xaw/Toggle.h>
-.IN "Toggle.h" ""
-Class Header file	<Xaw/ToggleP.h>
-.IN "ToggleP.h" ""
-Class		toggleWidgetClass
-.IN "toggleWidgetClass" ""
-Class Name	Toggle
-.IN "Toggle widget" "class name"
-Superclass 	Command
-.sp
-.De
-.LP
-The Toggle widget is an area, often rectangular,
-that displays a graphic.  The graphic may be a text
-string containing multiple lines of characters in an 8
-bit or 16 bit character set (to be displayed with a
-\fIfont\fP), or in a multi-byte encoding (for use with
-a \fIfontset\fP).  The graphic may also be a bitmap or
-pixmap.
-.LP
-This widget maintains a Boolean state (e.g.
-True/False or On/Off) and changes state whenever it is selected.  When
-the pointer is on the Toggle widget, the Toggle widget may become highlighted by
-drawing a rectangle around its perimeter.  This highlighting indicates
-that the Toggle widget is ready for selection.  When pointer button 1 is
-pressed and released, the Toggle widget indicates that it has changed
-state by reversing its foreground and background colors, and its
-\fBnotify\fP action is invoked, calling all functions on its callback
-list.  If the pointer is moved off of the widget before the pointer button is
-released, the Toggle widget reverts to its previous foreground and background
-colors, and releasing the pointer button has no effect.  This behavior allows
-the user to cancel the operation.
-.LP
-Toggle widgets may also be part of a ``radio group.''  A radio group is a
-.IN "Radio groups" ""
-.IN "Radio button" ""
-.IN "Toggle widget" "used in radio groups"
-list of at least two Toggle widgets in which no more than one Toggle may
-be set at
-any time.  A radio group is identified by the widget ID of any one of
-its members.  The convenience routine \fBXawToggleGetCurrent\fP will
-return information about the Toggle widget in the radio group.
-.LP
-Toggle widget state is preserved across changes in sensitivity.
-.NH 3
-Resources
-.LP
-When creating a Toggle widget instance, the following resources are
-retrieved from the argument list or from the resource database:
-.LP
-.IN "Toggle widget" "resources"
-.TS H
-expand;
-lw(1i) lw(1i) lw(1i) lw(.5i) lw(2i).
-_
-.sp 3p
-.TB
-Name	Class	Type	Notes	Default Value
-.sp 3p
-_
-.TH
-.R
-.sp 3p
-accelerators	Accelerators	AcceleratorTable		NULL
-ancestorSensitive	AncestorSensitive	Boolean	D	True
-background	Background	Pixel		XtDefaultBackground
-backgroundPixmap	Pixmap	Pixmap		XtUnspecifiedPixmap
-bitmap	Bitmap	Pixmap		None
-borderColor	BorderColor	Pixel		XtDefaultForeground
-borderPixmap	Pixmap	Pixmap		XtUnspecifiedPixmap
-borderWidth	BorderWidth	Dimension		1
-callback	Callback	XtCallbackList		NULL
-colormap	Colormap	Colormap		Parent's Colormap
-cornerRoundPercent	CornerRoundPercent	Dimension		25
-cursor	Cursor	Cursor		None
-cursorName	Cursor	String		NULL
-depth	Depth	int	C	Parent's Depth
-destroyCallback	Callback	XtCallbackList		NULL
-encoding	Encoding	UnsignedChar		XawTextEncoding8bit
-font	Font	XFontStruct		XtDefaultFont
-fontSet	FontSet	XFontSet		XtDefaultFontSet
-foreground	Foreground	Pixel		XtDefaultForeground
-height	Height	Dimension	A	graphic height + 2 * \fBinternalHeight\fP
-highlightThickness	Thickness	Dimension	A	2 (0 if Shaped)
-insensitiveBorder	Insensitive	Pixmap		GreyPixmap
-internalHeight	Height	Dimension		2
-internalWidth	Width	Dimension		4
-international	International	Boolean	C	False
-justify	Justify	Justify		XtJustifyCenter (center)
-label	Label	String		name of widget
-leftBitmap	LeftBitmap	Bitmap		None
-mappedWhenManaged	MappedWhenManaged	Boolean		True
-pointerColor	Foreground	Pixel		XtDefaultForeground
-pointerColorBackground	Background	Pixel		XtDefaultBackground
-radioData	RadioData	Pointer		Name of widget
-radioGroup	Widget	Widget		No radio group
-resize	Resize	Boolean		True
-screen	Screen	Screen	R	Parent's Screen
-sensitive	Sensitive	Boolean		True
-shapeStype	ShapeStyle	ShapeStyle		Rectangle
-state	State	Boolean		Off
-translations	Translations	TranslationTable		See below
-width	Width	Dimension	A	graphic width + 2 * \fBinternalWidth\fP
-x	Position	Position		0
-y	Position	Position		0
-.sp 3p
-_
-.TE
-.Ac
-.As
-.Bg
-.Gp
-.Bm
-.Bc
-.Bp
-.Bw
-.Cb
-.Cm
-.Cr
-.Cu
-.Cn
-.Dp
-.Dc
-.Le
-.Lf
-.Ls
-.Lg
-.Hw
-.Ht
-.Ib
-.Ih
-.In
-.Ju
-.La
-.Ll
-.Mm
-.Pf
-.Pb
-.IP \fBradioData\fP 1.5i
-Specifies the data that will be returned by \fBXawToggleGetCurrent\fP
-when this is the currently \fIset\fP widget in the radio group.  This
-value is also used to identify the Toggle that will be set by a call to
-\fBXawToggleSetCurrent\fP.  The value NULL will be returned by
-\fBXawToggleGetCurrent\fP if no widget in a radio group is currently
-set.  Programmers must not specify NULL (or Zero) as \fBradioData\fP.
-.IP \fBradioGroup\fP 1.5i
-Specifies another Toggle widget that is in the radio group to which this
-Toggle widget should be added.  A radio group is a group of at least two Toggle
-widgets, only one of which may be \fIset\fP at a time.  If this value is
-NULL (the default) then the Toggle will not be part of any radio group
-and can change state without affecting any other Toggle widgets.  If the
-widget specified in this resource is not already in a radio group then a
-new radio group will be created containing these two Toggle widgets.  No
-Toggle widget can be in multiple radio groups.  The behavior of a radio
-group of one toggle is undefined.  A converter is registered which will
-convert widget names to widgets without caching.
-.Re
-.Sc
-.Se
-.Ss
-.IP \fBstate\fP
-Specifies whether the Toggle widget is set (\fBTrue\fP) or unset
-(\fBFalse\fP).
-.Tr
-.Xy
-.NH 3
-Toggle Actions
-.IN "Toggle widget" "actions"
-.LP
-The Toggle widget supports the following actions:
-.IP \(bu 5
-Switching the Toggle widget between the foreground and background
-colors with \fBset\fP and \fBunset\fP and \fBtoggle\fP
-.IP \(bu 5
-Processing application callbacks with \fBnotify\fP
-.IP \(bu 5
-Switching the internal border between highlighted
-and unhighlighted states with \fBhighlight\fP and \fBunhighlight\fP
-.LP
-The following are the default translation bindings used by the
-Toggle widget:
-.IN "Toggle widget" "default translation table"
-.LP
-.sp
-.Ds 0
-.TA .5i 2.25i
-.ta .5i 2.25i
-	<EnterWindow>:	highlight(Always)
-	<LeaveWindow>:	unhighlight(\|)
-	<Btn1Down>,<Btn1Up>:	toggle(\|) notify(\|)
-.De
-.NH 3
-Toggle Actions
-.LP
-The full list of actions supported by Toggle is:
-.IP \fBhighlight\fP(\fIcondition\fP) 1.5i
-Displays the internal highlight border in the color (\fBforeground\fP
-or \fBbackground\fP ) that contrasts with the interior color of the
-Toggle widget.  The conditions \fBWhenUnset\fP and \fBAlways\fP are
-understood by this action procedure.  If no argument is passed then
-\fBWhenUnset\fP is assumed.
-.IP \fBunhighlight\fP(\|) 1.5i
-Displays the internal highlight border in the color (\fBforeground\fP
-or \fBbackground\fP ) that matches the interior color of the
-Toggle widget.
-.IP \fBset\fP(\|) 1.5i
-Enters the \fIset\fP state, in which \fBnotify\fP is possible.  This
-action causes the Toggle widget to display its interior in the
-\fBforeground\fP color.  The label or bitmap is displayed in the
-\fBbackground\fP color.
-.IP \fBunset\fP(\|) 1.5i
-Cancels the \fIset\fP state and displays the interior of the Toggle widget in the
-\fBbackground\fP color.  The label or bitmap is displayed in the
-\fBforeground\fP color.
-.IP \fBtoggle\fP(\|) 1.5i
-Changes the current state of the Toggle widget, causing to be set
-if it was previously unset, and unset if it was previously set.
-If the widget is to be set, and is in a radio group then this procedure may
-unset another Toggle widget causing all routines on its callback list
-to be invoked.  The callback routines for the Toggle that
-is to be unset will be called before the one that is to be set.
-.IP \fBreset\fP(\|) 1.5i
-Cancels any \fBset\fP or \fBhighlight\fP and displays the interior of the
-Toggle widget in the \fBbackground\fP color, with the label displayed in the
-\fBforeground\fP color.
-.IP \fBnotify\fP(\|) 1.5i
-When the Toggle widget is in the \fBset\fP state this action calls all functions in
-the callback list named by the \fBcallback\fP resource.  The value of
-the call_data argument in these callback functions is undefined.
-.LP
-.NT
-When a bitmap of depth greater that one (1) is specified the
-\fIset\fP(), \fIunset\fP(), and \fIreset\fP() actions have no effect,
-since there are no foreground and background colors used in a
-multi-plane pixmap.
-.NE
-.NH 3
-Radio Groups
-.IN "Radio groups"
-.LP
-There are typically two types of radio groups desired by applications.
-The default translations for the Toggle widget implement a "zero or one
-.IN "Radio groups" "zero or one of many"
-of many" radio group.  This means that there may be no more than one
-Toggle widget active, but there need not be any Toggle widgets active.
-.LP
-The other type of radio group is "one of many" and has the more strict
-.IN "Radio groups" "one of many"
-policy that there will always be exactly one radio button active.
-Toggle widgets can be used to provide this interface with a slight
-modification to the translation table of each Toggle in the group.
-.Ds 0
-.TA .5i 2.25i
-.ta .5i 2.25i
-.sp
-	<EnterWindow>:	highlight(Always)
-	<LeaveWindow>:	unhighlight(\|)
-	<Btn1Down>,<Btn1Up>:	set(\|) notify(\|)
-.sp
-.De
-This translation table will not allow any Toggle to be \fIunset\fP
-except as a result of another Toggle becoming \fIset\fP.  It is
-the application programmer's responsibility to choose an initial
-state for the radio group by setting the \fBstate\fP resource of one of
-its member widgets to \fBTrue\fP.
-.NH 3
-Convenience Routines
-.LP
-The following functions allow easy access to the Toggle widget's radio
-group functionality.
-.NH 4
-Changing the Toggle's Radio Group.
-.LP
-To enable an application to change the Toggle's radio group, add
-the Toggle to a radio group, or remove the Toggle from a radio group, use
-\fBXawToggleChangeRadioGroup\fP.
-.IN "XawToggleChangeRadioGroup" "" "@DEF@"
-.FD
-void XawToggleChangeRadioGroup(\fIw\fP, \fIradio_group\fP)
-.br
-     Widget \fIw\fP, \fIradio_group\fP;
-.FN
-.IP \fIw\fP 1i
-Specifies the Toggle widget.
-.IP \fIradio_group\fP 1i
-Specifies any Toggle in the new radio group.  If NULL then the Toggle
-will be removed from any radio group of which it is a member.
-.LP
-If a Toggle is already \fIset\fP in the new radio group,
-and the Toggle to be added is also \fIset\fP then the previously
-\fIset\fP Toggle in the radio group is \fIunset\fP and its callback
-procedures are invoked.
-.SH
-Finding the Currently selected Toggle in a radio group of Toggles
-.LP
-To find the currently selected Toggle in a radio group of Toggle widgets
-use
-\fBXawToggleGetCurrent\fP.
-.IN "XawToggleGetCurrent" "" "@DEF@"
-.FD
-XtPointer XawToggleGetCurrent(\fIradio_group\fP);
-.br
-     Widget \fIradio_group\fP;
-.FN
-.IP \fIradio_group\fP 1i
-Specifies any Toggle widget in the radio group.
-.LP
-The value returned by this function is the
-.PN radioData
-of the Toggle in this radio group that is currently set.  The default
-value for
-.PN radioData
-is the name of that Toggle widget.  If no Toggle is set in the radio
-group specified then NULL is returned.
-.SH
-Changing the Toggle that is set in a radio group.
-.LP
-To change the Toggle that is currently set in a radio group use
-\fBXawToggleSetCurrent\fP.
-.IN "XawToggleSetCurrent" "" "@DEF@"
-.FD
-void XawToggleSetCurrent(\fIradio_group\fP, \fIradio_data\fP);
-.br
-     Widget \fIradio_group\fP;
-     XtPointer \fIradio_data\fP;
-.FN
-.IP \fIradio_group\fP 1i
-Specifies any Toggle widget in the radio group.
-.IP \fIradio_data\fP 1i
-Specifies the
-.PN radioData
-identifying the Toggle that should be set in the radio group specified
-by the \fIradio_group\fP argument.
-.LP
-\fBXawToggleSetCurrent\fP locates the Toggle widget to be set by
-matching \fIradio_data\fP against the \fBradioData\fP for each Toggle in
-the radio group.  If none match, \fBXawToggleSetCurrent\fP returns
-without making any changes.  If more than one Toggle matches,
-\fBXawToggleSetCurrent\fP will choose a Toggle to set arbitrarily.  If
-this causes any Toggle widgets to change state, all routines in their
-callback lists will be invoked.  The callback routines for a Toggle that
-is to be unset will be called before the one that is to be set.
-.SH
-Unsetting all Toggles in a radio group.
-.LP
-To unset all Toggle widgets in a radio group use
-\fBXawToggleUnsetCurrent\fP.
-.IN "XawToggleUnsetCurrent" "" "@DEF@"
-.FD
-void XawToggleUnsetCurrent(\fIradio_group\fP);
-.br
-     Widget \fIradio_group\fP;
-.FN
-.IP \fIradio_group\fP 1i
-Specifies any Toggle widget in the radio group.
-.LP
-If this causes a Toggle widget to change state, all routines on its
-callback list will be invoked.
-
diff --git a/libXaw/spec/Tree b/libXaw/spec/Tree
deleted file mode 100644
index 5575228fb..000000000
--- a/libXaw/spec/Tree
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,181 +0,0 @@
-.\" $Xorg: Tree,v 1.3 2000/08/17 19:42:29 cpqbld Exp $
-.NH 2
-Tree Widget
-.LP
-.XS
-	Tree Widget
-.XE
-.IN "Tree widget" "" "@DEF@"
-.Ds 0
-.TA 2.0i
-.ta 2.0i
-.sp
-Application Header file	<X11/Xaw/Tree.h>
-.IN "Box.h" ""
-Class Header file	<X11/Xaw/TreeP.h>
-.IN "TreeP.h" ""
-Class		treeWidgetClass
-.IN "treeWidgetClass" ""
-Class Name	Tree
-.IN "Tree widget" "class name"
-Superclass	Constraint
-.sp
-.De
-.LP
-The Tree widget provides geometry management of arbitrary widgets arranged
-in a directed, acyclic graph (i.e., a tree).  The hierarchy is constructed
-by attaching a constraint resource called \fBtreeParent\fP to each widget
-indicating which other node in the tree should be treated as the widget's
-superior.  The structure of the tree is shown by laying out the nodes
-in the standard format for tree diagrams with lines drawn connecting each
-node with its children.
-.LP
-The Tree sizes itself according to the needs of its children and is not
-intended to be resized by its parent.  Instead, it should be placed inside
-another composite widget (such as the \fBPorthole\fP or \fBViewport\fP)
-that can be used to scroll around in the tree.
-.NH 3
-Resources
-.LP
-When creating a Tree widget instance, the following resources are
-retrieved from the argument list or from the resource database:
-.LP
-.IN "Box widget" "resources"
-.TS H
-expand;
-lw(1i) lw(1i) lw(1i) lw(.5i) lw(2i).
-_
-.sp 3p
-.TB
-Name	Class	Type	Notes	Default Value
-.sp 3p
-_
-.TH
-.R
-.sp 3p
-accelerators	Accelerators	AcceleratorTable		NULL
-ancestorSensitive	AncestorSensitive	Boolean	D	True
-autoReconfigure	AutoReconfigure	Boolean		False
-background	Background	Pixel		XtDefaultBackground
-backgroundPixmap	Pixmap	Pixmap		XtUnspecifiedPixmap
-borderColor	BorderColor	Pixel		XtDefaultForeground
-borderPixmap	Pixmap	Pixmap		XtUnspecifiedPixmap
-borderWidth	BorderWidth	Dimension		1
-children	ReadOnly	WidgetList	R	NULL
-colormap	Colormap	Colormap		Parent's Colormap
-depth	Depth	int	C	Parent's Depth
-destroyCallback	Callback	XtCallbackList		NULL
-foreground	Foreground	Pixel		XtDefaultForeground
-gravity	Gravity	XtGravity		WestGravity
-height	Height	Dimension	A	see \fBLayout Semantics\fP
-hSpace	HSpace	Dimension		4
-lineWidth	LineWidth	Dimension		0
-mappedWhenManaged	MappedWhenManaged	Boolean		True
-numChildren	ReadOnly	Cardinal	R	0
-screen	Screen	Screen	R	Parent's Screen
-sensitive	Sensitive	Boolean		True
-vSpace	VSpace	Dimension		4
-translations	Translations	TranslationTable		NULL
-width	Width	Dimension	A	see \fBLayout Semantics\fP
-x	Position	Position		0
-y	Position	Position		0
-.sp 3p
-_
-.TE
-.IP \fBautoReconfigure\fP 1.5i
-Whether or not to layout the tree every time a node is added or removed.
-.Bg
-.Gp
-.Bc
-.Bp
-.Bw
-.Ch
-.Cm
-.Dp
-.Dc
-.Lg
-.IP \fBgravity\fP 1.5i
-.IN "conversions" "Gravity"
-Specifies the side of the widget from which the tree should grow.  Valid
-values include \fBWestGravity\fP, \fBNorthGravity\fP, \fBEastGravity\fP, and
-\fBSouthGravity\fP.
-.Rs "\fP the legal values\fB"
-.Hw
-.IP \fBhSpace\fP 1.5i
-.br
-.ns
-.IP \fBvSpace\fP 1.5i
-The amount of space, in pixels, to leave between the children.  This
-resource specifies the amount of space left between the outermost
-children and the edge of the box.
-.IP \fBlineWidth\fP 1.5i
-The width of the lines from nodes that do not have a \fBtreeGC\fP
-constraint resource to their children.
-.Mm
-.Nc
-.Sc
-.Se
-.Tr
-.Xy
-.NH 3
-Constraint Resources
-.LP
-.IN "Tree widget" "constraint resources"
-Each child of the Tree widget must specify its superior node in the tree.  In
-addition, it may specify a GC to use when drawing a line between it and its
-inferior nodes.
-.TS H
-lw(1i) lw(1i) lw(1i) lw(.5i) lw(2i).
-_
-.sp 3p
-.TB
-Name	Class	Type	Notes	Default Value
-.sp 3p
-_
-.TH
-.R
-.sp 3p
-treeGC	TreeGC	GC		NULL
-treeParent	TreeParent	Widget		NULL
-.sp 3p
-_
-.TE
-.IP \fBtreeGC\fP 1.5i
-This specifies the GC to use when drawing lines between this widget and its
-inferiors in the tree.  If this resource is not specified, the Tree's
-\fBforeground\fP and \fBlineWidth\fP will be used.
-.IP \fBtreeParent\fP 1.5i
-This specifies the superior node in the tree for this widget.  The default is
-for the node to have no superior (and to therefore be at the top of the tree).
-.NH 3
-Layout Semantics
-.IN "Tree widget" "layout semantics"
-.LP
-Each time a child is managed or unmanaged, the Tree widget will attempt
-to reposition the remaining children to fix the shape of the tree if the
-.B autoReconfigure
-resource is set.  Children at the top (most superior) of the tree are
-drawn at
-the side specified by the
-.B gravity
-resource.
-.LP
-After positioning all children, the Tree widget attempts to shrink its
-own size to the minimum dimensions required for the layout.
-.NH 3
-Convenience Routines
-.LP
-.IN "Tree widget" "convenience routines"
-The most efficient way to layout a tree is to set
-.B autoReconfigure
-to False and then use the
-.B XawTreeForceLayout
-routine to arrange the children.
-.IN "XawTreeForceLayout" "" "@DEF@"
-.FD 0
-void XawTreeForceLayout(\fIw\fP)
-.br
-	Widget \fIw\fP;
-.FN
-.IP \fIw\fP 1i
-Specifies the Tree widget.
diff --git a/libXaw/spec/Viewport b/libXaw/spec/Viewport
deleted file mode 100644
index 0b599472a..000000000
--- a/libXaw/spec/Viewport
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,156 +0,0 @@
-.\" $Xorg: Viewport,v 1.3 2000/08/17 19:42:29 cpqbld Exp $
-.NH 2
-Viewport Widget
-.LP
-.XS
-	Viewport Widget
-.XE
-.IN "Viewport widget" "" "@DEF@"
-.Ds 0
-.TA 2.0i
-.ta 2.0i
-.sp
-Application Header file	<X11/Xaw/Viewport.h>
-.IN "Viewport.h" ""
-Class Header file	<X11/Xaw/ViewportP.h>
-.IN "ViewportP.h" ""
-Class		viewportWidgetClass
-.IN "viewportWidgetClass" ""
-Class Name	Viewport
-.IN "Viewport widget" "class name"
-Superclass	Form
-.sp
-.De
-.LP
-The Viewport widget consists of a frame window, one or two Scrollbars,
-and an inner window.  The size of the frame window is determined by the
-viewing size of the data that is to be displayed and the dimensions to
-which the Viewport is created.  The inner window is the full size of the
-data that is to be displayed and is clipped by the frame window.  The
-Viewport widget controls the scrolling of the data directly.  No
-application callbacks are required for scrolling.
-.LP
-When the geometry of the frame window is equal in size to the inner
-window, or when the data does not require scrolling, the Viewport widget
-automatically removes any scrollbars.  The \fBforceBars\fP option causes
-the Viewport widget to display all scrollbars permanently.
-.NH 3
-Resources
-.LP
-When creating a Viewport widget instance, the following resources are
-retrieved from the argument list or the resource database:
-.LP
-.IN "Viewport widget" "resources"
-.TS H
-expand;
-lw(1i) lw(1i) lw(1i) lw(.5i) lw(2i).
-_
-.sp 3p
-.TB
-Name	Class	Type	Notes	Default Value
-.sp 3p
-_
-.TH
-.R
-.sp 3p
-accelerators	Accelerators	AcceleratorTable		NULL
-allowHoriz	Boolean	Boolean		False
-allowVert	Boolean	Boolean		False
-ancestorSensitive	AncestorSensitive	Boolean	D	True
-background	Background	Pixel		XtDefaultBackground
-backgroundPixmap	Pixmap	Pixmap		XtUnspecifiedPixmap
-borderColor	BorderColor	Pixel		XtDefaultForeground
-borderPixmap	Pixmap	Pixmap		XtUnspecifiedPixmap
-borderWidth	BorderWidth	Dimension		1
-children	ReadOnly	WidgetList	R	NULL
-colormap	Colormap	Colormap		Parent's Colormap
-depth	Depth	int	C	Parent's Depth
-destroyCallback	Callback	XtCallbackList		NULL
-forceBars	Boolean	Boolean		False
-height	Height	Dimension		height of the child
-mappedWhenManaged	MappedWhenManaged	Boolean		True
-numChildren	ReadOnly	Cardinal	R	0
-reportCallback	ReportCallback	XtCallbackList		NULL
-screen	Screen	Screen	R	Parent's Screen
-sensitive	Sensitive	Boolean		True
-translations	Translations	TranslationTable		NULL
-useBottom	Boolean	Boolean		False
-useRight	Boolean	Boolean		False
-width	Width	Dimension		width of the child
-x	Position	Position		0
-y	Position	Position		0
-.sp 3p
-_
-.TE
-.Ac
-.IP \fBallowHoriz\fP 1.5i
-.br
-.ns
-.IP \fBallowVert\fP 1.5i
-If these resources are \fBFalse\fP then the Viewport will never create
-a scrollbar in this direction.  If it is \fBTrue\fP then the scrollbar will
-only appear when it is needed, unless \fBforceBars\fP is \fBTrue\fP.
-.As
-.Bg
-.Gp
-.Bc
-.Bp
-.Bw
-.Ch
-.Cm
-.Dp
-.Dc
-.IP \fBforceBars\fP 1.5i
-When \fBTrue\fP the scrollbars that have been \fIallowed\fP will always be
-visible on the screen.  If \fBFalse\fP the scrollbars will be visible only
-when the inner window is larger than the frame.
-.Hw
-.Mm
-.Nc
-.IP \fBreportCallback\fP 1.5i
-These callbacks will be executed whenever the Viewport adjusts the viewed
-area of the child.  The call_data parameter is a pointer to an XawPannerReport
-structure.
-.Sc
-.Se
-.Tr
-.IP \fBuseBottom\fP 1.5i
-.br
-.ns
-.IP \fBuseRight\fP 1.5i
-By default the scrollbars appear on the left and top of the screen.
-These resources allow the vertical scrollbar to be placed on the right
-edge of the Viewport, and the horizontal scrollbar on the bottom edge of
-the Viewport.
-.Xy
-.NH 3
-Layout Semantics
-.LP
-.IN "Viewport widget" "layout semantics"
-The Viewport widget manages a single child widget.  When the size of the
-child is larger than the size of the Viewport, the user can interactively
-move the child within the Viewport by repositioning the scrollbars.
-.LP
-The default size of the Viewport before it is realized is the width and/or
-height of the child.  After it is realized, the Viewport will allow its
-child to grow vertically or horizontally if \fBallowVert\fP or
-\fBallowHoriz\fP are set, respectively.  If the corresponding vertical
-or horizontal scrollbar is not enabled, the Viewport will propagate the
-geometry request to its own parent and the child will be allowed to change
-size only if the Viewport's parent allows it.  Regardless of whether or not
-scrollbars are enabled in the corresponding direction, if the child requests
-a new size smaller than the Viewport size, the change will be allowed only
-if the parent of the Viewport allows the Viewport to shrink to the
-appropriate dimension.
-.LP
-The scrollbar children of the Viewport are named \fBhorizontal\fP and
-\fBvertical\fP.  By using these names the programmer can specify resources
-for the individual scrollbars.  \fBXtSetValues\fP can be used to modify
-the resources dynamically once the widget ID has been obtained with
-\fBXtNameToWidget\fP.
-.IN "XtNameToWidget" ""
-.NT
-Although the Viewport is a Subclass of the Form, no resources for the Form
-may be supplied for any of the children of the Viewport.  These constraints
-are managed internally and are not meant for public consumption.
-.NE
diff --git a/libXaw/spec/block.awk b/libXaw/spec/block.awk
deleted file mode 100644
index 0dd75f3f7..000000000
--- a/libXaw/spec/block.awk
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,22 +0,0 @@
-BEGIN {
-	firstchar = "@";
-	a["a"] = "A"; a["b"] = "B"; a["c"] = "C";
-	a["d"] = "D"; a["e"] = "E"; a["f"] = "F";
-	a["g"] = "G"; a["h"] = "H"; a["i"] = "I";
-	a["j"] = "J"; a["k"] = "K"; a["l"] = "L";
-	a["m"] = "M"; a["n"] = "N"; a["o"] = "O";
-	a["p"] = "P"; a["q"] = "Q"; a["r"] = "R";
-	a["s"] = "S"; a["t"] = "T"; a["u"] = "U";
-	a["v"] = "V"; a["w"] = "W"; a["x"] = "X";
-	a["y"] = "Y"; a["z"] = "Z";
-}
-
-{
-	c = substr($2,2,1);
-	if (c >= "a" && c <= "z")
-		c = a[c];
-	if (c != firstchar)
-		printf(".LB %s\n", c);
-	firstchar = c;
-	print;
-}
diff --git a/libXaw/spec/fixindex.awk b/libXaw/spec/fixindex.awk
deleted file mode 100644
index e8849f3bd..000000000
--- a/libXaw/spec/fixindex.awk
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,73 +0,0 @@
-BEGIN {
-	FS = ":";
-	BD = "\\s+1\\fB";
-	ED = "\\fP\\s-1";
-}
-
-NR == 1 {
-	if ($3 != "")
-		printf(".Ib \"%s\"\n", $2);
-	major = $2;
-	minor = $3;
-	if ($4 == "@DEF@") {
-		pagelist = BD $1 ED;
-	}
-	else {
-		pagelist = $1;
-	}
-	pageno = $1;
-	oldpageno = $1;
-	oldpagelist = "";
-}
-
-NR != 1 {
-	if ($2 == major && $3 == minor)		# neither has changed
-	{
-		if ($1 != pageno) {		# new page number, append
-			oldpageno = $1;
-			oldpagelist = pagelist;
-			if ($4 == "@DEF@") {
-				pagelist = pagelist ", " BD $1 ED;
-			}
-			else {
-				pagelist = pagelist ", " $1;
-			}
-		}
-		else {				# old page, but check for def
-               	        if ($4 == "@DEF@") {
-                            if (pageno == oldpageno) {
-                                if (oldpagelist != "")
-                                        oldpagelist = oldpagelist ", "
-			    }
-                            pagelist = oldpagelist BD $1 ED;
-                        }
-                }
-	}
-	else					# one has changed
-	{
-		if (minor != "")		# dump full record
-			printf(".I< \"%s\" \"%s\" \"%s\"\n", major, minor, pagelist);
-		else
-			printf(".I> \"%s\" \"%s\"\n", major, pagelist);
-		if ($4 == "@DEF@") {		# restart pagelist
-			pagelist = BD $1 ED;
-		}
-		else {
-			pagelist = $1;
-		}
-		oldpagelist = "";
-		oldpageno = $1;
-		if ($2 != major && $3 != "")	# major has changed, minor not null
-		printf(".Ib \"%s\"\n", $2);
-	}
-	major = $2;
-	minor = $3;
-	pageno = $1;
-}
-
-END {
-	if (minor != "")			# dump full record
-		printf(".I< \"%s\" \"%s\" \"%s\"\n", major, minor, pagelist);
-	else
-		printf(".I> \"%s\" \"%s\"\n", major, pagelist);
-}
diff --git a/libXaw/spec/indexmacros.t b/libXaw/spec/indexmacros.t
deleted file mode 100644
index 4660f18ed..000000000
--- a/libXaw/spec/indexmacros.t
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,42 +0,0 @@
-. \" Macros for the index
-.de Ib	\" blank major entry
-.br
-.ne 2v
-\\$1:
-..
-.de I>	\" major entry
-.br
-\\$1, \\$2
-..
-.de I<  \" minor entry
-.br
-   \\$2, \\$3
-..
-.de LB	\" new letter starts here
-.di DT	\" start diverted text
-.sp
-.sz +2
-.b
-\\$1
-.r
-.sz -2
-.sp
-.di	\" end diverted text
-.ne \\n(dnu+1v	\" get enough space for it
-.DT		\" output it
-..
-.\" set up various parameters for the right evironment.
-.\" Your taste may be different.
-.ef ''\fB % \fP''
-.of ''\fB % \fP''
-.++ A
-.po 1.0i	\" physical offset
-.ta 5iR		\" right alignment tab
-.lp             \" initialize -me
-.ce
-.sz 18
-Index
-.sp 1
-.sz 10
-.2c		\" 2 column mode
-.sp 3
diff --git a/libXaw/spec/macros.t b/libXaw/spec/macros.t
deleted file mode 100644
index cbc599b3f..000000000
--- a/libXaw/spec/macros.t
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,226 +0,0 @@
-.\" $Xorg: macros.t,v 1.3 2000/08/17 19:42:51 cpqbld Exp $
-.\" macros.t -- macros for X Consortium documents
-.\" Revised and commented by smarks 93.12.20.
-.\"
-.\" global setup: set ragged right, assign string variables
-.\"
-.na
-.ie n \{\
-.ds Q \&"
-.ds U \&"
-.ds - \%--
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.ds Q `\h'-\w'\^'u'`
-.ds U '\h'-\w'\^'u''
-.ds - \(em
-.\}
-.\"
-.\" --- Ds --- displayed text (like .DS) with no keep
-.\" .Ds is obsolete.  Change to something from this table:
-.\" for this	use instead
-.\" .Ds		.ID
-.\" .Ds n	.LD		(where "n" is a number)
-.\" (Numbers don't work in these macros, so ".Ds 5"
-.\" comes out the same as ".Ds 0".)
-.\"
-.de Ds
-.nf
-.\\$1D \\$2 \\$1
-.ft 1
-.ps \\n(PS
-.if \\n(VS>=40 .vs \\n(VSu
-.if \\n(VS<=39 .vs \\n(VSp
-..
-.de D
-.ID \\$1
-..
-.de 0D
-.LD
-..
-.\" backward compatibility for the Xt spec
-.de 5D
-.LD
-..
-.\"
-.\" --- De --- obsolete: use .DE instead
-.\"
-.de De
-.DE
-..
-.\"
-.\" --- FD ---
-.\"
-.de FD
-.LP
-.KS
-.TA .5i 3i
-.ta .5i 3i
-.nf
-..
-.\"
-.\" --- FN ---
-.\"
-.de FN
-.fi
-.KE
-.LP
-..
-.\"
-.\" --- IN --- send an index entry to the stderr
-.\"
-.de IN
-.tm \\n%:\\$1:\\$2:\\$3
-..
-.\"
-.\" --- C{ ---
-.\"
-.de C{
-.KS
-.nf
-.D
-.\"
-.\"	choose appropriate monospace font
-.\"	the imagen conditional, 480,
-.\"	may be changed to L if LB is too
-.\"	heavy for your eyes...
-.\"
-.ie "\\*(.T"480" .ft L
-.el .ie "\\*(.T"300" .ft L
-.el .ie "\\*(.T"202" .ft PO
-.el .ie "\\*(.T"aps" .ft CW
-.el .ft R
-.ps \\n(PS
-.ie \\n(VS>40 .vs \\n(VSu
-.el .vs \\n(VSp
-..
-.\"
-.\" --- C} ---
-.\"
-.de C}
-.DE
-.R
-..
-.\"
-.\" --- Pn --- like PN, but use $2; $1 and $3 abut
-.\"
-.de Pn
-.IN \\$2
-.ie t \\$1\fB\^\\$2\^\fR\\$3
-.el \\$1\fI\^\\$2\^\fP\\$3
-..
-.\"
-.\" --- PN --- put $1 in boldface and add index entry; $2 abuts
-.\"
-.de PN
-.IN \\$1
-.ie t \fB\^\\$1\^\fR\\$2
-.el \fI\^\\$1\^\fP\\$2
-..
-.\"
-.\" --- hI --- add index entry for $1 as header file
-.\"
-.de hI
-.IN         <\\$1>
-.IN Files   <\\$1>
-.IN Headers <\\$1>
-..
-.\"
-.\" --- hN --- put $1 in boldface as header and add index entry; $2 abuts
-.\"
-.de hN
-.hI \\$1
-.ie t <\fB\\$1\fR>\\$2
-.el <\fI\\$1\fP>\\$2
-..
-.\"
-.\" --- NT ---
-.\"
-.de NT
-.br
-.ne 7
-.ds NO Note
-.if \\n(.$ .ds NO \\$1
-.ie n .sp
-.el .sp 10p
-.ce
-\\*(NO
-.ie n .sp
-.el .sp 5p
-.if '\\$1'C' .ce 99
-.if '\\$2'C' .ce 99
-.\" .QS/.QE macros don't exist in older versions of -ms
-.ie \\n(GS .QS
-.el \{\
-.	in +5n
-.	ll -5n
-.\}
-.R
-..
-.\"
-.\" --- NE --- Note End (doug kraft 3/85)
-.\"
-.de NE
-.ce 0
-.ie \\n(GS .QE
-.el \{\
-.	in -5n
-.	ll +5n
-.\}
-.ie n .sp
-.el .sp 10p
-..
-.\"
-.\" --- nH --- numbered header (like NH) but with automatic TOC entry
-.\" usage: .nH level "section title, preferable in quotes"
-.\"
-.de nH
-.NH \\$1
-\\$2
-.XS
-\\*(SN \\$2
-.XE
-..
-.\"
-.\" --- sM --- put start-marker in margin
-.\"
-.de sM
-.KS
-.sp 1
-\\h'-0.5i'\\L'-1v'\\v'1p'\\l'1v'\\v'1v-1p'
-.sp -1
-..
-.\"
-.\" --- eM --- put end-marker in margin
-.\"
-.de eM
-.sp -1
-\\h'-0.5i'\\L'-1v'\\v'1v+1p'\\l'1v'\\v'-1p'
-.sp 1
-.KE
-..
-.\"
-.\" --- YZ --- finish up; $1 is the starting page number of the TOC
-.\"
-.de YZ
-.		\" Force there to be an even number of pages, so the table of
-.		\" contents doesn't end up on the back of the last page in
-.		\" the case of duplex printing.
-.if o .bp
-.		\" Emit a .pn directive with one plus the last page number.
-		\" This will be the number of the first page of the index.
-.nr YZ \\n%+1
-.tm .pn \\n(YZ
-.		\" Issue the table of contents, setting roman numerals,
-.		\" and redefining the footer to use them.
-.bp \\$1
-.af PN i
-.EF ''\\\\\\\\n(PN''
-.OF ''\\\\\\\\n(PN''
-.		\" Why all the backslashes?  This string is evaluated
-.		\" three times: 1) during the definition of this macro,
-.		\" 2) when the .EF and .OF macros are expanded, and 3)
-.		\" when the bottom-of-page trap is invoked.  Thus,
-.		\" eight backslashes are reduced to one in the final output.
-.PX
-..
diff --git a/libXaw/spec/strings.mit b/libXaw/spec/strings.mit
deleted file mode 100644
index e8a339bf2..000000000
--- a/libXaw/spec/strings.mit
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,10 +0,0 @@
-.\" $Xorg: strings.mit,v 1.3 2000/08/17 19:42:29 cpqbld Exp $
-.ds tk X Toolkit
-.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \(em C Language Interface
-.ds xI Intrinsics
-.ds xW Athena Widget Set \(em C Language Interface
-.ds xL Xlib \(em C Language X Interface
-.ds xC Inter-Client Communication Conventions Manual
-.ds Rn 4
-.ds Vn 2.2
-.hw XtMake-Geometry-Request XtQuery-Geometry wid-get sub-class sub-classes
diff --git a/libXaw/spec/strings.xaw b/libXaw/spec/strings.xaw
deleted file mode 100644
index 7ef362ef8..000000000
--- a/libXaw/spec/strings.xaw
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,714 +0,0 @@
-.\" $Xorg: strings.xaw,v 1.3 2000/08/17 19:42:29 cpqbld Exp $
-\" These macros are not associated with any widget.
-
-.de Rs \" Resource Conversion message
-A converter is registered for this resource that will convert
-the following strings: \fB\\$1\fP.
-..
-.de Sk \" This is a resource of the associated sink.
-.if 'AsciiText'\\$1' This is a resource of the associated sink.
-..
-.de So \" This is a resource of the associated source.
-.if 'AsciiText'\\$1' This is a resource of the associated source.
-..
-
-\" Object Resources
-.de Dc \" Object destroyCallback
-.IP destroyCallback 1.5i
-All functions on this list are called when this widget is destroyed.
-..
-
-\" RectObj Resources
-.de As \" RectObj ancestorSensitive
-.IP ancestorSensitive 1.5i
-The sensitivity state of the ancestors of this widget.  A widget is
-insensitive if either it or any of its ancestors is insensitive.
-This resource should not be changed with \fBXtSetValues\fP, although it
-may be queried.
-..
-.de Bw \" RectObj borderWidth
-.IP borderWidth 1.5i
-The width of this widget's window border.
-..
-.de Hw \" RectObj height and width
-.IP height 1.5i
-.br
-.ns
-.IP width 1.5i
-The height and width of this widget in pixels.
-..
-.de Se \" RectObj sensitive
-.IP sensitive 1.5i
-Whether or not the toolkit should pass user events to this widget.  The
-widget will not get input events if either \fBancestorSensitive\fP or
-\fBsensitive\fP is \fBFalse\fP.
-..
-.de Xy \" RectObj x and y
-.IP x 1.5i
-.br
-.ns
-.IP y 1.5i
-The location of the upper left outside corner of this widget in its parent.
-..
-
-\" Core Resources
-
-.de Ac \" Core accelerators
-.IP accelerators 1.5i
-A list of event to action bindings to be executed by this widget, even
-though the event occurred in another widget.  (See the \fI\*(xT\fP for
-details).
-..
-.de Bg \" Core background
-.ie 'Bold'\\$1' .IP \fBbackground\fP 1.5i
-.el .IP background 1.5i
-A pixel value which indexes the widget's colormap to derive the
-background color of the widget's window.
-..
-.de Gp \" Core backgroundPixmap
-.IP backgroundPixmap 1.5i
-The background pixmap of this widget's window.  If this resource is set to
-anything other than \fBXtUnspecifiedPixmap\fP, the pixmap specified will be
-used instead of the background color.
-..
-.de Bc \" Core borderColor
-.IP borderColor 1.5i
-A pixel value which indexes the widget's colormap to derive the border
-color of the widget's window.
-..
-.de Bp \" Core borderPixmap
-.IP borderPixmap 1.5i
-The border pixmap of this widget's window.  If this resource is set to
-anything other than \fBXtUnspecifiedPixmap\fP, the pixmap specified will be
-used instead of the border color.
-..
-.de Cm \" Core colormap
-.IP colormap 1.5i
-The colormap that this widget will use.
-..
-.de Dp \" Core depth
-.IP depth 1.5i
-The depth of this widget's window.
-..
-.de Mm \" Core mappedWhenManaged
-.IP mappedWhenManaged 1.5i
-If this resource is \fBTrue\fP, then the widget's window will
-automatically be mapped by the Toolkit when it is realized and managed.
-..
-.de Sc \" Core screen
-.IP screen 1.5i
-The screen on which this widget is displayed.  This is not a settable
-resource.
-..
-.de Tr \" Core translations
-.IP translations 1.5i
-The event bindings associated with this widget.
-..
-
-\" Simple Widget Resource Definitions
-
-.de Cu \" Simple cursor
-.ie 'Bold'\\$1' .IP \fBcursor\fP 1.5i
-.el .IP cursor 1.5i
-The image that will be displayed as the pointer cursor whenever it is in
-this widget.  The use of this resource is deprecated in favor
-of \fBcursorName\fP.
-..
-.de Cn \" Simple cursorName
-.ie 'Bold'\\$1' .IP \fBcursorName\fP 1.5i
-.el .IP cursorName 1.5i
-The name of the symbol to use to represent the pointer cursor.  This resource
-will override the \fBcursor\fP resource if both are specified. (See 2.4.1)
-..
-.de Ib \" Simple insensitiveBorder
-.ie 'Bold'\\$1' .IP \fBinsensitiveBorder\fP 1.5i
-.el .IP insensitiveBorder 1.5i
-This pixmap will be tiled into the widget's border if the widget becomes
-insensitive.
-..
-.de In \" Simple international
-.ie 'Bold'\\$1' .IP \fBinternational\fP 1.5i
-.el .IP international 1.5i
-This is a boolean flag, only settable at widget creation
-time.  A value of \fBfalse\fP signals the widget to use
-pre-R6 internationalization (specifically, the lack thereof),
-such as using fonts for displaying text, etc.  A value of
-\fBtrue\fP directs the widget to act in an internationalized
-manner, such as utilizing font sets for displaying text, etc.
-..
-.de Ix \" Simple international
-.ie 'Bold'\\$1' .IP \fBinternational\fP 1.5i
-.el .IP international 1.5i
-This is a boolean flag, only settable at widget creation
-time.  While not utilized in this widget, it can and should
-be checked by any subclasses that have behavior that
-should vary with locale.
-..
-.de Pf \" Simple pointerColor
-.ie 'Bold'\\$1' .IP \fBpointerColor\fP 1.5i
-.el .IP pointerColor 1.5i
-A pixel value which indexes the widget's colormap to derive the foreground
-color of the pointer symbol specified by the \fBcursorName\fP resource.
-..
-.de Pb \" Simple pointerColorBackground
-.ie 'Bold'\\$1' .IP \fBpointerColorBackground\fP 1.75i
-.el .IP pointerColorBackground 1.75i
-A pixel value which indexes the widget's colormap to derive the background
-color of the pointer symbol specified by the \fBcursorName\fP resource.
-..
-
-\" Label Widget Resource Definitions
-
-.de Bm \" Label bitmap
-.ie 'Bold'\\$1' .IP \fBbitmap\fP 1.5i
-.el .IP bitmap 1.5i
-A bitmap to display instead of the \fBlabel\fP.  The default size of the
-widget will be just large enough to contain the bitmap and the widget's
-internal width and height.  The resource converter for this resource
-constructs bitmaps from the contents of files.  (See \fBConverting
-Bitmaps\fP for details.)  If this bitmap is one bit deep then the 1's
-will be rendered in the foreground color, and the 0's in the background
-color.  If \fBbitmap\fP has a depth greater than one, it is copied
-directly into the window.
-..
-.de Le \" Label encoding
-.ie 'Bold'\\$1' .IP \fBencoding\fP 1.5i
-.el .IP encoding 1.5i
-The encoding method used by the value of the \fBlabel\fP resource.
-The value may be \fBXawTextEncoding8bit\fP or \fBXawTextEncodingChar2b\fP.
-When \fBinternational\fP is set to \fBtrue\fP this resource is not used.
-..
-.de Lf \" Label font
-.ie 'Bold'\\$1' .IP \fBfont\fP 1.5i
-.el .IP font 1.5i
-The text font to use when displaying the \fBlabel\fP, when the
-\fBinternational\fP resource is \fBfalse\fP.
-..
-.de Ls \" Label fontSet
-.ie 'Bold'\\$1' .IP \fBfontSet\fP 1.5i
-.el .IP fontSet 1.5i
-The text font set to use when displaying the \fBlabel\fP, when the
-\fBinternational\fP resource is \fBtrue\fP.
-..
-.de Lg \" Label foreground
-.ie 'Bold'\\$1' .IP \fBforeground\fP 1.5i
-.el .IP foreground 1.5i
-A pixel value which indexes the widget's colormap to derive the
-foreground color of the widget's window.  This color is also
-used to render all 1's in a \fBbitmap\fP one plane deep.
-..
-.de Ih \" Label internalHeight
-.ie 'Bold'\\$1' .IP \fBinternalHeight\fP 1.5i
-.el .IP internalHeight 1.5i
-.br
-.ns
-.ie 'Bold'\\$1' .IP \fBinternalWidth\fP 1.5i
-.el .IP internalWidth 1.5i
-The minimum amount of space to leave between the graphic
-and the vertical and horizontal edges of the window.
-..
-.de Ju \" Label justify
-.ie 'Bold'\\$1' .IP \fBjustify\fP 1.5i
-.el .IP justify 1.5i
-.IN "conversions" "Justify"
-Specifies left, center, or right alignment of graphic within the
-widget.  This resource may be specified with the values
-\fBXtJustifyLeft\fP, \fBXtJustifyCenter\fP, or \fBXtJustifyRight\fP.
-.Rs "left, right, \fPand\fB center".
-This resource only has noticeable effect when the width of the widget
-is larger than necessary to display the graphic.  Note that when the
-graphic is a multi-line \fBlabel\fP, the longest line will obey this
-justification while shorter lines will be left-justified with the longest
-one.
-
-..
-.de La \" Label label
-.ie 'Bold'\\$1' .IP \fBlabel\fP 1.5i
-.el .IP label 1.5i
-Specifies the text string to be displayed in the widget's window
-if no bitmap is specified.  The default is the name of this widget.
-Regardless of the value of \fBencoding\fP or \fBinternational\fP,
-a single newline character (1 byte) will cause a line break.
-..
-.de Ll \" Label leftBitmap
-.ie 'Bold'\\$1' .IP \fBleftBitmap\fP 1.5i
-.el .IP leftBitmap 1.5i
-Specifies a bitmap to display to the left of the graphic in the widget's
-window.
-..
-.de Re \" Label resize
-.ie 'Bold'\\$1' .IP \fBresize\fP 1.5i
-.el .IP resize 1.5i
-Specifies whether the widget should attempt to resize to its
-preferred dimensions whenever its resources are modified with
-\fBXtSetValues\fP.  This attempt to resize may be denied by the parent
-of this widget.  The parent is always free to resize the widget
-regardless of the state of this resource.
-..
-
-\" Command Widget Resource Definitions
-
-.de Cb \" Command callback
-.ie 'Bold'\\$1' .IP \fBcallback\fP 1.5i
-.el .IP callback 1.5i
-A list of routines to be called when the \fBnotify\fP action is invoked.
-..
-.de Cr \" Command cornerRoundPercent
-.ie 'Bold'\\$1' .IP \fBcornerRoundPercent\fP 1.5i
-.el .IP cornerRoundPercent 1.5i
-When a \fBShapeStyle\fP of \fBroundedRectangle\fP is used, this
-resource controls the radius of the rounded corner.  The radius of the
-rounded corners is specified as a percentage of the length of the
-shortest side of the widget.
-..
-.de Ht \" Command highlightThickness
-.ie 'Bold'\\$1' .IP \fBhighlightThickness\fP 1.5i
-.el .IP highlightThickness 1.5i
-The thickness of the rectangle that is used to highlight the internal
-border of this widget, alerting the user that it is ready to be
-selected.  The default value is 2 pixels if the \fBshapeStyle\fP is
-\fBrectangle\fP, and 0 Pixels (no highlighting) otherwise.
-..
-.de Ss \" Command shapeStyle
-.ie 'Bold'\\$1' .IP \fBshapeStyle\fP 1.5i
-.el .IP shapeStyle 1.5i
-.IN "conversions" "ShapeStyle"
-Nonrectangular widgets may be created using this resource.
-Nonrectangular widgets are supported only on a server that supports the
-\fBShape Extension\fP.  If nonrectangular widgets are specified
-for a server lacking this extension, the shape is ignored and the
-widgets will be rectangular.  The following shapes are currently
-supported: \fBXmuShapeRectangle\fP, \fBXmuShapeOval\fP,
-\fBXmuShapeEllipse\fP, and \fBXmuShapeRoundedRectangle\fP.
-.Rs "rectangle, oval, ellipse, \fPand\fP roundedRectangle"
-..
-
-\" Composite Resources
-
-.de Ch \" Composite children
-.IP children 1.5i
-A list of all this composite widget's current children.
-..
-.de Ip \" Composite insertPosition
-.IP insertPosition 1.5i
-A function which allows the application programmer to specify the position
-of a new child.
-..
-.de Nc \" Composite numChildren
-.IP numChildren 1.5i
-The number of children in this composite widget.
-..
-
-\" Form Resources
-
-.de Dd \" Form defaultDistance
-.ie 'Bold'\\$1' .IP \fBdefaultDistance\fP 1.5i
-.el .IP defaultDistance 1.5i
-The default internal spacing for the children.  This is
-the default value for the constraint resources \fBhorizDistance\fP and
-\fBvertDistance\fP.
-..
-
-\" Form Constraints
-
-.de Bt \" Form bottom, left, right, and top
-.ie 'Bold'\\$1' .IP \fBbottom\fP 1.5i
-.el .IP bottom 1.5i
-.br
-.ns
-.ie 'Bold'\\$1' .IP \fBleft\fP 1.5i
-.el .IP left 1.5i
-.br
-.ns
-.ie 'Bold'\\$1' .IP \fBright\fP 1.5i
-.el .IP right 1.5i
-.br
-.ns
-.ie 'Bold'\\$1' .IP \fBtop\fP 1.5i
-.el .IP top 1.5i
-What to do with this edge of the child when the parent is resized.  This
-resource may be any \fBedgeType\fP.  See \fBLayout Semantics\fP for
-details.
-..
-.de Fh \" Form fromHoriz and fromVert
-.ie 'Bold'\\$1' .IP \fBfromHoriz\fP 1.5i
-.el .IP fromHoriz 1.5i
-.br
-.ns
-.ie 'Bold'\\$1' .IP \fBfromVert\fP 1.5i
-.el .IP fromVert 1.5i
-Which widget this child should be placed underneath (or to the right
-of).  If a value of NULL is specified then this widget will be positioned
-relative to the edge of the parent.
-..
-.de Hd \" Form horizDistance and vertDistance
-.ie 'Bold'\\$1' .IP \fBhorizDistance\fP 1.5i
-.el .IP horizDistance 1.5i
-.br
-.ns
-.ie 'Bold'\\$1' .IP \fBvertDistance\fP 1.5i
-.el .IP vertDistance 1.5i
-The amount of space, in pixels, between this child and its left or
-upper neighbor.
-..
-.de Rl \" Form resizable
-.ie 'Bold'\\$1' .IP \fBresizable\fP 1.5i
-.el .IP resizable 1.5i
-If this resource is \fBFalse\fP then the parent widget will ignore all
-geometry request made by this child.  The parent may still resize this
-child itself, however.
-..
-
-.de Lt \" Form Section on Layout semantics
-The \\$1 widget uses two different sets of layout semantics.  One is
-used when initially laying out the children.  The other is used when
-the \\$1 is resized.
-.LP
-The first layout method uses the \fBfromVert\fP and \fPfromHoriz\fP
-.IN "fromVert" "
-.IN "fromHoriz" ""
-resources to place the children of the \\$1.  A single pass is made
-through the \\$1 widget's children in the order that they were created.
-Each child is then placed in the \\$1 widget below or to the right of
-the widget specified by the \fBfromVert\fP and \fBfromHoriz\fP resources.
-The distance the new child is placed from its left or upper neighbor is
-determined by the \fBhorizDistance\fP and \fBvertDistance\fP resources.
-.IN "horizDistance" ""
-.IN "vertDistance" ""
-.IN "conversions" "Widget"
-This implies some things about how the order of creation affects the
-possible placement of the children.  The Form widget registers a
-string to widget converter which does not postpone conversion and
-does not cache conversion results.
-.LP
-The second layout method is used when the \\$1 is resized.  It does not
-matter what causes this resize, and it is possible for a resize to
-happen before the widget becomes visible (due to constraints imposed by
-the parent of the \\$1).  This layout method uses the \fBbottom\fP,
-\fBtop\fP, \fBleft\fP, and \fBright\fP resources.  These resources are
-used to determine what will happen to each edge of the child when the
-\\$1 is resized.  If a value of \fBXawChain\fP\fI<something>\fP is
-.IN "XawChain" ""
-specified, the the edge of the child will remain a fixed distance from
-the \fIchain\fP edge of the \\$1.  For example if \fBXawChainLeft\fP is
-specified for the \fBright\fP resource of a child then the right edge of
-that child will remain a fixed distance from the left edge of the \\$1
-widget.  If a value of \fBXawRubber\fP is specified, that edge will grow
-.IN "XawRubber" ""
-by the same percentage that the \\$1 grew.  For instance if the \\$1
-grows by 50% the left edge of the child (if specified as \fBXawRubber\fP
-will be 50% farther from the left edge of the \\$1).  One must be very
-careful when specifying these resources, for when they are specified
-incorrectly children may overlap or completely occlude other children
-when the \\$1 widget is resized.
-..
-
-\" Text Resources
-
-.de Af \" Text autoFill
-.ie 'Bold'\\$1' .IP \fBautoFill\fP 1.5i
-.el .IP autoFill 1.5i
-If this resource is \fBTrue\fP the text widget will automatically break a line
-when the user attempts to type into the right margin.  The attribute has
-no effect on files or text inserted into the text widget.  It only
-checks to see if the action should be taken when a user enters a new
-character via the \fIinsert-character\fP action.
-..
-.de Tm \" Text margin resources
-.ie 'Bold'\\$1' .IP \fBbottomMargin\fP 1.5i
-.el .IP bottomMargin 1.5i
-.br
-.ns
-.ie 'Bold'\\$1' .IP \fBleftMargin\fP 1.5i
-.el .IP leftMargin 1.5i
-.br
-.ns
-.ie 'Bold'\\$1' .IP \fBrightMargin\fP 1.5i
-.el .IP rightMargin 1.5i
-.br
-.ns
-.ie 'Bold'\\$1' .IP \fBtopMargin\fP 1.5i
-.el .IP topMargin 1.5i
-The amount of space, in pixels, between the edge of the window
-and the corresponding edge of the text within the window.  If there is
-a scrollbar active on this edge, then this is the space between the text and
-the scrollbar.
-..
-.de Tc \" Text displayCaret
-.ie 'Bold'\\$1' .IP \fBdisplayCaret\fP 1.5i
-.el .IP displayCaret 1.5i
-Whether or not to display the text insert point.
-..
-.de Td \" Text displayPosition
-.ie 'Bold'\\$1' .IP \fBdisplayPosition\fP 1.5i
-.el .IP displayPosition 1.5i
-The position in the text buffer of the character that is currently
-displayed in the upper left hand corner of the text display.
-..
-.de Ti \" Text insertPosition
-.ie 'Bold'\\$1' .IP \fBinsertPosition\fP 1.5i
-.el .IP insertPosition 1.5i
-This is the location of the insert point.  It is expressed in
-characters from the beginning of the file.  The cursor will always be
-forced to be on the screen.  This resource may therefore be used to
-scroll the text display to a certain character position.
-..
-.de Tz \" Text resize
-.ie 'Bold'\\$1' .IP \fBresize\fP 1.5i
-.el .IP resize 1.5i
-.IN "conversions" "XawTextResizeMode"
-Controls whether or not the Text widget attempts to resize itself when
-it is no longer able to display the full text buffer in the associated
-window.  Any attempt by the Text widget to resize itself is always
-subject to the constraints imposed by its parent.  The values
-\fBXawtextResizeNever\fP, \fBXawtextResizeWidth\fP,
-.IN "XawtextResizeNever" ""
-.IN "XawtextResizeWidth" ""
-\fBXawtextResizeHeight\fP, and \fBXawtextResizeBoth\fP are all
-.IN "XawtextResizeHeight" ""
-.IN "XawtextResizeBoth" ""
-acceptable for this resource.
-.Rs "never, height, width, \fPand\fB both"
-..
-.de Ts \" Text scrollHorizontal and scrollVertical
-.ie 'Bold'\\$1' .IP \fBscrollHorizontal\fP 1.5i
-.el .IP scrollHorizontal 1.5i
-.br
-.ns
-.ie 'Bold'\\$1' .IP \fBscrollVertical\fP 1.5i
-.el .IP scrollVertical 1.5i
-.IN "conversions" "XawTextScrollMode"
-These resources control the placement of scrollbars on the left and
-bottom edge of the text widget.  These resources accept the
-values \fBXawtextScrollAlways\fP, \fBXawtextScrollWhenNeeded\fP, and
-.IN "XawtextScrollAlways" ""
-.IN "XawtextScrollWhenNeeded" ""
-\fBXawtextScrollNever\fP.
-.IN "XawtextScrollNever" ""
-.Rs "always, never, \fPand\fB whenNeeded"
-If \fBXawtextScrollWhenNeeded\fP is specified, the appropriate scrollbar
-will only appear when there is text in the buffer that is not able to
-fit within the bounds of the current window.  The scrollbar will
-disappear when the text once again fits within the window.
-..
-.de St \" Text selectTypes
-.ie 'Bold'\\$1' .IP \fBselectTypes\fP 1.5i
-.el .IP selectTypes 1.5i
-Specifies the selection type array that is used when
-multi-click is activated (see \fBText Selections for Application
-Programmers\fP for details).  This resource is used in place, and must
-not be freed until the widget is destroyed.  There is no
-type converter registered for this resource, so it may not be set from
-the resource manager.
-..
-.de To \" Text Source and Sink Objects
-.ie 'Bold'\\$1' .IP \fBtextSink\fP 1.5i
-.el .IP textSink 1.5i
-.br
-.ns
-.ie 'Bold'\\$1' .IP \fBtextSource\fP 1.5i
-.el .IP textSource 1.5i
-These are the TextSink or TextSource objects used by this widget.
-.ie 'Bold'\\$1' When using the Text widget these MUST be set by the \
-application programmer.
-.el \{\
-When \fBinternational\fP is set to \fBtrue\fP
-the AsciiText widget initializes these resources to point
-to an MultiSink and MultiSrc respectively.
-When \fBinternational\fP is set to \fBfalse\fP
-the AsciiText widget initializes these resources to point
-to an AsciiSink and AsciiSrc respectively.
-.\}
-..
-.de Tw \" Text wrap
-.ie 'Bold'\\$1' .IP \fBwrap\fP 1.5i
-.el .IP wrap 1.5i
-When the text in any one line is wider than the window there are several
-possible actions.  This resource allows the user to decide what will
-happen.  The accepted values for this resource are
-\fBXawtextWrapNever\fP, \fBXawtextWrapLine\fP, and
-.IN "XawtextWrapNever" ""
-.IN "XawtextWrapLine" ""
-\fBXawtextWrapWord\fP.  With \fBXawtextWrapLine\fP all text
-.IN "XawtextWrapWord" ""
-.IN "WrapMode"
-that is beyond the right edge of the window will be displayed on the
-next line.  With \fBXawtextWrapWord\fP the
-same action occurs but the text is broken at a word boundary if
-possible.  If no wrapping is enabled then the text will extend off
-the edge of the window, and a small rectangle will be painted in the
-right margin to alert the user that this line is too long.
-.Rs "never, word, \fPand\fB line"
-..
-.de Tu \" Text unrealizeCallback
-.ie 'Bold'\\$1' .IP \fBunrealizeCallback\fP 1.5i
-.el .IP unrealizeCallback 1.5i
-A list of callback functions which will be executed when the Text widget
-is unrealized.
-..
-
-\" Text Sink Resources
-
-.de Sb \" TextSink background
-.ie 'Bold'\\$1 .IP \fBbackground\fP 1.5i
-.el .IP background 1.5i
-A pixel value which indexes the Text widget's colormap to derive the
-background color used by the text sink.
-..
-.de Sg \" TextSink foreground
-.ie 'Bold'\\$1' .IP \fBforeground\fP 1.5i
-.el .IP foreground 1.5i
-A pixel value which indexes the Text widget's colormap to derive the
-foreground color used by the text sink.
-.Sk \\$1
-..
-
-\" Ascii Sink Resources
-
-.de Sd \" AsciiSink displayNonprinting
-.ie 'Bold'\\$1' .IP \fBdisplayNonprinting\fP 1.5i
-.el .IP displayNonprinting 1.5i
-If this resource is \fBTrue\fP, the Text widget will display all
-non-printable characters as the string \fI^@\fP.  If \fBFalse\fP, the
-Text widget
-will just leave a blank space where a non-printable character exists
-in the text buffer.
-.Sk \\$1
-..
-.de Sh \" AsciiSink echo
-.ie 'Bold'\\$1' .IP \fBecho\fP 1.5i
-.el .IP echo 1.5i
-Whether or not to echo characters to the screen.  The buffer can still
-be edited, but nothing is displayed.  This mode can be useful for
-entering passwords and other sensitive information.
-.Sk \\$1
-..
-.de Sf \" AsciiSink font
-.ie 'Bold'\\$1' .IP \fBfont\fP 1.5i
-.el .IP font 1.5i
-The text font to use when displaying the \fBstring\fP, when the
-\fBinternational\fP resource is \fBfalse\fP.
-.Sk \\$1
-..
-.de Sn \" MultiSink fontSet
-.ie 'Bold'\\$1' .IP \fBfont\fP 1.5i
-.el .IP font 1.5i
-The text font set to use when displaying the \fBstring\fP, when the
-\fBinternational\fP resource is \fBtrue\fP.
-.Sk \\$1
-..
-
-\" TextSrc Resources
-
-.de Oe \" TextSrc editType
-.ie 'Bold'\\$1' .IP \fBeditType\fP 1.5i
-.el .IP editType 1.5i
-This is the type of editing that will be allowed in this text widget.
-Legal values are \fBXawtextRead\fP, \fBXawtextEdit\fP, and
-.IN "XawtextRead" ""
-.IN "XawtextEdit" ""
-\fBXawtextAppend\fP.
-.IN "XawtextAppend" ""
-.IN "conversions" "XawTextEditType"
-.Rs "read, edit, \fPand\fB append"
-.So \\$1
-..
-
-\" AsciiSrc Resources
-
-
-.de Oc \" AsciiSrc callback
-.ie 'Bold'\\$1' .IP \fBcallback\fP 1.5i
-.el .IP callback 1.5i
-The callbacks registered on this resource will be called every time the
-text buffer changes, after the text has been updated.
-.So \\$1
-..
-.de Od \" AsciiSrc dataCompression
-.ie 'Bold'\\$1' .IP \fBdataCompression\fP 1.5i
-.el .IP dataCompression 1.5i
-The AsciiSrc uses an algorithm that may cause the text buffer to grow
-to about twice the size of the actual text over time, as the text is
-edited.  On systems where CPU cycles are cheaper than memory, it is helpful to
-spend some extra time to compress this buffer back to its minimum size.
-If this resource is \fBTrue\fP, the AsciiSrc will compress its data
-to the minimum size required every time the text string is saved, or the
-value of the string is queried.
-.So \\$1
-..
-.de Ol \" AsciiSrc length
-.ie 'Bold'\\$1' .IP \fBlength\fP 1.5i
-.el .IP length 1.5i
-If the \fBuseStringInPlace\fP resource is \fBFalse\fP this attribute has no
-effect.  If that resource is \fBTrue\fP, however, then the \fBlength\fP
-resource specifies the length of the buffer passed to the text widget
-in the \fBstring\fP resource.
-.So \\$1
-..
-.de Op \" AsciiSrc pieceSize
-.ie 'Bold'\\$1' .IP \fBpieceSize\fP 1.5i
-.el .IP pieceSize 1.5i
-This is the size of the internal chunks into which the text buffer is
-broken down for memory management.  The larger this value the less segmented
-your memory will be, but the slower your editing will be.  The text
-widgets will always allocate a chunk of memory this size to stuff the
-\fBstring\fP into, so when using small strings, having this buffer
-large can waste memory.  This resource has no effect if
-\fBuseStringInPlace\fP is \fBTrue\fP.
-.So \\$1
-..
-.de Os \" AsciiSrc string
-.ie 'Bold'\\$1' .IP \fBstring\fP 1.5i
-.el .IP string 1.5i
-If \fBtype\fP is \fBXawAsciiString\fP then this string contains the
-buffer to be displayed in the widget.  If \fBtype\fP is
-\fBXawAsciiFile\fP then the string contains the name of the file to be
-displayed.  This string is normally copied by the text widget into
-internal memory, but may be used in place by setting the
-\fBuseStringInPlace\fP resource.  As of X11R4 this is a settable resource.
-.So \\$1
-When the \fBstring\fP resource is queried, using \fBXtGetValues\fP, and
-\fBuseStringInPlace\fP is false, the value returned is valid until
-the next time the \fBstring\fP resource is queried, or until the application
-writer calls \fBXawAsciiSourceFreeString\fP.  If \fBuseStringInPlace\fP is
-true, a pointer to the actual string is returned.  See also section 5.6.
-..
-.de Ot \" AsciiSrc type
-.ie 'Bold'\\$1' .IP \fBtype\fP 1.5i
-.el .IP type 1.5i
-This resource may be either \fBXawAsciiString\fP or
-\fBXawAsciiFile\fP.  The value of this resource determines whether the
-\fBstring\fP resource contains the name of a file to be opened or a buffer to
-be displayed by the text widget.  A converter has been registered for
-this resource and accepts the values \fBstring\fP and \fBfile\fP.
-.IN "conversions" "AsciiType"
-.So \\$1
-..
-.de Ou \" AsciiSrc useStringInPlace
-.ie 'Bold'\\$1' .IP \fBuseStringInPlace\fP 1.5i
-.el .IP useStringInPlace 1.5i
-Setting this resource to \fBTrue\fP will disable the memory management
-provided by the Text widget, updating the \fBstring\fP resource in
-place.  Using the string in place can
-be much more efficient for text widgets that display static data, or
-where the programmer wishes to impose strict constraints on the
-contents of the \fBstring\fP.  When using the string in place be sure that:
-the length of the string is specified by setting the \fBlength\fP resource,
-the \fBtype\fP of the Text widget is \fBXawAsciiString\fP, and that
-the \fBstring\fP exists for the lifetime of the text widget, or until it has
-been reset.  \fINote: Since the MultiSrc and AsciiSrc have different data
-formats, use of this resource forces application code to be cognisant as to
-which of the two is being used.  Application programming is simplified when
-use of this resource is avoided.\fP
-.So \\$1
-..
-.\" .TB is used throughout this manual.  Don't know what it is,
-.\" but I'll guess "table bold".
-.\" Note that I've also used it to set the size, rather than
-.\" have (incorrect) commands sprinkled throughout the document.
-.\"   -gildea April 1994
-.de TB
-.B
-.ps 9
-.vs 11
-..
diff --git a/libXaw/spec/widg.idxmac.t b/libXaw/spec/widg.idxmac.t
deleted file mode 100644
index b464a1a7d..000000000
--- a/libXaw/spec/widg.idxmac.t
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,3 +0,0 @@
-.eh '\fBAthena Widget Set\fP''\fB\*(xV\fP'
-.oh '\fBAthena Widget Set\fP''\fB\*(xV\fP'
-.so index.pageno